Cat. No.

V083-E1-07

NS-Series
NS12-TS00#-V1/-V2, NS12-TS01#-V1/-V2
NS10-TV00#-V1/-V2, NS10-TV01#-V1/-V2
NS8-TV00#-V1/-V2, NS8-TV01#-V1/-V2
NS8-TV10#-V1, NS8-TV11#-V1
NS5-SQ00#-V1/-V2, NS5-SQ01#-V1/-V2,
NS5-TQ00#-V2, NS5-TQ01#-V2,
NS5-MQ00#-V2, NS5-MQ01#-V2

Programmable Terminals

SETUP MANUAL

Notice
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a
qualified operator and only for the purposes described in this manual.

! DANGER

The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual.
Always heed the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result
in injury to people or damage to property.
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.

! WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.
! Caution

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury, or property damage.

OMRON Product References

All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word "Unit" is also capitalized when it
refers to an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of
the product.
The abbreviation "Ch," which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products, often
means "word" and is abbreviated "Wd" in documentation in this sense.
The abbreviation "PLC" means Programmable Controller.
The abbreviation "host" means a controller, such as an IBM PC/AT or compatible computer,
that controls a PT (Programmable Terminal).

Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different
types of information.
Note

Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation

of the product.

Reference

Indicates supplementary information on related topics that may be of interest to

the user.

1, 2, 3...

1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.

CS1G-CPU@ @ -V1

Boxes in model numbers indicate variable characters. For example,

"CS1G-CPU@ @ -EV1" indicates the following models: CS1G-CPU42-EV1,
CS1G-CPU43-EV1, CS1G-CPU44-EV1, and CS1G-CPU45-EV1.

OMRON, 2003
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or
by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of
OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is
constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without
notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no responsibility
for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in
this publication.

Contents
Notice ..............................................................................................................................................1
About this Manual ...............................................................................................................................7
Related Manuals ..................................................................................................................................8
Terminology ........................................................................................................................................9
Introduction .......................................................................................................................................10

Section 1

Overview

1-1 NS-series PT Functions and Operation............................................................................................ 1-2

1-1-1 PT Functions for FA Manufacturing Sites ........................................................................... 1-2
1-1-2 NS-series PT Operating System........................................................................................... 1-3
1-2 Communications with the Host ....................................................................................................... 1-5
1-2-1 What is an NT Link?............................................................................................................ 1-6
1-2-2 Ethernet ................................................................................................................................ 1-6
1-2-3 Controller Link..................................................................................................................... 1-6
1-2-4 Host Link ............................................................................................................................. 1-6
1-2-5 Connecting to a Temperature Controller.............................................................................. 1-6
1-2-6 Memory Link Connections .................................................................................................. 1-7
1-2-7 Communicating with Other Devices .................................................................................... 1-7
1-3 System Configuration ...................................................................................................................... 1-8
1-3-1 Supported Peripheral Devices .............................................................................................. 1-8
1-4 Procedure for Running NS-series PTs........................................................................................... 1-10

Section 2

Before Connecting

2-1 Connecting the Host ........................................................................................................................ 2-2

2-1-1 Communications Types and Connection Methods............................................................... 2-2
2-2 Part Names and Functions ............................................................................................................... 2-7

Section 3

Installing the PT and Connecting Peripheral Devices

3-1 Installing the PT .............................................................................................................................. 3-3

3-1-1 Installation Environment...................................................................................................... 3-3
3-1-2 Installing RS-232C/RS-422A Converters ............................................................................ 3-4
3-1-3 Mounting the PT to the Control Panel ................................................................................. 3-4
3-1-4 Connecting the Power Supply.............................................................................................. 3-5
3-1-5 Wiring the Ground Wire ...................................................................................................... 3-7
3-1-6 Peripheral Device Connection Limitations .......................................................................... 3-7
3-2 Starting the PT................................................................................................................................. 3-8
3-2-1 Operation at Startup ............................................................................................................. 3-8
3-2-2 Starting the PT for the First Time ...................................................................................... 3-10
3-3 Connecting the CX-Designer......................................................................................................... 3-12
3-3-1 Connecting via RS-232C or Ethernet................................................................................. 3-12
3-3-2 Connecting via USB........................................................................................................... 3-12
3-3-3 Connecting via a Modem ................................................................................................... 3-13
3-4 Connecting to Bar Code Readers................................................................................................... 3-14
3-4-1 Connection Methods .......................................................................................................... 3-14
3-4-2 Setting Bar Code Readers .................................................................................................. 3-15
3-4-3 Data Format ....................................................................................................................... 3-16

3-5
3-6

3-7

3-8

3-4-4 Bar Code Input................................................................................................................... 3-16

Connecting to Printers ................................................................................................................... 3-17
3-5-1 Connection Method............................................................................................................ 3-17
Using Memory Cards..................................................................................................................... 3-18
3-6-1 Installation.......................................................................................................................... 3-19
3-6-2 Replacing the System Program .......................................................................................... 3-20
3-6-3 Transferring Data with Memory Cards .............................................................................. 3-21
Installing the Video Input Unit ...................................................................................................... 3-27
3-7-1 Video Input Unit Components ........................................................................................... 3-27
3-7-2 Nomenclature and Functions.............................................................................................. 3-28
3-7-3 Installation Method for Video Input Unit .......................................................................... 3-29
3-7-4 Connecting to Video Input Connectors.............................................................................. 3-34
Installing the Controller Link Interface Unit ................................................................................. 3-39
3-8-1 Controller Link Interface Unit Components ...................................................................... 3-39
3-8-2 Nomenclature and Functions.............................................................................................. 3-40
3-8-3 Installation Method for Controller Link Interface Unit...................................................... 3-43
3-8-4 Wiring ................................................................................................................................ 3-50

Section 4

Connecting the Host to Serial Port

4-1 1:1 Host Connection ........................................................................................................................ 4-2

4-1-1 Connection Methods ............................................................................................................ 4-2
4-1-2 Unit Setting Methods ........................................................................................................... 4-4
4-2 1:N Host Connection ....................................................................................................................... 4-7
4-2-1 Connection Methods ............................................................................................................ 4-7
4-2-2 Unit Setting Methods ........................................................................................................... 4-7
4-3 High-speed 1:N NT Link ............................................................................................................... 4-16
4-3-1 Unit Setting Methods ......................................................................................................... 4-17
4-4 Recommended Connector Cables.................................................................................................. 4-24

Section 5

Connecting to Host via Ethernet or Controller Link

5-1 Connecting to Host Via Ethernet..................................................................................................... 5-2

5-1-1 Host Types and Settings....................................................................................................... 5-3
5-2 Connecting to the Host Using Controller Link .............................................................................. 5-15
5-2-1 What Is a Controller Link Network?.................................................................................. 5-15
5-2-2 Data Links.......................................................................................................................... 5-16

Section 6

System Menu Operations

6-1 Operating Modes and System Menu................................................................................................ 6-3

6-1-1 Mode Configuration............................................................................................................. 6-3
6-1-2 System Menu Configuration ................................................................................................ 6-3
6-1-3 Overview of Menu Items ..................................................................................................... 6-4
6-1-4 Using the System Menu ....................................................................................................... 6-7
6-2 Initializing and Saving Data and Removing the Memory Card..................................................... 6-10
6-2-1 Screen Data Area Format ................................................................................................... 6-11
6-2-2 Initializing or Saving the Alarm/Event History ................................................................. 6-12
6-2-3 Initializing and Saving Data Log ....................................................................................... 6-13
6-2-4 Initializing and Saving the Operation Log ......................................................................... 6-14
6-2-5 Initializing and Saving the Error Log................................................................................. 6-16

6-2-6 Language Selection ............................................................................................................ 6-17

6-2-7 Removing the Memory Card.............................................................................................. 6-18
6-2-8 Initializing Internal Holding Memories ($HB/$HW)......................................................... 6-19
6-3 PT Settings .................................................................................................................................... 6-20
6-3-1 Start-up Wait Time............................................................................................................. 6-22
6-3-2 Screen Saver....................................................................................................................... 6-22
6-3-3 Key Press Sound ................................................................................................................ 6-23
6-3-4 Buzzer Sound ..................................................................................................................... 6-23
6-3-5 Backlight ............................................................................................................................ 6-24
6-3-6 Calendar Check .................................................................................................................. 6-24
6-3-7 Printer Type ....................................................................................................................... 6-25
6-3-8 Printing Mode .................................................................................................................... 6-26
6-3-9 Orientation ......................................................................................................................... 6-26
6-3-10 Changing Values in Device Monitor Setting ..................................................................... 6-26
6-3-11 Contrast (NS5-SQ0@/NS5-MQ0@ Only).......................................................................... 6-27

6-4

6-5

6-6

6-7
6-8

6-3-12 CJK Han Unification Priority............................................................................................. 6-27

6-3-13 Alarm Monitor Registration Procedure.............................................................................. 6-27
Project Settings.............................................................................................................................. 6-28
6-4-1 Project Title........................................................................................................................ 6-28
6-4-2 Number of Labels............................................................................................................... 6-29
6-4-3 Initial Screen ...................................................................................................................... 6-29
6-4-4 Initial Label........................................................................................................................ 6-29
6-4-5 Alarm/Event History Recording Method ........................................................................... 6-29
6-4-6 Data Log Recording Method.............................................................................................. 6-29
6-4-7 Operation Log Recording Method ..................................................................................... 6-30
6-4-8 Error Log Recording Method............................................................................................. 6-30
6-4-9 System Memory ................................................................................................................. 6-30
Setting Passwords .......................................................................................................................... 6-31
6-5-1 Changing the Password ...................................................................................................... 6-31
6-5-2 Setting the Password Function ........................................................................................... 6-32
Communications Settings .............................................................................................................. 6-34
6-6-1 Communications Conditions.............................................................................................. 6-34
6-6-2 Setting 1:1 NT Link ........................................................................................................... 6-36
6-6-3 Setting High-speed 1:N NT Links (Standard, High-speed)................................................ 6-36
6-6-4 Setting Ethernet.................................................................................................................. 6-37
6-6-5 Setting the Controller Link Network.................................................................................. 6-40
6-6-6 Setting Bar Code Readers .................................................................................................. 6-41
6-6-7 Modem Settings ................................................................................................................. 6-42
Screen Data Check ........................................................................................................................ 6-43
Special Screens .............................................................................................................................. 6-44
6-8-1 Alarm History .................................................................................................................... 6-45
6-8-2 Operation Log .................................................................................................................... 6-46
6-8-3 Error Log............................................................................................................................ 6-47
6-8-4 Device Monitor .................................................................................................................. 6-48
6-8-5 Communication Test .......................................................................................................... 6-50
6-8-6 Video Configuration .......................................................................................................... 6-51

6-8-7 USB Device List ................................................................................................................ 6-53

6-8-8 Display Capture Data ......................................................................................................... 6-54
6-8-9 Memory Card Transfers ..................................................................................................... 6-55
6-8-10 External Application Startup.............................................................................................. 6-57
6-8-11 Version Display ................................................................................................................. 6-57
6-8-12 PLC Data Trace (NS12, NS10, and NS8 Only) ................................................................. 6-58
6-9 Hardware Check ............................................................................................................................ 6-60
6-9-1 LCD Check ........................................................................................................................ 6-60
6-9-2 Touch Switch Check .......................................................................................................... 6-61
6-10 Starting Operations ........................................................................................................................ 6-62

Section 7

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

7-1 Maintenance .................................................................................................................................... 7-2

7-1-1 Replacing the Battery........................................................................................................... 7-2
7-2 Inspection and Cleaning .................................................................................................................. 7-4
7-3 Troubleshooting and Maintenance .................................................................................................. 7-6
7-4 Requesting a Replacement PT ....................................................................................................... 7-14
A

Appendices
Appendix 1 Specifications .......................................................................................................................A-3
A-1-1 General Specifications .........................................................................................................A-3
A-1-2 Characteristics......................................................................................................................A-5
A-1-3 Communications Specifications...........................................................................................A-7
Appendix 2 Dimensions ........................................................................................................................A-10
Appendix 3 Using NS-AL002 Converters.............................................................................................A-17
A-3-1 Dimensions ........................................................................................................................A-17
A-3-2 Mounting and Removing ...................................................................................................A-18
A-3-3 Specifications .....................................................................................................................A-18
A-3-4 DIP Switch Settings ...........................................................................................................A-19
A-3-5 Pin Arrangement ................................................................................................................A-20
A-3-6 Handling the Shield on RS-422A/485 Cables....................................................................A-21
A-3-7 Connection Example ..........................................................................................................A-24
Appendix 4 Using NT-AL001 Converters.............................................................................................A-25
A-4-1 Dimensions ........................................................................................................................A-25
A-4-2 Methods for Mounting and Removal .................................................................................A-25
A-4-3 Specifications .....................................................................................................................A-27
A-4-4 DIP Switch Settings ...........................................................................................................A-28
A-4-5 Pin Arrangement ................................................................................................................A-29
A-4-6 Block Diagram ...................................................................................................................A-30
Appendix 5 Preparing Connecting Cables.............................................................................................A-31
A-5-1 Cable Preparation...............................................................................................................A-31
A-5-2 Soldering ............................................................................................................................A-32
A-5-3 Hood Assembly..................................................................................................................A-32
A-5-4 Preparing Connecting Cables for Host Connection ...........................................................A-33
Appendix 6 Preparing Cables for Computer Connection ......................................................................A-37
A-6-1 Connecting Cable Assembly ..............................................................................................A-37
Appendix 7 Preparing Connecting Cables for Bar Code Readers .........................................................A-39

Appendix 8 Standard Models ................................................................................................................A-40

Appendix 9 List of Optional Products ...................................................................................................A-53
A-9-1 Anti-reflection Sheets: NS12-KBA04, NS7-KBA04, NT30-KBA04 ................................A-53
A-9-2 Protective Covers: NS12-KBA05(N), NS7-KBA05(N), NT31C-KBA05(N) ..................A-53
A-9-3 NT30-KBA01 Chemical-resistant Cover ...........................................................................A-54
A-9-4 Replacement Battery: CJ1W-BAT01.................................................................................A-55
A-9-5 Recommended Memory Cards...........................................................................................A-55
A-9-6 NS-CLK21 Controller Link Interface Unit ........................................................................A-56
A-9-7 NS-CA001/CA002 Video Input Unit.................................................................................A-56
A-9-8 Attachments: NS12-ATT01(B)/ NS12-ATT02/NS8-ATT01/ NS8-ATT02 ......................A-56
Appendix 10 System Memory List ......................................................................................................A-57
Appendix 11 Differences between "-V1"/"-V2" Models and Other Models .......................................A-60
Appendix 12 NS5 System Menu..........................................................................................................A-62

About this Manual

Section 1 Overview
This section provides an overview of the NS-series PTs, including functions, features, connection types, and
communications methods.

Section 2 Before Connecting

This section provides information on methods for connecting NS-series PTs that must be understood before
connecting the host and peripheral devices.

Section 3 Installing the PT and Connecting Peripheral Devices

This section describes the methods used to install the PT and connect peripheral devices.

Section 4 Connecting Host to Serial Port

This section describes the methods for connecting the host to the serial port of the PT.

Section 5 Connecting to Host via Ethernet or Controller Link

This section describes the methods for connecting the PT to the host using the PTs Ethernet interface or Controller
Link.

Section 6 System Menu Operations

This section describes the methods for operating the System Menu. It also provides details on functions that are
useful for NS-series PT applications and for system maintenance.

Section 7 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

This section describes the maintenance and inspection methods for preventing errors occurring, and troubleshooting
measures when errors occur in the PT.

Appendices
Describe hardware specifications and methods for preparing connections cables, and provide lists of standard
products.

WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in
personal injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure. Please read each
section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section
and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given.

Related Manuals
The following manuals are used for NS-series PTs. (The boxes at the end of the catalog
numbers indicate the revision code.)

This
manual

NS Series -V1/-V2 Setup Manual ...............................................V083-E1-@

Provides information on NS Series V1 and V2 PTs (i.e., NS12, NS10, NS8, and NS5).
Describes how to connect the PT to the host and peripheral devices, methods to setup
communications and operation, and procedures for maintenance.
Refer to the NS Series Programming Manual (V073-E1-@) for information on PT
functions and specific operating procedures.

NS Series Setup Manual ............................................................V072-E1-@

Provides information on NS Series PTs prior to V1 (i.e., NS12, NS10, and NS7).
Describes how to connect the PT to the host and peripheral devices, methods to setup
communications and operation, and procedures for maintenance.
Refer to the NS Series Programming Manual (V073-E1-@) for information on PT
functions and specific operating procedures.

NS Series Programming Manual ................................................V073-E1-@

Describes the screen configurations, object functions, and host communications for the
PT.

CX-Designer Users Manual .......................................................V088-E1-@

The screens displayed on the PT can be created in the CX-Designer and transferred
between the CX-Designer and PT. This manual describes the installation and features
of the CX-Designer. For details on CX-Designer operations, refer to the CX-Designers
Online Help.

Terminology
The following terminology is used in this manual.
PT

In this manual, indicates an NS-series Programmable Terminal.

NS Series

Indicates products in the OMRON NS@ @ Series of Programmable Terminals.

PLC

Indicates a Programmable Controller in the OMRON SYSMAC CS/CJ, C, or

CVM1/CV Series of Programmable Controllers.

CS/CJ Series

Indicates Programmable Controllers in the OMRON SYSMAC CS/CJ Series of

Programmable Controllers: CS1G, CS1H, CS1G-H, CS1H-H, CJ1G, CJ1G-H,
CJ1H-H, CJ1M, CP1H, CP1L.
In this manual, CJ1H-H indicates the CJ1H-CPU@@H-R and CJ1H-CPU@@H
CPU Units. CJ1H-H-R is used to indicate only the CJ1H-CPU @@H-R CPU
Units.
The CP Series is used to indicate only the CP1H and CP1L.

C Series

Indicates products in the OMRON SYSMAC C Series of Programmable

Controllers: C200HS, C200HX(-Z), C200HG(-Z), C200HE(-Z), CQM1, CQM1H,
CPM1A, CPM2A, CPM2C.

CVM1/CV Series

Indicates products in the OMRON SYSMAC CVM1/ CV Series of Programmable

Controllers: CV500, CV1000, CV2000, CVM1

Serial Communications Unit

Indicates a Serial Communications Unit for an OMRON CS/CJ-series PLC.

Serial Communications Board Indicates a Serial Communications Board for an OMRON CS-series or CQM1H
PLC.
Communications Board

Indicates a Communications Board for an OMRON C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) PLC.

CPU Unit

Indicates a CPU Unit in the OMRON SYSMAC CS/CJ, C, or CVM1/CV Series of

Programmable Controllers.

CX-Designer

Indicates the OMRON CX-Designer (NS-CXDC1-V@ ).

Host

Indicates the PLC, IBM PC/AT or compatible computer, or personal computer

functioning as the control device and interfaced with the NS-series PT.

Programming Manual

Indicates the NS Series Programming Manual (V073-E1-@).

Introduction
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have knowledge of
electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).

Personnel in charge of introducing FA systems into production facilities.

Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.
Personnel in charge of installing and connecting FA systems.
Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.

General Precautions
The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications
described in the operation manuals.
Do not use the PT touch switch input functions for applications where danger to human
life or serious property damage is possible, or for emergency switch applications.
Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual or
applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems, aviation systems,
vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, safety
equipment, and other systems, machines and equipment that may have a serious
influence on lives and property if used improperly, consult your OMRON representative.
Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are sufficient
for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide the systems,
machines, and equipment with double safety mechanisms.
This manual provides information for connecting and setting up an NS-series PT. Be
sure to read this manual before attempting to use the PT and keep this manual close at
hand for reference during installation and operation.

Safety Precautions

Do not attempt to take the Unit apart and do not

touch any internal parts while the power is being
supplied. Doing either of these may result in
electrical shock.

Operating Environment Precautions

1. Do not install the Unit in the following places:
Locations subject to direct sunlight
Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in the
specifications
Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in temperature
Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases
Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts

10

 Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals

Locations subject to shock or vibration
2. Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in the following
locations:
Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise
Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields
Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity
Locations close to power supplies

Application Precautions
1. When unpacking the Units, check carefully for any external scratches or other damage.
Also, shake the Units gently and check for any abnormal sound.
2. The mounting panel must be between 1.6 and 4.8 mm thick. Tighten the Mounting
Brackets evenly to a torque of between 0.5 and 0.6 Nm to maintain water and dust
resistance. Make sure the panel is not dirty or warped and that it is strong enough to hold
the Units.
3. Do not let metal particles enter the Units when preparing the panel.
4. If conformance to EC Directives (Low Voltage Directive) is required, use reinforced
insulation for the power supplies.
5. Do not connect an AC power supply to the power terminals.
6. Use a DC power supply with minimal fluctuation voltage.
Rated power supply voltage: 24 VDC
(Allowable range: 20.4 to 27.6 VDC)
Capacity: 25 W min. (NS5: 15 W min.)
7. Do not perform a dielectric voltage test.
2
8. Use a twisted-pair cable with a cross-sectional area of at least 2 mm to connect to the
power terminals and always use M3.5 crimp terminals. Tighten the terminal screws to a
torque of 0.8 Nm. Make sure the screws are properly tightened.
9. Ground the Unit correctly to prevent operational errors caused by noise.
10. Do not touch the surface of the circuit board or the components mounted on it with your
bare hands. Discharge any static electricity from your body before handling the board.
11. Confirm that the current capacity of the connected device is 250 mA or less before using
the 5-V power supply from pin 6 of the serial port A, B connectors. The 5-V output of the
PT is 250 mA max. at 5 V 5%.
12. Turn OFF the power supply before connecting or disconnecting cables.
13. Always tighten the connector screws after connecting communications cables.
14. The maximum tensile load for cables is 30 N. Do not apply loads greater than this.
15. Confirm the safety of the system before turning ON or OFF the power supply or before
pressing the reset button.
16. The whole system may stop depending on how the power supply is turned ON or OFF.
Turn ON or OFF the power supply according to the specified procedure.
17. Start actual system application only after sufficiently checking screen data, macros, and
the operation of the program in the PC (host).
18. Always reset the power supply after changing switch settings.
19. After changing the settings of the DIP switch, always turn the power supply OFF and ON
or reset the PT.
20. Do not perform the following operations while the Memory Card is being accessed:
Turning OFF the power supply to the PT
Pressing the PTs reset switch
Removing the Memory Card
Always following the specified procedure when removing the Memory Card
21. Do not press the touch switch with a force greater than 30 N.
22. Do not accidentally press touch switches when the backlight is not lit or when the display
does not appear. Confirm the safety of the system before pressing touch switches.
11

23. Signals from the touch switches may not be input if the switches are pressed
consecutively at high speed. Confirm each input before proceeding to the next one.
24. Before initializing screen data, confirm that existing data is backed up at the CX-Designer.
25. When changing the password with the system menu, do not reset or turn OFF the power
supply until writing is finished (i.e., until the Write Button returns to its original condition). It
may become impossible to manipulate screens if the password is not set correctly.
26. When using the device monitor, confirm the safety of the system before performing the
following operations.
Changing monitor data
Changing operation modes
Forced setting or resetting
Changing present values or set values
27. Do not use benzene, paint thinner, or other volatile solvents, and do not use chemically
treated cloths.
28. Dispose of any battery that has been dropped on the floor or otherwise subjected to
excessive shock.
29. Do not attempt to disassemble, repair, or modify the Unit in any way.
30. Dispose of the Units and batteries according to local ordinances as they apply.

31. To ensure system safety, incorporate a program that periodically accesses PT operation
bits from the host side and check to confirm that the PT is properly operating.
32. Do not connect an USB connector to any device that is not applicable.
33. Before connecting an USB connector to a device, make sure that the device is free of
damage.
34. When mounting the Battery, be sure to use the correct Battery and mount it correctly.
35. The backlight in the NS-series PT contains mercury. Do not dispose of the PT together
with waste to be processed at disposal plants. Dispose of the PT according to all local
laws, regulations, and ordinances.

12

Read and Understand this Manual

Please read and understand this manual before using the product. Please consult your OMRON
representative if you have any questions or comments.

Warranty and Limitations of Liability

WARRANTY
OMRON's exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a
period of one year (or other period if specified) from date of sale by OMRON.
OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING
NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE
PRODUCTS. ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS
DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR
INTENDED USE. OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.

LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY
OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS,
WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR STRICT
LIABILITY.
In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on
which liability is asserted.
IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS
REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON'S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS
WERE PROPERLY HANDLED, STORED, INSTALLED, AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO
CONTAMINATION, ABUSE, MISUSE, OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR.

13

Application Considerations
SUITABILITY FOR USE
OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to the
combination of products in the customer's application or use of the products.
At the customer's request, OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying
ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products. This information by itself is not sufficient for a
complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product, machine,
system, or other application or use.
The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. This is not
intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products, nor is it intended to imply that the uses
listed may be suitable for the products:

Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions or
uses not described in this manual.
Nuclear energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical
equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate
industry or government regulations.
Systems, machines, and equipment that could present a risk to life or property.
Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR
PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO
ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND
INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.

PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS
OMRON shall not be responsible for the user's programming of a programmable product, or any
consequence thereof.

14

Disclaimers
CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other
reasons.
It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when
significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the products may be changed
without any notice. When in doubt, special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key
specifications for your application on your request. Please consult with your OMRON representative at any
time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products.

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes, even when
tolerances are shown.

PERFORMANCE DATA
Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does
not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of OMRON's test conditions, and the users must
correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and
Limitations of Liability.

ERRORS AND OMISSIONS

The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no
responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical, or proofreading errors, or omissions.

15

Section 1
Overview

This section provides an overview of the NS-series PTs, including functions, features, connection
types, and communications methods.

1-1

NS-series PT Functions and Operation............................................................................ 1-2

1-1-1 PT Functions for FA Manufacturing Sites................................................................. 1-2
1-1-2 NS-series PT Operating System ................................................................................ 1-3
1-2 Communications with the Host........................................................................................ 1-5
1-2-1 What is an NT Link? ................................................................................................. 1-6
1-2-2 Ethernet ..................................................................................................................... 1-6
1-2-3 Controller Link .......................................................................................................... 1-6
1-2-4 Host Link................................................................................................................... 1-6
1-2-5 Connecting to a Temperature Controller ................................................................... 1-6
1-2-6 Memory Link Connections........................................................................................ 1-7
1-2-7 Communicating with Another Companys PLCs ...................................................... 1-7
1-3 System Configuration ...................................................................................................... 1-8
1-3-1 Supported Peripheral Devices ................................................................................... 1-8
1-4 Procedure for Running NS-series PTs ........................................................................... 1-10

1-1 NS-series PT Functions and Operation

1-1 NS-series PT Functions and Operation

The NS Series offers advanced operator interfaces called Programmable Terminals that can
be used to display required information and provide operating capabilities for FA manufacturing sites. This section describes the role and functions of the NS-series PTs for first-time
users of Programmable Terminals.

1-1-1

PT Functions for FA Manufacturing Sites

Line Operating Status Monitor Display
NS-series PTs can be used to display information such as the operating status of the system
and the devices. Graphs and other indicators can be used to better represent the information
and make it easy to understand.

Directions for FA Site Operators

The PTs can be used to inform the operators of system and device errors and assist them in
taking appropriate measures.

1-2

1-1 NS-series PT Functions and Operation

Control Panel Switches

The NS-series PTs allow the user to create various on-screen switches. By using touch
switch inputs, operating results can be sent to the host.

1-1-2

NS-series PT Operating System

Transferring Screen Data
The screen data displayed on NS-series PTs is created using the CX-Designer on a computer and transferred to the PT through RS-232C, Ethernet, or USB communications.
Create screen data.
RS-232C, Ethernet,
Computer
USB
(CX-Designer)

Screen data
Connect the computer to the PT only
when transferring screen data to or from
the CX-Designer.

Note 1: Some models do not support Ethernet.

Note 2: USB data transfer is not supported for some PT lots and system program versions.

Screen data can also be transferred at high speed using a Memory Card.
Memory
Card
Computer
(CX-Designer)

1-3

1-1 NS-series PT Functions and Operation

Displaying Screens
The information displayed on the screens is created using the CX-Designer on a computer
and transferred to the PT. The required screens can be displayed by using commands from
the host or touch switch operations.
Host

The required screens can

be displayed by using
commands from the host
or touch switch operations.

Reading Data from the Host

A communications method such as NT Link Ethernet or Controller Link is used to connect the
host, and the required data is automatically read from the host.
Note: Some models do not support Ethernet or Controller Link.
NT Link or Ethernet,
Controller Link
Host

Sending Data to the Host

Data input using touch switches (button ON/OFF status, numerals, and character strings) is
sent to the host.
Host
Touch panel

ON/OFF status,
numeric data, etc.

1-4

1-2 Communications with the Host

1-2 Communications with the Host

NS-series PTs allow the user to allocate words and bits in any PLC area for use in accessing
the required display contents and storing input data.
Operations that can be performed include reading and writing allocated word contents and bit
status directly, changing the display status of functional objects on the PT screen, and controlling and notifying PT status.
The NS-series PTs also enable communications with more than one PLC. A host name is
registered for each PLC connected, allowing access to any PLC areas by specifying the host
name and address.
NS-Series PT

PLC

DM Area

I/O Area

Auxiliary Area

Timers/counters

When using NS-series PTs, the host can be connected using any of the following methods.

1:1 NT Link
1:N NT Link (normal or high-speed)
Ethernet
Controller Link
Host Link
Other methods, such as temperature controller protocols

1-5

1-2 Communications with the Host

1-2-1

What is an NT Link?
An NT Link is a method for high-speed communications between an OMRON PLC and an
OMRON Programmable Terminal (PT) using a special protocol. In addition to a 1:1 NT Link,
where a single PT is connected to a single PLC, NS-series PTs also support 1:N NT Links,
allowing up to eight PTs to be connected to a single PLC port.
CS- and CJ-series PLCs can also be connected using high-speed 1:N NT Link communications. For details on the PLCs that support high-speed 1:N NT Link communications, refer to
Appendix 8 Standard Models.
In the rest of this manual, "NT Link" refers to NT Link communications in general, "1:1 NT
Link" refers to an NT Link in a 1:1 configuration only, and "1:N NT Links" refers to NT Links in
a 1:N configuration only. Where necessary, "normal 1:N NT Links" and "high-speed 1:N NT
Links" are used. When "1:N NT Links" is used alone, it refers to both normal and high-speed
communications.

1-2-2

Ethernet
Ethernet Units in PLCs that are supported by the NS-series PTs can be used to read and
write data, word, and bit information simply. The use of FINS (Factory Interface Network Service) message communications, one of OMRONs standard communications services, enables high-speed communications without the need to be aware of the protocol.
For details on connection methods, refer to Section 5 Connecting to Host via Ethernet or
Controller Link. For details on the PLCs that can be connected to the Ethernet, refer to Appendix 8 Standard Models.

1-2-3

Controller Link
Controller Link is an FA network that can send and receive large data packets among
OMRON PLCs and FA computers. Controller Link Units for PLCs that are supported by the
NS-series PTs connected to NS-CLK21 Controller Link Interface Units can be used to read
and write data, word, and bit information simply.
The Controller Link supports data links that enable data sharing and a message service that
enables sending and receiving data when required.
For details on connection methods, refer to Section 5 Connecting to Host via Ethernet or
Controller Link. For details on the PLCs that can be connected using Controller Link, refer to
Appendix 8 Standard Models.

1-2-4

Host Link
Host Link is a serial communications protocol for connecting an OMRON PT 1:1 to a host (a
PLC) to read and write bits and words from the host. Host Link communications connect a PT
to many different PLCs. Refer to the Host Connection Manual (Host Links) for connection
methods and the PLCs for which Host Links can be used.

1-2-5

Connecting to a Temperature Controller

OMRON Temperature Controllers can be connected with an RS-485 connection.
Attach a CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A Converter to serial port A or B to convert the communications
protocol to RS-485. For details, refer to the Host Connection Manual (Temp. Control, MemLink).

1-6

1-2 Communications with the Host

1-2-6

Memory Link Connections

When the host is a computer instead of a PLC, the Memory Link protocol can be used to
connect with the computer. Use serial port A or B to connect to the host. For details, refer to
the Host Connection Manual (Tem.Control, MemLink).

1-2-7

Communicating with Other Devices

The NS-series PTs can communicate with the following PLCs.

OMRON Trajexia Motion Controllers

Mitsubishi FX-series, A-series, and Q-series PLCs

Siemens S7-300-series PLCs

Yaskawa MP-series Machine Controllers

Yaskawa F7-series Varispeed Inverters and VS Mini V7 Series

Yaskawa Eshed Technology XtraDrive Motion Controllers

For details on connection methods, refer to the Host Connection Manual (Multivendor Connection).

1-7

1-3 System Configuration

1-3 System Configuration

The following information describes the system configuration using NS-series PTs. Refer to
Appendix 8 Standard Models for details on available models.

1-3-1

Supported Peripheral Devices

Host

Twisted-pair cable

Bar Code Reader

Read bar codes as
text string data.

RS-232C cable (15 m max.)

RS-422A cable (500 m max.)
RS-232C/422A Adapter
Ethernet cable (See note 1.)

Controller Link
Interface Unit
Enables
Controller Link
communications
with a host.
See note 2.)

Video Input Unit

(See note 3.)

Video camera or
Vision Sensor

NTSC/PAL cable

Personal computer
Computer running Windows 98,
NT, Me, 2000, or XP

Memory Card
Save screen data or
the system program or
automatically read data
at startup.

CX-Designer

NS-series PT
Printer (See note 4.)
Connecting a general-purpose color
printer to the USB port on an
NS-series PT makes it possible to
print out the current PT display.

RS-232C cable
Ethernet cable
(See note 1.)
USB cable
(See note 5.)

Note 1: Only the following models support Ethernet: NS12-TS01(B)-V@, NS10-TV01(B)-V@,

NS8-TV@1(B)-V@, NS5-SQ01 (B)-V@, NS5-TQ01(B)-V@, and VS5-MQ01(B)-V@.
Note 2: Only the following models support the Controller Link Interface Unit: NS12-TS0@, NS10-TV0@.
(The NS8 and NS5 do not support the Controller Link Interface Unit.)
Note 3: The following models support the Video Input Unit: NS12-TS0@, NS10-TV0@, and
NS8-TV@@. (The NS5 does not support the Video Input Unit.)
Note 4: The NS5-SQ0@ (B)-V@, NS5-TQ0@ (B)-V@, and NS5-MQ0@ (B)-V@ do not have a USB port,
so they cannot be connected directly to general-purpose printers.
Note 5: Refer to 3-3-2 Connecting via USB for information on connecting the PT and computer with a
USB cable.

PTs (Refer to Appendix 8 Standard Models.)

Recommended Bar Code Reader (Refer to page 3-14.)
OMRON V520-RH21-6
OMRON V400-H111
OMRON V400-H211
RS-232C/422A Converters
OMRON NS-AL002 (non-insulated) (Refer to Appendix 3 Using NS-AL002 Converters.)
OMRON NT-AL001 (insulated) (Refer to Appendix 4 Using NT-AL001 Converters.)
OMRON CJ1W-CIF11

1-8

1-3 System Configuration

Recommended Memory Cards (Refer to 3-6 Using Memory Cards.)

OMRON HMC-EF183 (128-MB flash memory)
CX-Designer (Refer to the CX-Designer Online Help.)
NS-CXDC1-V@ (CD-ROM version)

Video Input Unit (Refer to 3-7 Installing the Video Input Unit.)
NS-CA001
NS-CA002: Refer to the NS Series RGB and Video Input Unit Operation Manual (Cat. No.
V086).
Controller Link Interface Unit (Refer to 3-8 Installing the Controller Link Interface
Unit.)
NS-CLK21
USB-compatible Printers (Refer to 3-5 Connecting to Printers.)
Attachments (Refer to A-9-8 Attachments: NS12-ATT01(B)/
NS12-ATT02/NS8-ATT01/NS8-ATT02.)
Use an Attachment when replacing NT-series PTs.
NS12-ATT01(B)
NS12-ATT02
NS8-ATT01
NS8-ATT02
Reference The following optional products are available. (Refer to Appendix 9 List of Optional
Products.)
Anti-reflection Sheets
(5 sheets)

Protective Covers
(anti-reflection coating)
(5 covers)
Transparent Protective Covers
(5 covers)
Chemical-resistant Cover
(1 cover)
Replacement Battery

NS12-KBA04
NS7-KBA04
NT30-KBA04

(For NS12 and NS10)

(For NS8)
(For NS5)

NS12-KBA05
NS7-KBA05
NT31C-KBA05
NS12-KBA05N
NS7-KBA05N
NT31C-KBA05N
NT30-KBA01

(For NS12 and NS10)

(For NS8)
(For NS5)
(For NS12 and NS10)
(For NS8)
(For NS5)
(For NS5)

CJ1W-BAT01

(For NS12, NS10, NS8 and NS5)

1-9

1-4 Procedure for Running NS-series PTs

1-4 Procedure for Running NS-series PTs

Use the following procedure to start up the NS-series system.
Host
Host settings
Refer to following pages.
1:1 NT Link: 4-2 and A-8
1:N NT Link: 4-7 and A-9
High-speed 1:N NT Link:
4-15 and A-9
Ethernet: Section 5
Controller Link: Section 5
Host Link:
Refer to the Host Connection
Manual (Host Links).
Temperature Controllers:
Refer to the Host
Connection Manual
(Temp. Control, MemLink).
Memory Links:
Refer to the Host
Connection Manual:
(Temp. Control, MemLink).
Other Devices:
Refer to the Host
Connection Manual
(Multivendor Connection).

CX-Designer

PT
Panel installation

Installation on the
computer

Refer to Page 3-4.

Refer to the CX-Designer

Users Manual.

Peripheral connections

Power connections
Refer to Page 3-5.

See note 1.

Power ON

See note 2.

System program
installation

Data initialization
Refer to 6-2-1 Screen
Data Area Format.

See
note
3.

Screen transfer

Screen creation
Refer to NS-series PT
Programming Manual
and the CX-Designer
Users Manual.

Refer to 3-6-3 Transferring Data with Memory Cards.

System menu settings

See note 4.

Refer to Section 6-1 Operating

Modes and System Menu.

PT connections

Host connections
RS-232C: Section 4
Ethernet: Section 5
Controller Link: Section 5

Programming

Settings/com check

Operation

System maintenance

See note 5.

Connecting to Other Devices

Note 1. RUN mode is entered automatically if screen data already exists.
An error message is displayed if screen data does not exist. Transfer screen data from either
the CX-Designer or a Memory Card.
2. The system program is installed in special situations only, such as when the system program
is being changed or recovered.
3. The system menu can be operated as required to initialize data saved in the PT.
4. The system menu can be displayed by pressing two of the four corners of the touch panel.
5. When errors occur during operation, check I/O and setting statuses as required.

1-10

1-4 Procedure for Running NS-series PTs

The following table lists the device and software manuals used for reference.
Device/Software
NS-series PTs

Manual name
Catalog No.
Setup Manual
V072
(Provides information on existing NS-series models, i.e.,
NS12, NS10, and NS7.)
Programming Manual
V073
Macro Reference
Provided with
CX-Designer
CX-Designer
CX-Designer Users Manual
V088
CX-Designer Online Help
Provided with the
CX-Designer.
NS-series Ladder
NS-series Ladder Monitor Operation Manual
Provided with
Monitor
NS-series Ladder
Monitor
PLC
SYSMAC C200HS Installation Guide
W236
SYSMAC C200HS Operation Manual
W235
SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) Installation Guide
W302
SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE Operation Manual
W303
SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE) Operation Manual
W322
SYSMAC CQM1 Operation Manual
W226
SYSMAC CQM1H Operation Manual
W363
SYSMAC CV Series CV500/CV1000/CV2000/CVM1
W202
Programming Manual: Ladder Diagrams
SYSMAC CPM1A Operation Manual
W317
SYSMAC CPM2A Operation Manual
W352
SYSMAC CPM1/CPM1A/CPM2A/CPM2C/SRM1(-V2) W353
Programming Manual
SYSMAC CPM2C Operation Manual
W356
SYSMAC CJ Series Operation Manual
W393
SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Serial Communications Unit
W336
and Board Operation Manual
SYSMAC CS Series Operation Manual
W339
SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Programming Manual
W394
SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Instruction Reference Manual W340
SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Programming Console Opera- W341
tion Manual
SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Communications Command
W342
Reference Manual
Programming
SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manual: C-series W248
Devices/Software
PLCs
SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manual: CVM1 W249
PLCs
SYSMAC CPT Operation Manual
W333
CX-Programmer User Manual
W437
Ethernet Unit
SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Ethernet Unit Operation Manual W343
SYSMAC CVM1/CV Series Ethernet Unit System Man- W242
ual
FINS Command Reference Manual
W227
SYSMAC CS and CJ Series Ethernet Units Operation W420
Manual Construction of Networks
SYSMAC CS and CJ Series Ethernet Units Operation W421
Manual Construction of Applications
Controller Link Sup- Controller Link Support Board Operation Manual
W307
port Board
Controller Link Support Board for PCI Bus Operation
W383
Manual
Controller Link Unit Controller Link Unit Operation Manual
W309

1-11

Section 2
Before Connecting

This section provides information on methods for connecting NS-series PTs that must be understood before connecting the host and peripheral devices.
For details on connecting through host link communications, refer to the Host Connection
Manual (Host Link). For details on Temperature Controller connections and Memory Link
communications, refer to the Host Connection Manual (Temp. Control, MemLink). For details
on connecting to other devices, refer to the Host Connection Manual (Multivendor Connection).

2-1

Connecting the Host......................................................................................................... 2-2

2-1-1 Communications Types and Connection Methods.................................................... 2-2
2-2 Part Names and Functions................................................................................................ 2-7

2-1 Connecting the Host

2-1 Connecting the Host

This section provides details on the networks for hosts that can be used with NS-series PTs.

2-1-1

Communications Types and Connection Methods

Communications Ports and Methods

All NS-series PTs have two serial ports each. The NS12-TS01(B)-V1/-V2, NS10-TV01(B)V1/-V2, NS8-TV@1(B)-V1/-V2, and NS5-SQ01(B)-V1/-V2 each have one Ethernet interface. A
Controller Link Interface Unit can also be mounted to the NS12-TS0@(B)-V1 or NS10TV0@(B)-V1 to enable Controller Link communications. These communications ports and interfaces can be used for the communications methods shown in the following table.
Communications ports

Supported communications methods

1:1 NT Link
Serial port A
1:N NT Links (See note 1.)
For connecting the CX-Designer and for Bar Code Reader input.
1:1 NT Link
Serial port B (See note 2.) 1:N NT Links (See note 1.)
For connecting the CX-Designer and for Bar Code Reader input.
FINS communications
Ethernet interface
For connecting the CX-Designer.
Controller Link Interface
FINS communications
Unit
Data links
Note 1: 1:N NT Links can be set for either normal or high-speed communications.
Note 2: With the NS5, EXP. (Expansion) I/F on the Comm Tab Page in the System Menu settings
can be set to use a communications port in the expansion interface connector. The expansion interface, however, is a future expansion, which cannot yet be used. Always use the serial port B connector. Communications will not be possible on serial port B if the expansion
interface is selected in the System Menu settings.

The following table shows the possible combinations of communications methods when serial
ports A and B are connected to the host at the same time.
Using serial ports A and B at the same time
1:1 NT Link + 1:1 NT Link
1:1 NT Link + 1:N NT Links
1:N NT Links + 1:N NT Links

Supported/not supported
Supported
Supported
Supported

Converting Communications Type Using RS-232C/RS-422A Converter

OMRONs NS-AL002 RS-232C/RS-422A Converter can be used to convert the communications type between RS-232C and RS-422A.

Communications Type and Connection Method Combinations

The following table shows the possible connection methods for each communications type.

2-2

2-1 Connecting the Host

1:1 Connection
PT
Host
commu- communications nications
type
type

Supported connection methods

PT

Supported communications
Refermethods
ence
Data page
1:1 NT 1:N NT
FINS
Links
Link Links

Host

RS-232C

Yes

Yes

No

No

P.4-2
P.4-10

Yes

Yes

No

No

P.4-2
P.4-10

No

No

Yes

No

P.5-2

No

No

Yes

Yes P. 5-15

RS-232C cable

RS-232C
PT

Host

NS-AL002
Converter

RS-422A

RS-422A cable

PT

Host

Ethernet Ethernet

Ethernet
10Base-T/100Base-T twisted-pair cross
cable

PT

Controller
Controller
Link (See
Link
note.)

Controller Link
Interface Unit

Host

Specified shielded twisted-pair

cable

Yes: Connection is possible.

No: Connection is not possible.

Note: Only when a Controller Link Interface Unit (NS-CLK21) is mounted.

2-3

2-1 Connecting the Host

1:N Connection (Connecting Multiple PTs to a Single Host)

PT
Host
commu- communications nications
type
type

Supported connection methods

PTs

Supported communications
Refermethods
ence
1:1 NT 1:N NT
Data page
FINS
Link Links
Links

Host

NS-AL002
Adapter

RS-422A cable

RS-232C RS-422A

No

Yes

No

No

P.4-10

No

No

Yes

No

P.5-2

No

No

Yes

Yes P. 5-15

PTs
Ethernet
10Base-T/100Base-T
twisted-pair straight cable

HUB

Host

Ethernet Ethernet

PTs

Controller
Controller
Link (See
Link
note.)

Controller Link
Interface Unit

Host

Specified shielded
twisted-pair cable

Yes: Connection is possible.

No: Connection is not possible.

Note: Only when a Controller Link Interface Unit (NS-CLK21) is mounted.

2-4

2-1 Connecting the Host

N:1 Connection (Connecting Multiple Hosts to a Single PT)

Host
PT
comcommumunicanications
tions
type
type

Supported connection methods

Supported communications
Refermethods
ence
1:1 NT 1:N NT
Data page
FINS
Link Links
Links
P.4-2
P.4-10

PT

Host
Serial port A

RS-232C RS-232C

Yes

RS-232C cable

Yes

No

No

Host
Serial port B
RS-232C cable

PT

P.5-2

Host

HUB

Ethernet

Ethernet
10Base-T/100Base-T
twisted-pair straight cable

Ethernet

No

No

Yes

No

No

No

Yes

Yes P. 5-15

Yes

Yes

No

---

P.4-2
P.4-10

Yes

Yes

Yes

---

P.4-2
P.4-10
P.5-2

Host

PT

Host

Controller Link
Interface Unit
Specified shielded
twisted-pair cable

Controller
ControlLink (See
ler Link
note.)

Host

PT

Host
Serial port A

RSRS-232C 232C,
RS-422A

NS-AL002
RS-232C/
RS-422A
Converter

RS-232C cable

Host
Serial port B
RS-422A cable

An RS-422A line can be connected to

serial port A at the same time that an RS232C line is connected to serial port B.
PT

Host
Ethernet
10Base-T/100Base-T
twisted-pair cross cable

Ethernet, Ethernet,
RS-232C RS-232C

Host

RS-232C cable

2-5

2-1 Connecting the Host

Host
PT
comcommumunicanications
tions
type
type

Supported connection methods

Supported communications
Refermethods
ence
1:1 NT 1:N NT
Data page
FINS
Link Links
Links

PT

RSRS-232C,
232C,
Controller
ControlLink
ler Link

Host
Serial port A
Controller Link
Interface Unit

RS-232C cable

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Host

P.4-2
Yes P.4-10
P.5-15

Controller Link
Specified shielded twisted-pair cable

PT

Host
Ethernet

Ethernet, Ethernet,
Controller ControlLink
ler Link

10BASE-T/100BASE-T
Twisted-pair cross cable
Controller Link
Interface Unit

Host

Yes P.5-2
P.5-15

Controller Link
Specified shielded twisted-pair cable

Yes: Connection is possible.

No: Connection is not possible.

Note: Only when a Controller Link Interface Unit (NS-CLK21) is mounted.

The NS-AL002 is connected directly to the serial port of the PT and power is supplied
from pin 6 of the port.
When there are multiple serial ports and Ethernet Units for a single host, each port can
be used to communicate with separate PTs. This type of communications method,
however, will reduce the communications performance at the host.

2-6

2-2 Part Names and Functions

2-2 Part Names and Functions

The part names and functions of the PT are described here.

NS12/NS10
Front Panel
RUN Indicator
Status

RUN indicator
Lights or flashes to indicate
the status of the PT.

Display
NS12: 12.1-inch TFT high-luminance LCD
NS10: 10.4-inch TFT high-luminance LCD
The entire display is a touch panel that serves as
an input device.

Indicator
Lit

Green
PT is operating normally.

Flashing

Memory Card transfer ended

normally.
A backlight error occurred
immediately after power was
turned ON.
Power is not being supplied to the PT.
The fuse is broken.
The system program is damaged and the system cannot be booted.

Not lit

Orange
The file system check that is performed immediately after the power
is turned ON is in progress.
The battery power is low, or the battery is not connected and the PT is
operating normally.
Memory Card transfer in progress.

Red
An error occurred at
startup.

Memory Card
transfer ended
abnormally.

2-7

2-2 Part Names and Functions

NS12/NS10 Rear Panel Switches

Expansion Interface Connector

Used to mount the Video Input
Unit or the Controller Link
Interface Unit.

Memory Card Connector

Used to connect the
memory card for storing
and transmitting screen
data, log data, and system
programs.

DIP Switch
Used to set the settings for
transmitting data using the
Memory Card.
Reset Switch
Used to initialize the PT.
The status of screen data,
other registered data, and
the system menu, however,
will not change.
Battery Cover
The battery is installed
underneath the cover.

Main Circuit DC
Input Terminals
Used to connect
the power supply.

Serial Port A Connector

Used to connect the host, CX-Designer, and
Designer, and Bar Code Reader. Bar Code Reader. Uses an RS-232C 9-pin
connector.
Uses an RS-232C 9-pin
connector.

Serial Port B Connector

Power Input Terminal Block Cover
Covers the power input terminal block. Used to connect the host, CX-

FG Terminal
Used to prevent
malfunctions due to
noise interference.
USB Host Connector
Used to connect to printers. It
is a USB Type A connector. USB Slave Connector
This is a USB Type B connector.
Refer to 3-3-2 Connecting via
USB.

Note

2-8

Ethernet Connector
Used to connect the Ethernet cable.
Uses a 10Base-T/100Base-T 8-pin
modular plug.

Confirm system safety before turning the power ON/OFF or restarting. Otherwise the system
may operate unpredictably.

2-2 Part Names and Functions

NS8 Front Panel

Display
NS8-TV@@-V2: P8.4-inch TFT highluminance color LCD
NS8-TV@@-V1: P8.0-inch TFT highluminance color LCD
The entire display is a touch panel that
serves as an input device.

RUN indicator
Lights or flashes to indicate the
status of the PT.

RUN Indicator Status

Indicator
Lit

Green
PT is operating normally.

Flashing

Memory Card transfer ended

normally.

Not lit

Orange
The file system check that is
performed immediately after the
power is turned ON is in
progress.
The battery power is low, or the
battery is not connected and the
PT is operating normally.
Memory Card transfer in progress.

Red
An error
occurred at
startup.

Memory Card
transfer ended
abnormally.

Power is not being supplied to the PT.

The fuse is broken.
The system program is damaged and the system cannot be booted.

2-9

2-2 Part Names and Functions

NS8 Rear Panel

Expansion Interface Connector
Used to mount the Video Input
Unit or the Controller Link
Interface Unit.

Memory Card Connector

Used to connect the
memory card for storing
and transmitting screen
data, log data, and system
programs.

DIP Switch
Used to set the settings for
transmitting data using the
Memory Card.
Reset Switch
Used to initialize the PT.
The status of screen data,
other registered data, and
the system menu, however,
will not change.
Battery Cover
The battery is installed
underneath the cover.

Power Input Terminal Block Cover

Covers the power input terminal
block.

Main Circuit DC
Input Terminals
Used to connect
the power supply.
FG Terminal
Used to prevent
malfunctions due to
noise interference.

USB Host Connector

Used to connect to printers.
It is a USB Type A connector.

Note

2-10

Serial Port B Connector

Used to connect the host, CXDesigner, and Bar Code Reader.
Uses an RS-232C 9-pin
connector.

USB Slave Connector

This is a USB Type B connector.
Refer to 3-3-2 Connecting via
USB.

Serial Port A Connector

Used to connect the host, CX-Designer, and
Bar Code Reader. Uses an RS-232C 9-pin
connector.

Ethernet Connector
Used to connect the Ethernet cable.
Uses a 10Base-T/100Base-T 8-pin
modular plug.

Confirm system safety before turning the power ON/OFF or restarting. Otherwise the system
may operate unpredictably.

2-2 Part Names and Functions

NS5 Front Panel

RUN indicator
Lights or flashes to indicate
the status of the PT.

Display
5.7-inch STN color LCD
The entire display is a touch panel that
serves as an input device.
Colors may be lighter toward the edge
of the screen.
This is characteristic of STN displays
and not an error.

RUN Indicator Status

Indicator
Lit

Green
PT is operating normally.

Flashing

Memory Card transfer ended

normally.

Not lit

Orange
The file system check that is
performed immediately after the
power is turned ON is in
progress.
The battery power is low, or the
battery is not connected and the
PT is operating normally.
Memory Card transfer in progress.

Red
An error
occurred at
startup.

Memory Card
transfer ended
abnormally.

Power is not being supplied to the PT.

The fuse is broken.
The system program is damaged and the system cannot be booted.

2-11

2-2 Part Names and Functions

NS5 Rear Panel

Local Bus Interface Connector
Used to connect to an Expansion Interface Unit.
(Applicable with NS Ver. 6 or higher systems.) Current
Expansion Interface Units (NS-CA001, NS-CA002, and
NCCKL21) cannot be connected.

Ethernet Connector
Used to connect the Ethernet cable.
Uses a 10Base-T/100Base-T 8-pin
modular plug.

FG Terminal
Used to prevent malfunctions
due to noise interference.
Main Circuit DC Input Terminals
Used to connect the power supply.

USB Slave Connector

This is a USB Type B connector.
Refer to 3-3-2 Connecting via
USB.

DIP Switch
Used to set the settings for
transmitting data using the
Memory Card.
Reset Switch
Used to initialize the PT. The status
of screen data, other registered data,
and the system menu, however, will
not change.

Battery Cover
The battery is installed
underneath the cover.

Serial Port B Connector

Used to connect the host, CXDesigner, and Bar Code Reader.
Uses an RS-232C 9-pin connector.

Note

2-12

USB Slave Connector

This is a USB Type B connector.
Refer to 3-3-2 Connecting via
USB.

Serial Port A Connector

Used to connect the host, CXDesigner, and Bar Code Reader.
Uses an RS-232C 9-pin connector.

Confirm system safety before turning the power ON/OFF or restarting. Otherwise the system
may operate unpredictably.

2-2 Part Names and Functions

Touch Panel
The touch switches on the front panel of the PT are used to perform input operations. Press
the touch switches to perform operations such as switching screens and sending bit status to
the host.

Minimum Switch Size

NS12:
16 dots (4.92 mm) 16 dots (4.92 mm)
NS10:
16 dots (5.3 mm) 16 dots (5.3 mm)
NS8-V1: 20 dots (4.78 mm) 20 dots (4.78 mm)
NS8-V2: 20 dots (4.86 mm) 20 dots (4.86 mm)
NS5:
16 dots (5.8 mm) 16 dots (5.8 mm)
Functional objects can be created combining
minimum size switches.

Function
performed

When a functional object is pressed, its function is performed.

To ensure correct input operations, create touch switches so that they consist of at least two
switches horizontally and vertically.
Note

Press the touch switches with a pressure of 30 N max.

Do not press the touch switches when the backlight is not lit or when there is no display.
Check system safety before pressing the touch switches.
Inputs may not be recognized if the touch switches are pressed in rapid succession. Check
that one input operation has finished before performing the next one.

Reference

Pressing Three Switches Simultaneously

When the positions of multiple touch switches are set as shown in the example and
three switches are pressed simultaneously, the touch switches will malfunction due to
structural characteristics.
Position the touch switches carefully. In the example shown below, switches have
been created in positions A and B, and at points C and D, where the vertical and horizontal lines through A and B intersect.
A

Minimum touch switch frame

If touch switches A, B, and C are turned

ON simultaneously, switch D may also
turn ON due to the structure of the touch
panel.
In the same way, if touch switches A, B,
and D are turned ON simultaneously,
switch C may also turn ON.

2-13

2-2 Part Names and Functions

Connector Pin Arrangement of Serial Ports A and B

Pin number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Note

Signal name
NC
SD
RD
RS
CS
+5V
NC
NC
SG

Name
Not connected.
Send data
Receive data
Request to send
Clear to send
5-V output (250 mA max.)
Not connected.
Not connected.
Signal ground

Make sure that the total current capacity of devices being supplied power is 250 mA max. before using the 5-V power supply from pin 6. The capacity of the PT's 5-V output is 250 mA
max. at 5 V 5%.

Ethernet Connector Pin Arrangement

Pin number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Signal name
TD+
TD
RD+
BI_D+
BI_D
RD
BI_D+
BI_D

Name
Twisted-pair output (differential output)
Twisted-pair output (differential output)
Twisted-pair input (differential input)
Protection circuit
Protection circuit
Twisted-pair input (differential input)
Protection circuit
Protection circuit

When using a cable with a hood (or boot), make sure that the length for connection is at least
15 mm, as shown in the following diagram.

15 mm min.

2-14

Section 3
Installing the PT and Connecting
Peripheral Devices
This section describes the methods used to install the PT and connect peripheral devices.
For details on methods for connecting the host, refer to Section 4 Connecting the Host to the
Serial Port or Section 5 Connecting to Host via Ethernet or Controller Link.

3-1

Installing the PT.............................................................................................................. 3-3

3-1-1 Installation Environment........................................................................................... 3-3
3-1-2 Installing RS-232C/RS-422A Converters................................................................. 3-4
3-1-3 Mounting the PT to the Control Panel ...................................................................... 3-4
3-1-4 Connecting the Power Supply................................................................................... 3-5
3-1-5 Wiring the Ground Wire........................................................................................... 3-7
3-1-6 Peripheral Device Connection Limitations ............................................................... 3-7
3-2 Starting the PT ................................................................................................................ 3-8
3-2-1 Operation at Startup.................................................................................................. 3-8
3-2-2 Starting the PT for the First Time........................................................................... 3-10
3-3 Connecting the CX-Designer ........................................................................................ 3-12
3-3-1 Connecting via RS-232C or Ethernet ..................................................................... 3-12
3-3-2 Connecting via USB ............................................................................................... 3-12
3-3-3 Connecting via a Modem........................................................................................ 3-13
3-4 Connecting to Bar Code Readers .................................................................................. 3-14
3-4-1 Connection Methods............................................................................................... 3-14
3-4-2 Setting Bar Code Readers....................................................................................... 3-15
3-4-3 Data Format ............................................................................................................ 3-16
3-4-4 Bar Code Input ....................................................................................................... 3-16
3-5 Connecting to Printers................................................................................................... 3-17
3-5-1 Connection Method ................................................................................................ 3-17
3-6 Using Memory Cards .................................................................................................... 3-18
3-6-1 Installation .............................................................................................................. 3-19
3-6-2 Replacing the System Program............................................................................... 3-20
3-6-3 Transferring Data with Memory Cards................................................................... 3-21

3-7

Installing the Video Input Unit ..................................................................................... 3-27

3-7-1 Video Input Unit Components................................................................................ 3-27
3-7-2 Nomenclature and Functions .................................................................................. 3-28
3-7-3 Installation Method for Video Input Unit ............................................................... 3-29
3-7-4 Connecting to Video Input Connectors................................................................... 3-34
3-8 Installing the Controller Link Interface Unit................................................................. 3-39
3-8-1 Controller Link Interface Unit Components ........................................................... 3-39
3-8-2 Nomenclature and Functions .................................................................................. 3-40
3-8-3 Installation Method for Controller Link Interface Unit .......................................... 3-43
3-8-4 Wiring..................................................................................................................... 3-50

3-1 Installing the PT

Note

When unpacking the PT and peripheral devices, check for any external damage. Shake the
product gently and check for any abnormal sounds.

3-1 Installing the PT

The methods used to mount the PT to the control panel and connect the power supply are
described here.

3-1-1

Installation Environment
Always mount the PT to the control panel and perform other installation procedures according
to the following precautions.
Note

Do not install the PT in any of the following locations:

Locations subject to extreme temperature changes.
Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the ranges in the specifications.
Locations subject to high humidity that may result in condensation.
Locations that would subject the PT to chemicals.
Locations that would subject the PT to oil.
Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
Locations that would subject the PT to direct shock or vibration.
Locations that would directly expose the PT to wind or rain.
Locations subject to strong ultraviolet light.
Provide proper shielding measures when installing in the following locations:
Locations subject to static electricity or other sources of noise.
Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields.
Locations near to power supply lines.
Locations subject to possible exposure to radiation.

3-3

3-1 Installing the PT

3-1-2

Installing RS-232C/RS-422A Converters

When using RS-232C/RS-422A Converters, mount the PT to the control panel before installing these Units.
For details on installing and removing RS-232C/RS-422A Converters, refer to Appendix 3 Using NS-AL002 Converters.

3-1-3

Mounting the PT to the Control Panel

The PT is flush-mounted to the control panel.
The PT is mounted using the panel mounting brackets provided with the PT, and tools, such
as a Phillips screwdriver.
Use the following procedure to mount the PT to the control panel.
1. Make a hole in the panel for flush mounting according to the following dimensions and insert the PT from the front of the panel.

Height

Width

Recommended panel thickness:

1.6 to 4.8 mm

Model
NS12
NS10
NS8
NS5

3-4

Dimensions
Width 302

+1
0

Height 228

+1
0

mm

Width 302

+1
0

Height 228

+1
0

mm

Width 220.5
Width 184

+0.5
0

+0.5
0

Height 165.5

Height 131

+0.5
0

+0.5
0

mm

mm

3-1 Installing the PT

2. Secure the panel mounting brackets from the back of the panel, as shown in the following
diagram.
Insert the catch on each bracket into the square hole on the PT, and secure the PT to the
panel by tightening the screws with a Phillips screwdriver while gently pulling in the PT.

Note

3-1-4

Do not allow metal particles to enter the PT while work is being performed on the panel.
The allowable thickness of the panel for mounting is between 1.6 and 4.8 mm.
Secure the mounting bracket with a uniform tightening torque of between 0.5 and 0.6 Nm
to keep the PT waterproof and dustproof.
The front sheet may become distorted if the tightening torque is more than the specified
limit or not uniform. Always use a panel that is clean, undistorted, and strong enough to
adequately withstand mounting the PT.
Conformance to Shipbuilding Standards
Cover the entire surface of the PT with EMI-shielding material and ground the EMIshielding material using conductive tape, such as copper tape, to the control panel or operation panel.
Recommended electromagnetic shielding: E09F100, E09R13502P
Manufacturer: SEIWA ELECTRIC MFG, Co., Ltd.
Electromagnetic shielding reduces the permeability by approximately 50%.
Completely cover gaps and openings between the PT and the control panel and operation
panel with gaskets or other materials.
Completely cover gaps between the PT and the panel cutout with conductive tape, such as
copper tape, and then secure the PT using mounting brackets.
To suppress noise terminal voltage, install the PT under the following conditions.
NS5-V2 Series
We recommend attaching a filter to the DC power supply line.
Recommended filter: MR-2043 or equivalent
Manufacturer: TOKIN
NS12/10/8-V2 Series
We recommend using the following product for the DC power supply.
Recommended power supply: S82K-03024
Manufacturer: OMRON

Connecting the Power Supply

Connect a 24-VDC power supply to the power input terminals.
Note

Do not connect an AC power supply to the power terminals.

Use a DC power supply with low voltage fluctuation.
Do not perform a dielectric strength test.
To conform to EC Directives, use a DC power supply that will provide a stable output even
if the input is momentarily interrupted for 10 ms, and that has reinforced or double insulation.

Power Supply

The following table shows the specifications for the power supply that can be connected. Determine power supply specifications that meet the power supply capacity requirements.

3-5

3-1 Installing the PT

Item
Power supply voltage
Allowable voltage range
Power supply capacity

Value
24 VDC
20.4 to 27.6 VDC (24 VDC 15%)
25 W min. (NS5: 15 W min.)

NS12, 10, 8

Functional
ground

NS5

24 VDC
Functional ground

24 VDC

Breaker
Breaker
24 VDC
power
supply

24 VDC power supply

Parts Used to Connect the Power Supply

Note

Connect power to the power terminal block using twisted-pair power lines with a crosssectional area of at least 2 mm and always using M3.5 crimp terminals.
The correct tightening torque for the terminal block is 0.8 Nm. Tighten terminal block screws
properly.
2

Forked type

7 mm max.

7 mm max.

Round type

Recommended Products
Manufacturer

J.S.T. Mfg. Co., Ltd.

Fuji Terminal Industry Co., Ltd.
Nichifu Terminal Industries Co., Ltd.

Note

3-6

Model number of
forked terminals
2-YS3A
2-YAS3.5
2Y-3.5

Model number of
round terminals
2-3.5
V2-S3.5
2-3.5

Applicable power
lines (twisted-pair)
2.0 to 2.63 mm2

When surge noise occurs in the DC power supply, connect a Transistor Voltage Suppressor
(TVS) between the 24-V and 0-V DC terminals.
Recommended TVS model: 1.5KE33CA
Manufacturers: Vishay Intertechnology Inc, ST Microelectronics

3-1 Installing the PT

3-1-5

Wiring the Ground Wire

The PT is provided with a functional ground (FG:

) terminal.

Wire the FG terminal according to the following conditions.

1. Ground according to Figure when there is difference in potential between the PT and host.
Do not ground the functional ground of the PT if it is far from the host and one-point
grounding is difficult.
PT

Host

One-point
grounding

2. Do not ground the functional ground (FG: ) of the PT if it is mounted to the same panel
as devices that generate noise, such as motors and inverters.
Note

3-1-6

Ground correctly to prevent malfunctions caused by noise.

Peripheral Device Connection Limitations

Select one of the following combinations when devices requiring power supply are connected
to port A, port B, and an Expansion Interface Unit on the PT. Use a 5-V Bar Code Reader with
a current consumption of 250 mA or the equivalent.
Port A and B connection combinations

When a Bar Code Reader and the NS-AL002 are connected to

ports A and B at the same time
When a Bar Code Reader and the CJ1W-CIF11 are connected
to ports A and B at the same time
When a Bar Code Reader and the NT-AL001 are connected to
ports A and B at the same time
When the CJ1W-CIF11 and C1W-CIF11 are connected to ports
A and B at the same time
When the CJ1W-CIF11 and NS-AL002 are connected to ports A
and B at the same time
When the CJ1W-CIF11 and NT-AL001 are connected to ports A
and B at the same time
When two NT-AL001s are connected to ports A and B at the
same time
When a Bar Code Reader is connected to port A or B
When the CJ1W-CIF11 is connected to port A or B
When the NS-AL002 is connected to port A or B
When the NT-AL001 is connected to port A or B
When Bar Code Readers are connected to ports A and B at the
same time
When the NT-AL001 and NT-AL002 are connected to port A or
B at the same time

Expansion Interface Unit

(NS-CA001, NS-CA002,
NS-CLK21)
Cannot be used
Cannot be used
Cannot be used
Can be used
Can be used
Cannot be used
Cannot be used
Can be used
Can be used
Can be used
Can be used
Cannot be used
Cannot be used

3-7

3-2 Starting the PT

3-2 Starting the PT

Check that the hardware is connected properly, turn ON the power to the PT, and then start
the PT.
Use the following procedure to start the PT.

3-2-1

Operation at Startup
When the power is ON or the PT is reset, the PT will operate as follows:
Indicator lights orange.
Immediately after the power is turned ON, the indicator will light orange.
The file system will be checked and the system recovered if the power was turned OFF
while a file was being written in previous operation, or if the battery capacity was low and
drive safety information from the system program area screen data area could not be saved.

Indicator lights green.

When the system starts properly, the indicator will light green.
If the indicator does not light green, the system programs may be damaged. Contact your
nearest OMRON representative.

Startup message is displayed.

A message about the startup status will be displayed.
If an error occurs, the PT will stop startup procedures and display a message. (Refer to Section 5 Troubleshooting in the Programming Manual.)
If an error occurs that allows startup to continue, a warning will be displayed. When a warning is displayed, the PT will enter standby state and wait for touch input. Check the message
and then touch the screen. The PT will continue with startup procedures.

3-8

3-2 Starting the PT

PT starts operating
The PT goes into RUN mode and starts operating according to the screen data in the PT.
When the PT is connected using communications conditions other than the set conditions, a
message "Connecting" will be displayed at the bottom right of the screen, and the PT will
be in standby status until normal connection is established.
To change the communications settings, display the System Menu and change the settings.
Note

Confirm the safety of the system before turning the power ON and OFF or pressing the reset
switch.

3-9

3-2 Starting the PT

3-2-2

Starting the PT for the First Time

Always perform the following operations when turning ON the PT for the first time after purchase.
1. Language selection.
2. Set the date and time.
Operate according to the following conditions.
a) When the power is turned ON to the PT, the following error message will be displayed. Press the
OK Button.

b) The System Menu will be displayed. Press the Initialize Tab. The dialog boxes and System Menu
are set for English-language displays at the factory. The language can be changed to Japanese at
this point if desired. To change to Japanese, select it and then press the Write Button. The following message will be displayed. Press the Yes Button. Do not turn OFF the power supply until the
language change process has been completed.

c) Next, select the PT Tab. Set the time and date.

d) Press the date display area under the heading Date and Time. A dialog box will be displayed. Input
the date in yyyy/mm/dd format.

3-10

3-2 Starting the PT

Example: Input March 15, 2002 as 2002.3.15.

e) Press the time display area under the heading Date and Time. A dialog box will be displayed. Input
the time using a 24-hour clock in hours/minutes/seconds format.
Example: Input 06:01:01 p.m. as 18.1.1.
The Write Button will be displayed, but the time and date settings will be enabled immediately after
they have been input in the dialog box.
This completes the procedure required to start the PT for the first time. Now transfer the project
data. Refer to 3-6 Using Memory Cards and Transferring Data to the PT in the CX-Designers
Online Help.

3-11

3-3 Connecting the CX-Designer

3-3 Connecting the CX-Designer

Use an RS-232C, Ethernet, or USB cable to connect the PT and computer so that screen
data that has been created with the CX-Designer can be transferred to the PT. A modem can
also be used.

3-3-1

Connecting via RS-232C or Ethernet

Connect the RS-232C cable from the computer to serial port A or B. The cable can be connected to either serial port A or B, but cables cannot be connected to both ports at the same
time.
To use Ethernet, connect the Ethernet port on the computer to the Ethernet port on the PT.

Communications Conditions

The communications conditions are set with the CX-Server. For details, refer to Transferring
Data to the PT in the CX-Designers Online Help.

Recommended Connecting Cables

The following cables are recommended when connecting via RS-232C.

XW2Z-S002 (OMRON, cable length: 2 m)
(D-Sub male 9-pin and D-Sub female 9-pin, for IBM PC/AT or compatible computers
and NX computers in the PC-9800 Series)
For details on preparing connecting cables, refer to Appendix 5 Preparing Connecting Cables.

3-3-2

Connecting via USB

Connect the USB port on the computer to the USB slave connector on the PT. Some preparations are required and some restrictions exist, as described below. Be sure to connect USB
correctly.

SW

RESET

24V
DC
PORT @B
HOST

PORT @A

SLAVE
ETHERNET

System Program Version

The system program version installed in the PT must be version 6.2 or higher. Update to version 6.2 or higher if the current version is 6.1 or lower.

USB Driver for PTs

To transfer screens using USB communications, a USB driver for the PT must be installed in
the computer. For details on installing the USB drivers, refer to 2-4 Installing USB Drivers for
NS-series PTs in the CX-Designer Users Manual.

3-12

3-3 Connecting the CX-Designer

PT Hardware Restrictions
NS-V1 PTs with lot number 0325 (manufactured February 3, 2005) or later support USB data
transfers. A commercially available USB cable can be used.
The manufacturing date can be checked using the 4-digit lot number given on the back of the
PT.
Lot No.

0 3 2 5 Manufactured February 3, 2005

Rightmost digit of the year, e.g.,
2005 in this example

Month: 1 to 9 = January to
September, X to Z = October to
December, e.g., February in this
example
Day of month, e.g., the 3rd in
this example

Use a USB cable that is 2 m or shorter. If a distance of longer than 2 m is required for a USB
connection, use a commercially available USB Hub.
Up to 2 m

2 m max.
NS-V1 Series PT

Personal
computer

Longer than 2 m

USB
Hub
2 m max.
NS-V1 Series PT

5 m max.
Personal
computer

Recommended USB Hubs

Model
USB-HUB203 (USB 2.0-compatible standard 4-port hub)

Note

Manufacturer
Sanwa Supply

Commercially available and recommended USB Hubs do not have the same specifications as
the NS-series PT. Normal operation may not be possible in environments subject to noise or
static electricity. When using USB Hubs, be sure to provide sufficient measures to prevent
noise and static electricity, or install in a location that is not subject to noise or static electricity.

All models in the NS-V2 Series support USB communications. Use a commercially available
USB cable to connect the PT to the USB port.

3-3-3

Connecting via a Modem

A modem can be used to connect the computer and a serial port on the PT. For details on
connection methods and communications conditions, refer to Transferring Data to the PT in
the CX-Designers Online Help.

3-13

3-4 Connecting to Bar Code Readers

3-4 Connecting to Bar Code Readers

Connecting a Bar Code Reader to the PT allows bar code data to be read as character
strings in the character string input areas.
For details on methods for inputting character strings from a Bar Code Reader, refer to 3-6
Inputting Numeral and Character Strings in the Programming Manual.

3-4-1

Connection Methods
Connect the Bar Code Reader to either serial port A or B of the PT as shown in the following
diagram.
PT
Bar Code Reader

9-pin connector

Serial port A or B
(RS-232C, 9-pin)
Connecting cable

Note

Bar Code Reader cable

Always turn OFF the power to the Bar Code Reader and the PT before connecting or disconnecting cables.

Prepare the connecting cables, referring to Appendix 8 Preparing Connecting Cables for Bar
Code Readers.
Reference Bar Code Readers cannot be connected to both serial ports A and B at the same time.

3-14

3-4 Connecting to Bar Code Readers

3-4-2

Setting Bar Code Readers

The Bar Code Readers communications conditions and other settings can be set from either
the CX-Designer or the PT.

Setting from the CX-Designer

Use the CX-Designer to set PT settings, such as the conditions for communications with the
Bar Code Reader, according to the following table. Set the communications conditions supported by the Bar Code Reader to suit the application environment.
Item
Data bits
Stop bits
Parity
Communications
Speed
Input method

Settings
7 or 8 bits
1 or 2 bits
None, odd, or even
4,800, 9,600, or 19,200 bps

7 bits
2 bits
Even
9,600 bps

Default

Manual or Auto

Auto

Setting from the PT

Set the communications conditions from the System Menu.
For details on specific methods for operating the System Menu, refer to 6-6-6 Setting Bar
Code Readers.

Bar Code Reader Settings

Set the settings for the Bar Code Reader according to the following table. Make sure, however,
that the communications conditions settings for the communications speed, parity, stop bits,
and data bits, match those set for the PT. For details on setting methods, refer to the operation manual of the Bar Code Reader being used.
Item
Communications Speed
Parity
Stop bits
Data bits
Preamble
Postamble
RS/CS control
Communications protocol
Bar code label digit transfer
ID character transfer
Bar code types
Trigger switch setting

Settings
4,800, 9,600, or 19,200 bps
Even, odd, or none.
1 or 2 bits
7 or 8 bits
STX
ETX
Invalid
No protocol mode
Transfer prohibited.
Transfer prohibited.
Multi-read (reads everything)
Automatic read mode

3-15

3-4 Connecting to Bar Code Readers

3-4-3

Data Format
Use the following data format for communications using the PTs bar code input function.
STX

Data

Data

Data

(02H)

ETX
(03H)

The supported data characters are 20H to 7FH hexadecimal and the maximum data length is
254 bytes.
All data that does not follow the specified data format will be discarded as invalid.

3-4-4

Bar Code Input

Use the following procedure to input bar codes using the PT.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Touch a Numeral Display & Input or String Display & Input object.
The Numeral Display & Input or String Display & Input object will become highlighted.
Read the bar code data from the Bar Code Reader.
Touch the command button set to either RET (Return) or ENT (Enter) to confirm the input.

For details on the methods for setting Numeral Display & Input, String Display & Input, and
Command Button objects, refer to 2-9 Buttons and 2-11 Display and Input Objects in the Programming Manual.
Reference To input bar codes for Numeral Display & Input and String Display & Input objects, select Other Input Method (command buttons, etc.) for the input method. When Other Input Method (command button, etc.) is selected, the input pad cannot be opened.

3-16

3-5 Connecting to Printers

3-5 Connecting to Printers

Connecting a printer to an NS8, NS10, or NS12 PT makes it possible to obtain hard copy of
the contents displayed on the PT screen. Connect printers to the PTs USB port. For details
on how to obtain hard copy of the PT display, refer to the Programming Manual.

3-5-1

Connection Method
Connect the printer to the PTs USB port with a USB cable as shown below.

Note

Connecting or disconnecting the cable with power to the printer or the PT turned ON may
cause the PT to malfunction. Always turn OFF the power to the printer and the PT before
connecting or disconnecting cables.
Do not connect an USB connector to any device that is not applicable.
Before connecting an USB connector to a device, make sure that the device is free of damage.
Printing devices do not have the same general specifications as the PT. Printers may not
operate normally in locations subject to noise. When using a printing device, either install it
in a location that is not subject to noise or provide shielding.

Reference

Note

Connect the printer directly to the PT with a cable. Connection via a USB hub is not
possible.

Use the following OMRON cables to connect USB devices with an NS-series PT. Using
non-OMRON cables may result in incorrect operation.

Connecting Cables

Use one of the following cables.

NS-US22 (2 m, lock)
NS-US52 (5 m, lock)

Supported Printer Standards

The following printer standards are supported.

ESC/P Raster
BJ Raster

Recommended Printers

Operation checks have been performed for the following printers.

Manufacturer
EPSON

CANON

Model
PM-2200C, PM-930C, PM-870C, PM-740C, PM-A970, PM-T990, PM-D870, PMG720
PX-5500, PX-A720, PX-G5100, PX-G930
BJ-M70
PIXUS 550i, 50i, 80i, iP2000, iP3100, iP4100, iP4100R, iP90, iP3300

3-17

3-6 Using Memory Cards

3-6 Using Memory Cards

1. Memory Cards can be used with the PT. History files can be stored in Memory Cards as
CSV files. There are four different types of history file, as follows:
Alarm/event history:
Data log:
Operation log:
Error log:

Stores alarm/event history data that has been registered by CX-Designer.

Stores trend data.
Stores screen operation log data.
Stores error history data for when macros are executed.

The history data is normally saved in internal memory that is backed up in the PT, but can
also be saved in CSV file format. When history data is saved as a CSV file, it is stored in
the Memory Card.
The CSV files containing history data are saved in a user-specified folder in the log folder
created in the Memory Card.
2. The following data can be transferred to the Memory Card.
System programs (the programs required to operate the PT, such as for communications and fonts)
Screen data (data used in the PT display)
There are three methods for transferring data, as follows:

Automatic download (Transfers data from the Memory Card to the PT.)
Automatic upload (Transfers data from the PT to the Memory Card.)
Manual transfer (Direction for data transfer is selected manually.)
Reference Recommended Memory Card
Model

HMC-EF183

Memory capacity

128 Mbytes

Memory type

Flash memory

The Memory Card can be overwritten approximately 100,000 times.

When using the PC card socket in devices such as laptop computers, use the HMCAP001 Memory Card Adapter.

For details on transferring data with the computer (CX-Designer), refer to Transferring Data to
the PT in the CX-Designers Online Help.
3. The data created in Data Block Tables can be saved as CSV files in DBLK folder on a
Memory Card.
4. The contents of the PTs internal memory can be saved to Memory Cards using macros.
The contents of Memory Cards can also be written to the PTs internal memory.

3-18

3-6 Using Memory Cards

3-6-1

Installation
The Memory Card is installed in the memory card interface on the side of the PT.

Eject button
Front surface

Push the Memory Card firmly into the back of the slot. (The eject button will be pushed out
when the Memory Card is installed properly.)

Removing the Memory Card

Press the eject button.

To stop the Memory Card from springing out and falling, place your middle finger on the eject
button, and hold the Memory Card with your index finger.

3-19

3-6 Using Memory Cards

3-6-2

Replacing the System Program

The system program in the PT can be replaced or upgraded to a higher version. There are
two methods that can be used to replace the system program.

Using a recovery/upgrade program

Transferring system program data

Using a Recovery/Upgrade Program

Use the following procedure to replace the system program if the system program becomes
corrupted and the PT will not start or to upgrade the system program in the PT.
1. Copy all of the files and folders in the RecoverUpdate_7_0 folder inside the CX-Designer
installation folder (default: C:\ProgramFiles\Omron\CX-One\CX-Designer) to a Memory
Card. This program can be selected when installing the CX-Designer.
2. Insert the Memory Card into the PT and turn ON the power supply. The recovery/update
program will start automatically.
Reference For details on the recovery/update program, select Start - Program - OMRON - CX-One
- CX-Designer - How to recover the system prog Ver. 7.0.

Transferring System Program Data

When System Program Ver. 7.0 is selected and loaded with the CX-Designer, it is stored under the CX-Designers install folder (default location is C:\Program Files\Omron\CX-One\CXDesigner) in folders that are created for each type and version, as follows:
\SystemBackup\NS12_V1_V2\V7_0\bank1:

Ver. 7.0 for NS12

\NS10_V1_V2\V7_0\bank1:

Ver. 7.0 for NS10

\NS8_V1_V2\V7_0\bank1:

Ver. 7.0 for NS8

\NS5_V1_V2\V7_0\bank1:

Ver. 7.0 for NS5

To replace a system program, use Windows Explorer or another method to copy each of the
folders for the required system program under \bank1 to the route directory of the Memory
Card.
For details on methods for transferring data from the Memory Card to the PT, refer to 3-6-3
Transferring Data with Memory Cards.
The system backup folder can be created only if CX-Designer is installed from the standalone CD-ROM. If the CX-Designer is installed from CX-One, reinstall the system program by
following the procedure for using a recovery/update program described above.

Restrictions on System Program Replacement

Starting the PT may become impossible if the system program replacement procedure is not
performed correctly. Observe the following precautions.

When upgrading the system program (or replacing it with a previous version), use the recovery/update program at least the first time.
System program version 6.2 or higher must be used to replace the system program in the
NS5-SQ0@-V2, NS5-TQ0@-V2, or NS5-MQ0@-V2. If an earlier system program version is
used, screens may not be displayed properly. If an earlier version is installed by mistake,
use the recovery/update program and upgrade to system program version 6.2 or higher.

3-20

3-6 Using Memory Cards

3-6-3

Transferring Data with Memory Cards

Using a Memory Card with the PT allows system programs (programs that are required to
operate the PT, such as those for communications and fonts) and screen data to be transferred to and from the PT.
There are two ways to transfer the data. The data can be transferred using the system menu
or by setting the DIP Switch on the back of the NS-series PT.
When screen data is transferred and modified frequently, it is convenient to transfer the data
from the System Menu. Use the DIP Switch on the back of the PT instead of the screen operation to save screen data when the display screen is damaged. For details on the System
Menus Memory Card Transfer operation, refer to 6-8-9 Memory Card Transfers.
This manual focuses on the PTs rear-panel DIP switch settings. Three data-transfer operations can be set on the DIP switch: automatic download (transfers data from the Memory
Card to the PT), automatic upload (transfers data from the PT to the Memory Card), or manual transfer (user selects whether to download or upload).
Note

Before transferring data, check that the system programs and screen data types match
those in the PT.
Always reset the PT or turn ON the power again after changing the DIP switch setting.
Do not perform the following operations while accessing the Memory Card. The data may
be damaged and the Memory Card may need to be formatted.
Turn OFF the power to the PT.
Press the PT reset switch.
Remove the Memory Card.

If the PT system is damaged due to the power being turned OFF while a file is being written,
or other reason, using normal downloading to replace the system programs may not be possible. For details on troubleshooting, refer to page 3-25.

DIP Switch
The Memory Card can be divided into up to four areas, which are called banks. The DIP
switch on the rear panel of the PT has six pins. The ON/OFF combination of these pins specifies which transfer method is used.
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6

Function
Specifies bank 1 when transferring. (ON: Specifies bank 1.)
Specifies bank 2 when transferring. (ON: Specifies bank 2.)
Specifies bank 3 when transferring. (ON: Specifies bank 3.)
Specifies bank 4 when transferring. (ON: Specifies bank 4.)
Specifies upload or download. (ON: Upload, OFF: Download)
Specifies manual or automatic transfer. (ON: Manual, OFF: Automatic)

Banks are automatically created under the following conditions.

When data is transferred to the Memory Card using the CX-Designer.

When data is transferred (uploaded) from the PT.
Reference

When transferring data, only one bank can be specified. Set only one of pins 1 to 4 to
ON.
The PT will operate normally when the DIP switch is set to a combination other than
one specifying automatic upload, download, or manual transfer.
When data has already been stored in the banks of the Memory Card and uploading
is executed, the previous data in the specified bank will be deleted. Always check the
data stored in the banks before uploading.
If the \BANK@\DATA and \BANK@\SYSTEM are created manually in the Memory Card,

3-21

3-6 Using Memory Cards

and used for purposes other than transferring data, when uploading is performed, the
data in the folders will be deleted, and the data in the PT will be copied to the folders.
Therefore, do not use \BANK@\DATA or \BANK@\SYSTEM when creating folders in
the Memory Card.
Set all pins to OFF when using the PT for normal operations.

Note

Use the following technique when changing DIP-switch settings.

Incorrect technique

Correct technique

Back of the PTs case

DIP switch
The DIP switch may bend or break if the tool is incorrectly levered against the PTs case as
shown in the diagram.

Automatic Download
An automatic download transfers system programs and screen data from the Memory Card
to the PT.
Set the DIP switch for automatic download, as shown below.
The Memory Card cannot be used to transfer data when the DIP switch pins are set to combinations other than those specified here.
1

DIP switch pin and status

2
3
4
5

ON
OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON
OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON
OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON
OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

Operation
Automatically downloads bank 1 system programs and screen data.
Automatically downloads bank 2 system programs and screen data.
Automatically downloads bank 3 system programs and screen data.
Automatically downloads bank 4 system programs and screen data.

Use the following procedure to automatically download data.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn OFF the power to the PT.

Set the DIP switch.
Insert the Memory Card with the specified banks stored in it into the PT.
Turn ON the power to the PT.
The system programs and screen data will be written to the PT.
5. The status of the PT indicators during data transfer is as shown below.
Do not remove the Memory Card during data transfer.
Transferring data:
Indicator flashes orange.

3-22

3-6 Using Memory Cards

Transferring completed:
Indicator flashes green.
Error occurred:
Indicator flashes red.
Refer to page 3-25 if an error occurs.
Turn OFF the power.
Remove the Memory Card.
Turn OFF all the DIP switch pins.
Turn ON the power.

6.
7.
8.
9.

A warning message will not be displayed when automatic download is executed even if the
PT model, version, and language for the system programs and screen data that are stored in
the PT are different from those that are stored in the Memory Card.
Always check carefully that the PT model and Memory Card details match before transferring
data automatically.
When data transfer security has been set for the project data stored in the PT to protect the
project data from unauthorized data transfers, an automatic download will not be performed.
To download the data, use the manual transfer procedure described in Manual Transfer, below.

Automatic Upload
An automatic upload transfers system programs and screen data from the PT to the Memory
Card.
Set the DIP switch for automatic upload, as shown below.
The Memory Card cannot be used to transfer data when the DIP switch pins are set to combinations other than those specified here.

DIP switch pin and status

2
3
4
5

ON

ON
OFF

OFF

OFF

ON
OFF

OFF

ON
OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF
ON

OFF
ON

OFF

OFF
ON

OFF

OFF

Operation

OFF
ON
OFF

Automatically uploads system programs and

screen data to bank 1.
Automatically uploads system programs and
screen data to bank 2.
Automatically uploads system programs and
screen data to bank 3.
Automatically uploads system programs and
screen data to bank 4.

Use the following procedure to automatically upload data.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn OFF the power to the PT.

Set the DIP switch.
Insert the Memory Card into the PT.
Turn ON the power to the PT.
The system programs and screen data will be written to the Memory Card.
5. The status of the PT indicator during data transfer is as shown below.
Do not remove the Memory Card during data transfer.
Transferring data:
Indicator flashes orange.
Transferring completed:
Indicator flashes green.
Error occurred:
Indicator flashes red.
Refer to page 3-25 if an error occurs.
6. Turn OFF the power.

3-23

3-6 Using Memory Cards

7. Remove the Memory Card.

8. Turn OFF all the DIP switch pins.
9. Turn ON the power.
A warning message will not be displayed when automatic upload is executed even if the PT
model, version, and language for the system programs and screen data that are stored in the
PT are different from those that are stored in the Memory Card.
Always check carefully that the PT model and Memory Card details match before transferring
data automatically.
When data transfer security has been set for the project data stored in the PT to protect the
project data from unauthorized data transfers, an automatic upload will not be performed. To
upload the data, use the manual transfer procedure described in Manual Transfer, below.

Manual Transfer
Use screen operations to select the direction (download or upload), contents (Project, Project
& System, or System), and banks.
Use one of the following procedures to manually transfer data.
1. Turn OFF the power to the PT, turn ON pin 6 of the DIP switch, and turn ON the power to
the PT.
DIP switch pin and status
2
3
4
5

ON
OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

Operation

Enables manually downloading or uploading

the system program and screen data.

2. Execute Memory Card Transfer from the Special Screen Tab Page of the System Menu.
Refer to 6-8-9 Memory Card Transfers for details.
Use the following procedure to manually transfer data mentioned above in step 1.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Turn OFF the power to the PT.

Turn ON pin 6 of the DIP switch.
Insert the Memory Card into the PT.
Turn ON the power.
The following screen will be displayed on the PT.

6. Specify the direction of the transfer (download or upload), the transfer contents (project,
project and system program, or system program), and bank. The IPP file name and system version that are stored in both the specified bank of the Memory Card and the PT will
be displayed in the Project File and System Version fields. After confirming the details,
press the Go Button.
7. When data transfer security has been set for the project data stored in the PT to protect
the project data from unauthorized data transfers, the following password-entry screen
will be displayed. Input the password and press the ENTER Button.

3-24

3-6 Using Memory Cards

8. A message confirming the transfer will be displayed. Press the OK Button to execute the
specified data transfer operation. When downloading, the screen data previously stored in
the PT will be deleted. Also, specify whether or not to delete the log data.
Note

Always clear the log data for the following.

When changing settings related to alarms, events, or the data logs.
When transferring a different project to the PT.

9. A warning message will be displayed if the PT model, system program/screen data versions, or language stored in the PT do not match the corresponding data stored in the
Memory Card. Press the Yes Button to continue transferring the data.
10. The uploading/downloading screen will be displayed while data is being transferred. A
screen indicating that the transfer has completed will be displayed when the transfer has
finished. (If an error occurs, a transfer error screen will be displayed. Refer to Errors on
page 3-26 if an error occurs.)
11. The indicator will flash green when transferring has finished.
12. Turn OFF pin 6 of the DIP switch and reset the PT.
A warning message is not displayed at the PT when the PT model, version, and language are
different if the system programs used are version 1.0@.
Therefore, if the wrong data is downloaded, execute the transfer operation again using automatic download.
The system settings cannot be changed for the upload operation.

Errors
During Automatic Transfer
The indicator on the front panel will flash red if an error occurs during data transfer.
Check the following items if an error occurs.
Is the Memory Card inserted into the PT?
Do the banks set with the DIP switch exist in the Memory Card?
(During Download)
Is the size of the transfer data greater than the free space in the PT or Memory Card?
Check these items before transferring data again.
Reference An error message will not be displayed if an error occurs.

During Manual Transfer

If an error occurs during data transfer, a transfer error screen will be displayed.
Check the following items for each message displayed.

3-25

3-6 Using Memory Cards

Error Messages Requiring Checking

Error message
Memory Card Error
Could not recognize a Memory Card.
Check the Memory Card and reset the NS
Hardware.
Project Transmission Error
Transmission Failed.
Check the Memory Card and reset the NS
Hardware.
System Transmission Error
Transmission Failed.
Check the Memory Card and reset the NS
Hardware.
Cannot find source data.
Are you sure to continue Downloading/Uploading?
The password is incorrect. Check the password. Reset the PT.

Check item
Is the Memory Card inserted into the PT?
Is the Memory Card damaged?
Was the Memory Card removed during data transfer?
Is the free space on the Memory Card insufficient?
Is the Memory Card damaged?
Does the screen data volume exceed the memory
capacity of the PT?

Does the transfer source directory or file exist?

(Note: If the Yes Button is pressed and data is
transferred, the previous data at the transfer destination will be deleted.)
Check whether the password is correct.

After checking the message, reset the PT, and transfer the data again.

System

Program Recovery/Update

It may not be possible to replace the system program using a normal download if the PT system has been damaged, e.g., if the power was turned OFF while a file was being written. Use
the following procedure to operate the PT if system program replacement is not possible or
the system program is damaged and the PT does not start.
1. Copy RecoveUpdate_7_0 to a Memory Card. This program can be installed with CXDesigner Ver. 2.1 by specifying it in the set up wizard.
2. Place the Memory Card into the PT and turn ON the power. The recovery program will
start automatically.
Refer to the How to recover Ver. 7.0 pdf for details on recovery operations. This can be
started from Windows Start Programs Omron CX-One CX-Designer How to
recover the system prog Ver. 7.0.
3. The system will start automatically downloading data to the PT.
4. The indicator will flash green when the download has finished.

3-26

3-7 Installing the Video Input Unit

3-7 Installing the Video Input Unit

A Video Input Unit (NS-CA001 or NS-CA002) can be mounted to an NS-series PT. Mounting
a Video Input Unit allows images from a video camera or vision sensor to be displayed on the
PT screen. This section explains how to connect a Video Input Unit to the PT with a cable using the NS-CA001 as an example.
It can be connected to an NS8, NS10, or NS12 PT. The Video Input Unit cannot be connected
to an NS5 PT.
Reference

3-7-1

Refer to the NS Series RGB and Video Input Unit Operation Manual (Cat. No. V086)
for information on NS-CA002 installation methods.

Video Input Unit Components

The following table shows the Video Input Unit's product configuration.
Model
NS-CA001
Video Input Unit

Components
Name
Video Board (1)
Cover (1)
Cable (1)

Screw (M3) (9)

Instruction sheet

Note

Contents
Allows video input.
Protects Video Board.
Connects the PT's functional
ground terminal and the cover to
prevent noise.
These screws are used for the
following:
Securing the Video Board to
the back of the PT.
Securing the cover to the
back of the PT.
Attaching the cable to the
cover.
Instruction sheet for NS-CA001.

To comply with EC Directives (Low Voltage Directive) when mounting the Video Input Unit on
the PT, attach the PT to a control panel that has been cut to fit the size. (Refer to 3-1-3 Mounting the PT to the Control Panel for panel cutout dimensions.)

3-27

3-7 Installing the Video Input Unit

3-7-2

Nomenclature and Functions

Familiarize yourself with the nomenclature and functions of the Video Board before using the
Video Input Unit.
Video Board: Front View
Positions of screws for
attaching Video Board to PT

Contrast Adjuster
Used to adjust the contrast for video
input. All 4 channels are adjusted
together. They cannot be adjusted
individually.
Four Video Input Connectors
Console Port Connector BNC connectors for inputting NTSC/PAL
signals.
Connects to the console connector

of OMRON Vision Sensors and

allows Vision Sensor settings
to be performed from the PT.

Video Board: Rear View

Expansion Interface Connector

Connects to the PT's expansion interface connector
when mounting the Video Board.

3-28

3-7 Installing the Video Input Unit

3-7-3

Installation Method for Video Input Unit

This section describes the method for mounting the Video Input Unit to the PT.

Note

Do not touch the surface of the substrate or mounted devices with your bare hands. Also,
discharge static electricity from your body in advance.
After mounting the Video Input Unit to the PT, all fittings must be tightened with the provided screws. Tighten the screws to a torque of 0.6 Nm.
Always turn OFF the power to PT before mounting or removing the Unit. Follow the procedures and install the Unit correctly.
When the Video Input Unit is installed, the depth of the PT will increase by 24 mm.
To install the Video Input Unit, secure sufficient space inside the control panel beforehand.

Installing the Video Input Unit

Screw holes for

attaching expansion
boards

Position of screws for

attaching Board to PT

Align the positions of the holes.

1. Mount the Video Board onto the back of the PT so that its expansion interface connector
is inserted into the expansion interface connector on the back of the PT and the respective screw holes are aligned. Hold the Video Board by the corners keeping it parallel to
back of the PT.
Push firmly on the connector end of the board to ensure that it is inserted sufficiently.

Press here to insert the

Video Board.

3-29

3-7 Installing the Video Input Unit

2. Secure the four corners of the Video Board with screws.

3. Insert screws in the screw holes for attaching the cover and tighten them slightly.

Align the covers screw holes with the screws and mount the cover.

3-30

3-7 Installing the Video Input Unit

Slide the cover downward and tighten the screws.

Connecting the Cable

Connect the functional ground terminal of the PT and the cover with the cable to prevent malfunction due to noise.

Connect with the cable provided.

3-31

3-7 Installing the Video Input Unit

Removing the Video Input Unit

1. Remove the cover from the PT as follows:
Loosen the screws.

Lift up on the cover and remove it.

2. Remove the screws from the four corners.

3-32

3-7 Installing the Video Input Unit

3. Remove the Video Board from the expansion interface connector of PT.
Follow the procedure shown below.

3-33

3-7 Installing the Video Input Unit

3-7-4

Connecting to Video Input Connectors

Use the following method to connect cameras to the Video Input Unit mounted to the PT.

Note

The tensile load of the cable is 30 N maximum. Do not exceed maximum load

Connecting to Video Input Connectors

1.

Insert the BNC socket on the cameras video output cable into a video input connector.

2. After inserting the BNC socket, twist it clockwise until it locks into place.

Twist clockwise.

3-34

3-7 Installing the Video Input Unit

Removing the Video Input Connector

1. Unlock the BNC socket on the cameras video output cable by twisting it counterclockwise
while pushing it.

Push

Push
Twist counterclockwise

2. After unlocking the BNC socket, pull it out.

Pull out

3-35

3-7 Installing the Video Input Unit

If the cameras video output cable uses an RCA plug, connect it to the video input connector using a BNC-RCA connector in the way shown below.

Video input connector

(BNC type)

BNC-RCA connector (See note.)

RCA plug

Note

3-36

A BNC-RCA connector is provided with the Monitor Cable (F150-VM) for OMRON Vision
Sensors. It is not provided with the Video Input Unit (NS-CA001).

3-7 Installing the Video Input Unit

Connecting to the Console Port Connector

Use the following method to connect the Video Boards console port connector to the console
connector of an OMRON Vision Sensor (F150-C10V3, F160-C10, F180-C10, F400-C10V2,
F250-C10, V530-R150V2).
1. Insert the socket of the Relay Cable (F150-VKP; see note) into the Video Boards console
port connector.

Note

The Relay Cable (F150-VKP) is the cable used to connect the Video Boards console connector to the console connector of an OMRON Vision Sensor.

Removing the Console Port Connector

Use the following method to remove the Relay Cable from the Video Boards console port
connector.
1. Remove the Relay Cable by pulling on the connector as shown below.

3-37

3-7 Installing the Video Input Unit

Setting the Contrast

If the picture displayed on the PT screen is too bright or dark, contrast adjustment is required.
Contrast adjustment is usually performed using one of the following procedures.

Select Video Configuration from the Special Screen Tab Page in the System Menu. (Refer
to Video Configuration under 2-18 Special Functions in the NS-series Programmable Terminals Programming Manual.)
Select the Contrast Adjustment function for Command Buttons. (Refer to Command Buttons
under 2-9 Buttons in the NS-series Programmable Terminals Programming Manual).
If the contrast is not improved using the above methods, change the contrast with the Video
Boards contrast adjustor using the following method.
Turn the contrast adjustor gradually using a small screwdriver while checking the picture
displayed on the PT screen.

If turning the contrast adjustor too much, the image may be distorted. Turn the contrast adjustor in the opposite direction to remove the noise.

3-38

3-8 Installing the Controller Link Interface Unit

3-8 Installing the Controller Link Interface Unit

This section describes the method for installing and wiring the Controller Link Interface Unit,
which can be mounted to an NS10 or NS12 PT. The Controller Link Interface Unit cannot be
mounted to an NS8 or NS5 PT.

3-8-1

Controller Link Interface Unit Components

The following table shows the Controller Link Interface Units product configuration.
Model
NS-CLK21
Controller Link
Interface Unit

Components
Name
NS-CLK001 Connector Conversion Board (1)
NS-CLK01 Controller Link Support Board (1)
Connector (1)
Cover (1)
Cable (1)

Screw (M3) (10)

Instruction sheet

Reference

Note

Contents
Used for mounting the Controller Link
Support Board to the PT.
Connects the PT to the Controller Link
Network.
Connects the communications cable
and Controller Link Support Board.
Protects the connector and the Controller Link Support Board.
Connects the cover and the PTs functional ground terminal to prevent
noise.
These screws are used for:
Securing the Connector Conversion
Board to the back of the PT.
Securing the cover to the back of
the PT.
Attaching the cable to the cover.
Instruction sheet for NS-CLK21

NS-CLK21 Units with lot number 12Y2 or later (manufactured on November 12, 2002
or later) comply with EC Directives.

To comply with EC Directives (Low Voltage Directive) when mounting the Controller Link Interface Unit on the PT, attach the PT to a control panel that has been cut to fit to size. (Refer to
3-1-3 Mounting the PT to the Control Panel for cutout dimensions.)

3-39

3-8 Installing the Controller Link Interface Unit

3-8-2

Nomenclature and Functions

Familiarize yourself with the nomenclature and functions of the Controller Link Support Board
before operation.
Interrupt shorting Pin
Set at the factory. Do not
change the factory setting.

Memory Allocation Switch

Set at the factory. Do not change
the factory setting.

Card Edge Connector

Connects to the connector of
the Connector Conversion
Board.

Communications Connector
Connects to Controller Link Network
communications cable using the cable
connector provided.
Plate
Attaches to the cover.
Terminating Resistance Switch
This is a slide switch. Turn ON the
terminating resistance if the Board is
at the end node in a Controller Link
Network. The switch must be set to
OFF at other nodes.

Reference

3-40

Indicators
Display the status of the
Board and Network.

To identify nonconforming Controller Link Boards, check the Model printed on the
Plate.
This will tell you whether it conforms with EC Directives.
Model 3G8F5-CLK21: Does not conform with EC Directives
Model NS-CLK01: Conforms with EC Directives

3-8 Installing the Controller Link Interface Unit

Indicators
Indicator
Name
RUN
Operating

ERC

ERH

INS

SD
RD
LNK

Color status
Meaning
Green Lit
Normal operation.
Not lit A Board operating error (watchdog timer error) occurred.
Communica- Red
Lit
One of the following errors occurred.
tions error
Communications error
Same node address used twice (i.e., address
duplication error)
Hardware error
Not lit Normal operation
EEPROM error Red
Lit
One of the following errors occurred.
EEPROM error
EEPROM data link table error
EEPROM routing table error
EEPROM network parameter error
Not lit No EEPROM error.
Network par- Yellow Lit
The Board is participating in the network.
ticipation
Not lit The Board is not participating in the network.
Send
Yellow Lit
Sending data.
Not lit Not sending data.
Receive
Yellow Lit
Receiving data.
Not lit Not receiving data.
Data link
Yellow Lit
Participating in data link.
Flash- Error in data link table setting.
ing
Not lit Not participating in data link or data link inactive.

3-41

3-8 Installing the Controller Link Interface Unit

Switch Settings
The following settings are made at the factory. Do not change these settings.
Item
Memory address

Switch
Memory allocation switch

Interrupt level

Interrupt shorting pin

Setting
SW1: ON
SW2: ON
SW3: OFF
SW4: ON
Set to IRQ10.

Setting Terminating Resistance

Turn the built-in terminating resistance ON or OFF using the terminating resistance switch
(slide switch). Terminating resistance is required at the both ends of a wired network to absorb unnecessary signals and reduce the noise. The Controller Link Support Board has builtin terminating resistance, which can be connected simply by setting the slide switch to ON.
Set the switch to ON to connect the terminating resistance at both end nodes in wired networks and set the switch to OFF at all other nodes.
ON

Setting
Terminating resistance
OFF (factory setting) Not connected
ON
Connected

Note

This switch can be set after the Controller Link Interface Unit is installed on the PT.
Turn OFF the power of the PT before changing the setting.

Reference

3-42

This switch is set to OFF by default (terminating resistance disconnected).

3-8 Installing the Controller Link Interface Unit

3-8-3

Installation Method for Controller Link Interface Unit

This section explains the method for mounting a Controller Link Interface Unit to the PT.
The Controller Link Interface Unit can be mounted to NS12 and NS10 PTs only. It cannot be
mounted to an NS8 or NS5 PT.

Note

Do not touch the surface of the substrate or mounted devices with your bare hands. Also,
discharge static electricity from your body in advance.

After mounting the Controller Link Interface Unit to the PT, all fittings must be tightened
with the provided screws. Tighten the screws to a torque of 0.6 Nm.

Always turn OFF the power to PT before mounting or removing the Unit. Follow the procedures and install the Unit correctly.

When the Controller Link Interface Unit is installed, the depth of the PT will increase by
35 mm.

To install the Controller Link Interface Unit, secure sufficient space inside the control panel
beforehand.

3-43

3-8 Installing the Controller Link Interface Unit

Connecting and Disconnecting

1. Mount the Connector Conversion Board onto the back of the PT so that its expansion interface connector is inserted into the expansion interface connector on the back of the PT
and the respective screw holes are aligned. Hold the Board by the corners keeping it
parallel to back of the PT.

PTs expansion
interface connector

Align the positions of the holes

Connector Conversion
Board

Connector Conversion Boards

expansion interface connector

Hold the four corners and insert straight

to the expansion interface connector on
the PT.

2. Secure the four corners of the Connector Conversion Board with screws.

3-44

3-8 Installing the Controller Link Interface Unit

3. Insert the Controller Link Support Boards card edge connector into the Connector Conversion Boards connector.

Reference

Follow the steps given below if it is hard to insert the card edge connector to the connector on the connector conversion board.

3-45

3-8 Installing the Controller Link Interface Unit

4. Mount the cover to the PT.

Cover
Controller Link
Support Board
(Underside view)

5. Secure the five places shown below with screws.

3-46

3-8 Installing the Controller Link Interface Unit

Connecting the Cable

Connect the functional ground terminal of the PT and the cover with the cable to prevent malfunction due to noise.

Connect with the cable provided.

Removing Controller Link Interface Unit

1. Remove the cover.

Cover
Remove these screws and
remove the cover.

Controller Link
Support Board

3-47

3-8 Installing the Controller Link Interface Unit

2. Disconnect the Controller Link Support Board from the connector conversion board. Hold
both ends of the Controller Link Support Board and pull out straight.

3. Remove the screws from the Connector Conversion Board.

3-48

3-8 Installing the Controller Link Interface Unit

4. Disconnect the Connector Conversion Board from the PT. To do this, follow the steps
given below.

Hold the four corners of the

Board and detach upper side
first.

Then, pull out the Board

completely.

3-49

3-8 Installing the Controller Link Interface Unit

3-8-4

Wiring
This section describes the method for wiring the network communications cable to the Controller Link Support Board.

Wiring the Communications Cable

Wire the communications cable to connect identical signals.

Note

Use the cable specified for the communications cable.

Keep communications cables separated from power lines or high-tension lines to prevent
influences from electronic noise.

Ground the shield of the communications cable at one end of the network. Do not ground
the shield at both ends.

Do not connect the shield cable of the communications cable to a ground that is also being
used for power-system devices, such as inverters.

Do not run wiring outdoors. If outdoor wiring is necessary, take protective measures against
lightening, such as underground wiring or wiring inside pipes.

Always turn OFF the power to PT before connecting the communications cable or installing/removing the connector.

Use the connector attached to the Controller Link Support Board.

Connecting the Communications Cable

Connect the communications cable to the Controller Link Support Board after first connecting
it to the cable connector provided.
Use one of the twisted-pair cables listed below as the communications cable.
Model
Manufacturer
Li2Y-FCY2x0.56qmm KROMBERG & SHUBERT, Department KOMTEC
1x2xAWG-20PE+Tr. DRAKA CABLES INDUSTRIAL
CUSN+PVC
#9207
BELDEN
ESVC0.5x2C
Bando Densen Co.

Note

Remarks
German company
Spanish company
American company
Japanese company

Use the cables listed above.

Normal communications may not be possible if a communications cable other than those
listed above is used.

Reference

Terminals for the same signal on the Controller Link Support Boards connector are
connected internally.

The thickness of the ground wire connected to the Controller Link Support Boards
2

connector must be less than 2.5 mm .

Connect to the network using the special connector provided with the Controller Link
Interface Unit.

3-50

3-8 Installing the Controller Link Interface Unit

Note

The minimum length of the communications cable between nodes is 1 m. Prepare the communications cables at a length of 1 m or longer.

Use the multidrop method for connecting nodes. Normal communications will not be possible with T branches.

Ground all of the shield lines (including the shield line for the node at only one end of the network) in the way shown below.
Board at the end of
the network

Board in the middle

of the network

Board at the end of

the network
Terminating
resistance: OFF

Terminating
resistance: ON

Terminating
resistance: ON

Ground

Reference Terminals of the same type are connected internally. They can thus be connected to
either the right or left half of the end Boards.

End Board

Connecting Cables to Communications Connectors

When connecting a communications cable to a Controller Link Support Board, connect the
cable to the attached connector first and then attach to the connector to the Board.
Connect the communications cable to the connector using the following procedure.
1. Taking care not to damage the mesh of the shield, strip about 50 mm off the end of the
cable. Do not strip the cable too far because it may cause a short-circuit.
Approx. 50 mm

3-51

3-8 Installing the Controller Link Interface Unit

2. At the end connected to the node, twist the mesh of the shield into a single wire. Leave
sufficient length at the tip of the twisted shield to be connected to a crimp terminal and
cover the remaining section with heat-shrink tubing. Cut all the shield mesh off at the end
not connected to the node.
Wire created by
twisting the shield
mesh.

Cover with heat-shrink tubing

Leave enough exposed wire to
attach to a crimp terminal.

3. Strip the ends of the signal wires far enough to attach to the crimp terminals. Twist the
wire strands together.

4. Cover the end of the cable at the point it was stripped to in step 1 with vinyl tape or heatshrink tubing.
Cover with vinyl tape or
heat- shrink tubing.

5. Attach crimp terminals to the shield wire and signal wires. Cover the connections with vinyl tape or heat-shrink tubing.

Reference We recommend the Phoenix AI-series crimp terminals shown in the following diagram.
Phoenixs ZA3 crimping tool can be used to attach these terminals.

Crimp terminal Wire

Insert the wire and crimp the terminal to the wire.

3-52

3-8 Installing the Controller Link Interface Unit

6. Carefully insert the signal and shield lines into the respective holes of the connector
(identified with the markings). Ensure that the connector is oriented correctly. The following example is for connection to a Board in the middle of the network.

Cable connector

Shield lines

Note

Loosen the screws in the connector enough to allow the terminal to pass before inserting
the signal line. If the screw is not loosened, the signal line will go completely into the connector and you will not be able to secure the line.
Attach crimp terminals to the wires. Never connect bare power supply wires directly to the
connector.

Reference Marks are provided on the connector for the signal lines. Connect the signal lines according to the marks.
Marking



S

Signal name
Line color
BD H (communications data high) Black
BD L (communication data low) White
SHLD (shield)

Marks indicate signals as listed above.

The lines can be connected to either the right or left half of the connector at the node
on either end of the network.

If grounding by node, the connection method for the shield is different.

Refer to Wiring Communications Cable and Connecting the Shield Line to the Connector under 3-8-4 Wiring, for details on connecting the shield to the connector.

7. Firmly secure each signal line with the signal line screws in the connector. An ordinary
flat-blade screwdriver with a tip that tapers at the end is not suitable because it cannot be
inserted far enough. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver with a uniform width. The applicable tightening torque is 0.2 Nm.

3-53

3-8 Installing the Controller Link Interface Unit

Small flat-blade
screwdriver with a
uniform width

Reference

The following screwdriver is available from OMRON.

Model XW4Z-00C
Side

Front

0.6 mm

3.5 mm

Connecting the Connector to the Board

Connect the connector on the communications cable to the connector on the Board using the
following procedure.
1. Insert the connector on the communications cable into the connector on the Board as
shown below.

Controller Link
Support Board

Cable connector

2. Secure the connector to the Board by tightening the screws on the connector. The applicable tightening torque is 0.2 Nm.

3-54

3-8 Installing the Controller Link Interface Unit

Note

If the connector becomes disconnected, not only will the Board be unable to perform communications with other nodes in the network, the network will be split into two at the point of
disconnection. Take the utmost care to ensure that the connector does not become disconnected during communications.
Controller Link Support Board

Communications disabled
Connector

Network split
(communications disabled)

Do not pull on the communications cable.

When bending the communications cable, allow 60 mm or more for the bending radius (R).

Do not place heavy objects on the communications cable.

Supply power only after checking the wiring thoroughly.
Always tighten the screws of connector after connecting the communications cable.

3-55

Section 4
Connecting the Host to Serial Port
This section describes the methods for connecting the host to the serial port of the PT.
For details on connecting through host link communications, refer to the Host Connection
Manual (Host Link). For details on Temperature Controller connections and Memory Link
communications, refer to the Host Connection Manual (Temp. Control, MemLink). For details
on connecting to another companys PLC, refer to the Host Connection Manual (Multivendor
Connection).

4-1

1:1 Host Connection ........................................................................................................ 4-2

4-1-1 Connection Methods................................................................................................. 4-2
4-1-2 Unit Setting Methods................................................................................................ 4-4
4-2 1:N Host Connection ....................................................................................................... 4-7
4-2-1 Connection Methods................................................................................................. 4-7
4-2-2 Unit Setting Methods................................................................................................ 4-7
4-3 High-speed 1:N NT Link ............................................................................................... 4-16
4-3-1 Unit Setting Methods.............................................................................................. 4-17
4-4 Recommended Connector Cables .................................................................................. 4-24

4-1 1:1 Host Connection

4-1 1:1 Host Connection

4-1-1

Connection Methods
This section describes the methods for connecting the host to serial port A or B of the PT using RS-232C or RS-422A communications. The connection methods are as follows:

Direct Connection using RS-232C

This is the easiest connection method. OMRON cables with connectors can be used, depending on the host being connected.
PT

Host

RS-232C cable
(15 m max.)

A 1:1 Connection using RS-422A and an NS-AL002 RS-232C/RS-422A Converter

This connection method allows an extended communications distance of up to 500 m.
Host

PT
NS-AL002
Adapter
RS-422A cable
(500 m max.)

The NS-series PTs have two serial ports that can be used simultaneously. Therefore, two
hosts can be connected at the same time. Any combination of devices can be connected to
the PT.
PT

Host 1
Serial port A

(See note.)

Serial port B

(See note.)

RS-232C cable or
RS-232C/RS-422A Converter
+ RS-422A cable

Host 2

Note: Each port allows 1:N connection. The NS-AL002 Converter can be connected to one serial port
only.

Note

Always tighten the connector screws after connecting communications cables.

The connectors pull load is 30 N.
Do not subject the connectors to a greater load than that specified.

Supported RS-232C Host Units

Some models and series of OMRON PLCs have a built-in 1:1 NT Link function. Some PLCs
can also be connected in a 1:1 NT Link by adding a Serial Communications Board or Communications Board.
When connecting the PT to a PLC, check the series and model of the PLC and the model of
the Board mounted to the PLC.
Refer to Appendix 8 Standard Models for details on the Units that can be connected to NSseries PTs as hosts using RS-232C or RS-422A communications in a 1:1 NT Link.
Reference CS/CJ series CPU Units cannot be connected in a 1:1 NT Link. Use a 1:1 connection
through 1:N NT Links (normal or high speed). For details, refer to 1:N NT Links or Highspeed 1:N NT Links in Section 4-2 1:N Host Connection.

4-2

4-1 1:1 Host Connection

Supported RS-422A Host Units

Units for RS-422A communications with a built-in 1:1 NT Link function vary according to the
type and series of OMRON PLC used.

C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) PLCs can be connected in a 1:1 NT Link for RS-422A by adding a

Communications Board.
CQM1H PLCs can be connected in a 1:1 NT Link for RS-422A by adding a Serial Communications Board.
Check the series and type of the PLC and the model of the Board that is mounted to the PLC
when connecting the PT to the host.
Refer to Appendix 8 Standard Models for details on the Units that can be connected to NSseries PTs as hosts and support a 1:1 NT Link using RS-422A.
Reference

The 1:1 NT Link is not supported for RS-485 (two-wire) communications. Always use RS-422A
(four-wire). NS-series RS-485 (two-wire) communications are used to connect to an OMRON
Temperature Controller. The NS-AL002 cannot be used with the NT-series PTs or PLCs.

Connecting to CPM2C PLCs

The CPM2C has a single connector that is the same shape as a CS-series peripheral port.
Internally, the connector has signal lines that are for use with the CPUs built-in RS-232C port
and the peripheral port. Therefore, when using the CPM2C, use the settings for the CPUs
built-in RS-232C port or for the peripheral port according to the converter cable and port used.
When using a CPM2C1-CIF21 Simplified Communications Unit, connect it to the RS-232C
port. Use CS1W-CN118 Connecting Cable to connect the CPM2C to the NS-series PT using
the built-in RS-232C port of the CPM2C. The peripheral port cannot be used to connect the
PT.
Refer to the CPM2C Operation Manual (W356) for details.
Port for connecting PT
CS1W-CN118 port (D-Sub 9-pin)

CS1W-CN118

PLC Setup
Set for built-in RS-232C.

CPM2C

RS-232C port
(D-Sub 9-pin female)

4-3

4-1 1:1 Host Connection

Connecting to Simplified Communications Units

When using a CPM2C1-CIF21 Simplified Communications Unit, connect it to the RS-232C
port.

RS-232C port

4-1-2

Unit Setting Methods

Host Settings
The methods for setting each Unit are as follows:

Connecting C Series, C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z), CQM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, or

CQM1H PLCs
PLC Setup Area
Write the settings directly from the Programming Device (CX-Programmer, etc.) to the PLC
Setup Area (in DM Area) according to the host type and port used.
Using RS-232C
Host type
Address
Built-in RS-232C port of C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z), DM 6645
CPM1A, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1, or CQM1H
DM 6555
Port A of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) (See note 1.)
Port 1 of CQM1H (See note 2.)
Port B of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) (See note 1.)
DM 6550
Note 1. RS-232C port of Communications Board.
2. RS-232C port of Serial Communications Board.

Write value
4000

Settings
Uses 1:1 NT
Link

Write value
4000

Settings
Uses 1:1 NT
Link

Using RS-422A
Host type
Address
Port A of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)
DM 6555
(See note 1.)
Port 2 of CQM1H (See note 2.)
DM 6550
Note 1. RS-422A port of Communications Board.
2. RS-422A port of Serial Communications Board.

4000

Refer to the manuals of the PLC being used for details on using the PLC Setup Area.

4-4

4-1 1:1 Host Connection

Setting the Front Panel DIP Switch

Using RS-232C
When using C200HX/HG/HE(-Z), CQM1, or CQM1H PLCs, set the DIP switch on the front
panel to enable the PLC Setup Area (Data Memory) settings, as follows:
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)

CQM1

CQM1H

RS-232C Communications Conditions Setting

Set pin 5 of the DIP switch to OFF to enable the
PLC Setup Area settings.

Setting the CPM2A Front Panel DIP Switch

When using a CPM2A, set the DIP switch on the front panel to enable the PLC Setup Area
(Data Memory) settings, as follows:

Set the communications

conditions setting switch to
OFF (lower position).

Setting the CPM2C Front Panel DIP Switches

When using a CPM2C, set the switches on the front panel to enable the PLC Setup Area
(Data Memory) settings, as follows:

Set the switches according to whether the peripheral port or

the built-in RS-232C port is used, as follows:
Connecting the PT to the built-in RS-232C port
(The peripheral port is used to connect devices that require
non-standard communications settings.)
SW1: OFF
SW2: ON

Connecting the PT to the built-in RS-232C port

(The peripheral port is used to connect the Programming
Console.)
SW1: OFF
SW2: OFF

4-5

4-1 1:1 Host Connection

Setting the Communications Board Switches (Using RS-422A)

Set the switches of the C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) Communications Board as follows:
Switch 1:

4 (Four-wire method = RS-422A)

Switch 2: ON (terminator ON = terminating resistance used)

Set the switches of the CQM1H Serial Communications Board as follows:
Two-wire/four-wire switch (WIRE):

4 (Four-wire method = RS-422A)

Terminating resistance switch (TERM): ON (terminator ON = terminating resistance used)

Serial Communications Board
(Inner Board slot 1)

Terminating resistance switch

Set to ON (right position)
Two-wire/four-wire switch
Set to 4 (right position)

Connecting to CVM1/CV Series (-V@) PLCs (Using RS-232C/RS-422A)

PLC Setup
When using CVM1/CV-series PLCs, always set the Execute Process (Execute Control 2) in
the PLC Setup to synchronous execution.
Setting the Front Panel DIP Switch
Set the DIP switch on the front panel, as shown in the following diagram.
Switch setting
Switches between RS-232C
and RS-422A

Communications path
switch
(RS-232C-to-RS-422A)

Communications setting (DIP switch pin 3)

Set pin 3 to ON (NT Link communications used).

Terminating resistance setting (DIP switch pin 6,

for RS-422A only)
Set pin 6 to ON (terminating resistance used).

4-6

4-2 1:N Host Connection

4-2 1:N Host Connection

4-2-1

Connection Methods
This section describes the methods used to connect multiple PTs to a single host in a 1:N
connection and provides information on the relationship between the connection methods
and the communications methods.

The Host and PTs are connected in a 1:N configuration using RS-422A with an RS232C/RS-422A Converter.
This connection method can be used for 1:N NT Link connections (normal, high-speed).
PT

Host

NS-AL002
Converter

RS-422A cable

Supported Host Units

The OMRON PLCs that can be connected in 1:N NT Links are limited to the CS-series, CJseries, and C-series PLCs. CS-series PLCs can also be connected in 1:N NT Links by using
a CS1W-SCU21/31 Serial Communications Unit. CJ-series PLCs can also be connected in
1:N NT Links by using a CJ1W-SCU31/41 Serial Communications Unit.
Check the series and model of the PLC and the model of the Board or Unit that is mounted to
the PLC when connecting the PTs to the host.
For details on the Units used as hosts that can be connected in 1:N NT Links, refer to Appendix 8 Standard Models.
Reference

NS-series RS-485 (two-wire) communications are used to connect to an OMRON

Temperature Controller. The NS-AL002 cannot be used with the NT-series PTs or
PLCs. Always use RS-422A (four-wire).
CS-series PLCs with -V1 suffix support high-speed 1:N NT Links as well as normal
1:N NT Links. CS-series PLCs without the -V1 suffix can also be connected to highspeed 1:N NT Links if the latest Serial Communications Board/Unit is used. Refer to
High-speed 1:N NT Link for details. (page 4-16).

4-2-2

Unit Setting Methods

Host Settings
The methods for setting each Unit are as follows:

Connecting C-series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z), and CQM1H PLCs

PLC Setup Area
Write the settings directly from the Programming Device or Support Software (CXProgrammer, etc.) to the PLC Setup Area (Data Memory) according to the host type and port
used.

4-7

4-2 1:N Host Connection

Using RS-232C

Host type
Address
Write value
Built-in RS-232C port of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) DM 6645
Port A of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) (See note 1.)
DM 6555 5@00
Port 1 of CQM1H (See note 2.)
Port B of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) (See note 1.) DM 6550
Note 1. RS-232C port of Communications Board.
2. RS-232C port of Serial Communications Board.
3. The PT unit numbers for the C200HE (-Z) are 1 to 3.

Settings
Uses 1:N NT Link
@: Largest unit number (1
to 7) of connected
PTs. (See note 3.)

Using RS-422A

Host type
Port A of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)
(See note 1.)

Address
DM 6555

Write value
5@00

Port 2 of CQM1H (See note 2.)

DM 6550

5@00

Settings
Uses 1:N NT Link
@: Largest unit number (1
to 7) of the connected
PTs. (See note 3.)

Note 1. RS-422A port of Communications Board.

2. RS-422A port of Serial Communications Board.
3. The PT unit numbers for the C200HE (-Z) are 1 to 3.

Refer to the manuals of the PLC being used for details on using the PLC Setup Area.
Reference

There is no Communications Board for use with C200HX/HG/HE (-Z) where port B is
an RS-422A port.
There is no Communications Board for use with CQM1H where Port 1 is an RS-422A
port.
When setting a 1:N NT Link in the CX-Programmer, set the baud rate to 38,400 bps.

Setting the Front Panel DIP Switch

Using RS-232C
When using C200HX/HG/HE(-Z), set the DIP switch on the front panel to enable the PLC
Setup Area (Data Memory) settings, as follows:
Sets the RS-232C port communications
conditions. Set DIP switch pin 5 to OFF to
enable the PLC Setup settings.

4-8

4-2 1:N Host Connection

Setting the Communications Board Switches

Using RS-422A
Set the switches of the C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) Communications Board, as follows:
Switch 1:
Switch 2:

4 (Four-wire method = RS-422A)

ON (terminator ON = terminating resistance used)

Set the switches of the CQM1H Serial Communications Board as follows:

Two-wire/four-wire switch (WIRE):

4 (Four-wire method = RS-422A)

Terminating resistance switch (TERM): ON (terminator ON = terminating resistance used)

Serial Communications Board
(Inner Board slot 1)

Terminating resistance switch

Set to ON (right position).
Two-wire/four-wire switch
For RS-422A: Set to 4 to
use four-wire (right position).

Connecting to CS-series CPU Units

CS-series CPU Units:
CS1G/H-CPU@@-E(V1) and CS1G/H-CPU@@H
PLC Setup Area
Using RS-232C
When connecting the PT to a CS-series CPU Unit, set the communications conditions in the
PLC Setup according to the communications port used, as follows:

Using Built-in RS-232C Port of CS1G/H or CS1G/H-H

Address
160
161
166

Write value

Settings

8200
0000 to 0009 (See note 1.)
000@

1:N NT Link Mode

Baud rate (normal)
@: Largest unit number (1 to 7) of the connected
PTs. (See note 2.)
Note 1. Set the baud rate to a numeric value between 0000 to 0009 Hex. (The setting is the same for
any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex.)
2. When using a 1:N connection, set the value for @ to 1 or higher.

For example, to connect PTs with unit numbers 0, and 2 to 5 to the built-in RS-232C port in
1:N NT Links, set address 160 to 8200 Hex, and address 166 to 0005 Hex.
Set whether the PLC Setup is set directly from the Programming Device (Programming Console) or created using the Support Software (CX-Programmer) and transferred to the CPU
Unit.

4-9

4-2 1:N Host Connection

Refer to the SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Operation Manual (W341) for information on PLC Setup.
Reference When setting a 1:N NT Link in the CX-Programmer, set the baud rate to 38,400 bps.
Setting the Front Panel Switches
Using RS-232C
Set DIP switch pin 4 or 5 of the CPU Unit according to the port to which the PT is connected,
as follows:

DIP switch (inside battery compartment)

Turn ON pin 4 when connecting the PT to
the peripheral port (to use the
communications settings in the PLC
Setup).
Turn ON pin 5 when connecting the PT to
the RS-232C port (to use the
communications settings in the PLC
Setup).

Peripheral port
Mainly connected to a
Programming Device.
(Can be connected to
an RS-232C device.)
RS-232C port
Mainly connected to
an RS-232C device.
(Can be connected to
a computer running
the CX-Programmer.

Connecting to CJ-series CPU Units

CJ-series CPU Units:
CJ1G-CPU@@
PLC Setup Area
Using RS-232C
When connecting the PT to a CJ-series CPU Unit, set the communications conditions in the
PLC Setup according to the communications port used, as follows:

Using the CJ1G/H-H, CJ1G, or CJ1M Built-in RS-232C Port

Address
160
161
166

Write value

Settings

8200
1:N NT Link Mode
0000 to 0009 (See note 1.) Baud rate (normal)
000@
@: Largest unit number (1 to 7) of the connected PTs.
(See note 2.)
Note 1. Set the baud rate to a numeric value between 0000 to 0009 Hex. (The setting is the same for
any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex.)
2. When using a 1:N connection, set the value for @ to 1 or higher.

For example, to connect PTs with unit numbers 0, and 2 to 5 to the built-in RS-232C port in
1:N NT Links, set address 160 to 8200 Hex, and address 166 to 0005 Hex.
Set whether the PLC Setup is set directly from the Programming Device (Programming Console) or created by the Support Software (CX-Programmer) and transferred to the CPU Unit.

4-10

4-2 1:N Host Connection

Refer to the SYSMAC CJ Series Operation Manual (W393) for information on the PLC Setup.
Reference When setting a 1:N NT Link in the CX-Programmer, set the baud rate to 38,400 bps.
Setting the Front Panel Switches
Using RS-232C
Set DIP switch pin 4 or 5 of the CPU Unit according to the port to which the PT is connected,
as follows:

DIP switch (inside battery compartment)

Turn ON pin 4 when connecting the PT to the
peripheral port (to use the communications
settings in the PLC Setup).
Turn ON pin 5 when connecting the PT to the
RS-232C port (to use the communications
settings in the PLC Setup).
Peripheral port
Connected to a Programming Console or other
device.

RS-232C port
Connected to a Programming Console or
other device.

4-11

4-2 1:N Host Connection

Connecting to CS-series Serial Communications Boards

Serial Communications Boards with RS-232C and RS-422A Ports for Use with CS-series
CPU Units:
CS1W-SCB21 (Both ports 1 and 2 are RS-232C ports.)
CS1W-SCB41 (Port 1 is an RS-232C port and Port 2 is an RS-422A port.)
Setting DM Area Allocations in CPU Unit
Write the settings directly from the Programming Device or Support Software (Programming
Console or CX-Programmer) to the DM Area (Parameter Area) in the CPU Unit. After writing
the settings, enable the settings by turning ON the power again, restarting the Unit, restarting
the communications port, or executing the CHANGE SERIAL PORT SETUP (STUP) instruction.
The following table shows the allocated DM Area words and settings.
The allocations and settings are the same for RS-232C and RS-422A (CS1W-SCB41 Port 2).
Allocated DM Area words
Port 1
DM32000
DM32001

Port 2
DM32010
DM32011

Write value
8200
0000 to 0009
(See note 1.)
000@

Settings
1:N NT Link Mode
Baud rate (normal)

@: Largest unit number (1 to 7) of the

connected PTs. (See note 2.)
Note 1. Set the baud rate to a numeric value between 0000 to 0009 Hex. (The setting is the same for
any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex.)
2. When using a 1:N connection, set the value for @ to 1 or higher.
DM32006

DM32016

For example, to connect PTs with unit numbers 3 to 6 to Port 1 in 1:N NT Links, set DM32000
to 8200 Hex, DM32001 to 0000 Hex, and DM32006 to 0006 Hex.
Reference When setting a 1:N NT Link in the CX-Programmer, set the baud rate to 38,400 bps.

4-12

4-2 1:N Host Connection

Setting the Front Panel Switches

Using RS-422A

Port 1
RS-232C

Terminating resistance switch (TERM)

Set to ON:
Terminating resistance used
(right position)

Two-wire/four-wire switch (WIRE)

For RS-422A:
Set to 4 for four-wire (right position).

Port 2
RS-422A

Connecting to CS-series Serial Communications Units

CS-series Rack-mounted Type:
CS1W-SCU21 (Both ports 1 and 2 are RS-232C ports.)
CS1W-SCU31 (Both ports 1 and 2 are RS-422A ports.)
CPU Unit DM Area Settings
Using RS-232C
Write the settings directly from the Programming Device or Support Software (Programming
Console or CX-Programmer) to the DM Area (Parameter Area) in the CPU Unit. After writing
the settings, enable the settings by turning ON the power again, restarting the Unit, restarting
the communications port, or executing the CHANGE SERIAL PORT SETUP (STUP) instruction.

The following table shows the allocated DM Area words and settings.
m = 30000 + 100 unit number
Allocated DM Area words
Port 1
DM m
DM m + 1
DM m + 6

Port 2
DM m + 10
DM m + 11
DM m + 16

Write value

Settings

8200
0000 to 0009 (See note 1.)
000@

1:N NT Link Mode

Baud rate (normal)
@: Largest unit number (1 to 7) of the
connected PTs. (See note 2.)
Note 1. Set the baud rate to a numeric value between 0000 to 0009 Hex. (The setting is the same for
any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex.)
2. When using a 1:N connection, set the value for @ to 1 or higher.

Reference When setting a 1:N NT Link in the CX-Programmer, set the baud rate to 38,400 bps.

4-13

4-2 1:N Host Connection

Setting the Front Panel Switches

Using RS-232C
Set the unit number of the Serial Communications Unit with the rotary switches on the front of
the Unit. Use a flat-blade screwdriver to set the numerals and symbols in the switches setting
display window, as follows:

Unit number setting

Set a value between 0 and F that is not the same
as that of other Units in the system.

Connecting to CJ-series Serial Communications Units

CJ-series Units:
CJ1W-SCU41 (Port 1 is an RS-422A port and Port 2 is an RS-232C port.)
CJ1W-SCU31 (Both ports 1 and 2 are RS-422A ports.)
CPU Unit DM Area Settings
Write the settings directly from the Programming Device or Support Software (Programming
Console or CX-Programmer) to the DM Area (Parameter Area) in the CPU Unit. After writing
the settings, enable the settings by turning ON the power again, restarting the Unit, restarting
the communications port, or executing the CHANGE SERIAL PORT SETUP (STUP) instruction.
The following table shows the allocated DM Area words and settings.
The allocations and settings are the same for RS-232C and RS-422A.
m = 30000 + 100 unit number
Allocated DM Area words
Port 1
DM m
DM m + 1
DM m + 6

Port 2
DM m + 10
DM m + 11
DM m + 16

Write value

Settings

8200
1:N NT Link Mode
0000 to 0009 (See note 1.) Baud rate (normal)
000@
@: Largest unit number (1 to 7) of the
connected PTs. (See note 2.)
Note 1. Set the baud rate to a numeric value between 0000 to 0009 Hex. (The setting is the same for
any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex.)
2. When using a 1:N connection, set the value for @ to 1 or higher.

Reference When setting a 1:N NT Link in the CX-Programmer, set the baud rate to 38,400 bps.

4-14

4-2 1:N Host Connection

Setting the Front Panel Switches

Display indicators
Terminating resistance switch (TERM)
Unit number setting switch
Set a value between 0 and F that is not the same as
these used by other Units in the system.
Two-wire/four-wire switch (WIRE)
For RS-422A: Set to 4 for four-wire operation (right position).
Port 1
RS-422A/485

Port 2
RS-232C

4-15

4-3 High-speed 1:N NT Link

4-3 High-speed 1:N NT Link

Supported Host Units
The OMRON PLCs that can be connected to high-speed 1:N NT Links using RS-232C are as
follows:
CS-series PLCs: CS1G/H-V1 and CS1G/H-H
CJ-series PLCs: CJ1G, CJ1G/H-H, and CJ1M
CS-series PLCs can also be connected in high-speed 1:N NT Links by using a CS1W-SCU21
Serial Communications Unit or CS1W-SCB21/41 Serial Communications Board. (CS-series
PLCs without a -V1 suffix can also be connected in high-speed 1:N NT Links if a Serial Communications Unit is used.) CJ-series PLCs can also be connected in high-speed 1:N NT Links
by using a CJ1W-SCU41 Serial Communications Unit.
The OMRON PLCs that can be connected in high-speed 1:N NT Links using RS-422A are as
follows:
CS-series PLCs: CS1G/H and CS1G/H-H
CJ-series PLCs: CJ1G/H-H, CJ1G, and CJ1M
CS-series PLCs can also be connected in high-speed 1:N NT Links by using a CS1W-SCB41
Serial Communications Board. (CS-series PLCs without -V1 suffix can also be connected in
high-speed 1:N NT Links if a Serial Communications Board is used.) CJ-series PLCs can
also be connected in high-speed 1:N NT Links by using a CJ1W-SCU31/41 Serial
Communications Unit.
Check the series and model of the PLC and the model of the Board or Unit that are mounted
to the PLC when connecting the PT to the host. For details on the PLCs that can be connected, refer to Appendix 8 Standard Models.

4-16

4-3 High-speed 1:N NT Link

4-3-1

Unit Setting Methods

The methods for setting each Unit are as follows:

Connecting to CS-series CPU Units

CS-series CPU Units:
CS1G/H-CPU@@-EV1/CS1G/H-CPU@@H
PLC Setup Area

Using RS-232C
When connecting the PT to a CS-series CPU Unit, set the communications conditions in the
PLC Setup according to the communications port used, as follows:
Using Built-in RS-232C Port of CS1G/H or CS1G/H-H
Address
Write value
Settings
160
8200
1:N NT Link Mode
161
000A
Baud rate (high-speed)
166
000@
@: Largest unit number (1 to 7) of connected PTs. (See note.)
Note: To connect a single Unit in a 1:N connection, set the value for @ to 1 or higher.

For example, to connect PTs with unit numbers 0, and 2 to 5 to the built-in RS-232C port in
high-speed 1:N NT Links, set address 160 to 8200 Hex, address 161 to 000A Hex, and address 166 to 0005 Hex.
Set whether the PLC Setup is set directly from the Programming Device (Programming Console) or created by the Support Software (CX-Programmer) and transferred to the CPU Unit.
Refer to the SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Operation Manual (W339) for information on the PLC
Setup.
Reference To set high-speed 1:N NT Link communications from the CX-Programmer, set the baud
rate to 115,200 bps.

4-17

4-3 High-speed 1:N NT Link

Setting the Front Panel Switches

Using RS-232C
Set DIP switch pin 4 or 5 of the CPU Unit according to the port to which the PT is connected,
as follows:

Peripheral port
Mainly connected to a
Programming Device.

DIP switch (inside battery

compartment)
Turn ON pin 4 when connecting the
PT to the peripheral port (to use the
communications settings in the PLC
Setup).
Turn OFF pin 5 when connecting the
PT to the RS-232C port (to use the
communications settings in the PLC
Setup).

RS-232C port
Mainly connected to
an RS-232C device.
(Can be connected to
a computer running
the CX-Programmer.)

Connecting to CJ-series CPU Units

CJ-series CPU Units:
CJ1G-CPU@@/CJ1G/H-H/CJ1M
PLC Setup Area

Using RS-232C
When connecting the PT to a CJ-series CPU Unit, set the communications conditions in the
PLC Setup according to the communications port used, as follows:
Using the CJ1G/H-H, CJ1G, or CJ1M, Built-in RS-232C Port
Address
Write value
Settings
160
8200
1:N NT Link Mode
161
000A
Baud rate (high-speed)
166
000@
@: Largest unit number (1 to 7) of connected PTs. (See note.)
Note: When connecting a single Unit in a 1:N connection, set the value of @ to 1 or higher.

For example, to connect PTs with unit numbers 0, and 2 to 5 to the built-in RS-232C port in
1:N NT Links, set address 160 to 8200 Hex and address 166 to 0005 Hex.
Set whether the PLC Setup is to be set directly from the Programming Device (Programming
Console) or created by the Support Software (CX-Programmer) and transferred to the CPU
Unit.
Refer to the SYSMAC CJ Series Operation Guide (W393) for information on the PLC Setup.

4-18

4-3 High-speed 1:N NT Link

Reference To set high-speed 1:N NT Link communications from the CX-Programmer, set the baud
rate to 115,200 bps.

Setting the Front Panel Switches

Using RS-232C
Set DIP switch pin 4 or 5 of the CPU Unit according to the port to which the PT is connected,
as follows:

DIP switch (inside battery compartment)

Turn ON pin 4 when connecting the PT to
the peripheral port (to use the communications
settings in the PLC Setup).
Turn OFF pin 5 when connecting the PT to
the RS-232C port (to use the communications
settings in the PLC Setup).
Peripheral port
Connected to a Programming
Console or other device.
RS-232C port
Connected to a Programming C
onsole or other device.

4-19

4-3 High-speed 1:N NT Link

Connecting to CS-series Serial Communications Boards

Serial Communications Boards with RS-232C Port for Use with CS-series CPU Units:
CS1W-SCB21 (Both ports 1 and 2 are RS-232C ports.)
CS1W-SCB41 (Port 1 is an RS-232C port and Port 2 is an RS-422A port.)
Reference High-speed 1:N NT Links can be used with Serial Communications Boards and Serial
Communications Units from lot numbers 991220 (December 20, 1999) or later. Boards
and Units with earlier lot numbers cannot be used, so confirm that the lot number is supported.

CPU Unit DM Area Settings

Write the settings directly from the Programming Device (Programming Console) or Support
Software (CX-Programmer) to the DM Area (Parameter Area) in the CPU Unit. After writing
the settings, enable the settings by turning ON the power again, restarting the Unit, restarting
the communications port, or executing the CHANGE SERIAL PORT SETUP (STUP) instruction.
The following table shows the allocated DM Area words and settings. The settings are the
same for RS-232C and RS-422A (CS1W-SCB41 Port 2).
Allocated DM Area words
Port 1
DM32000
DM32001
DM32006

Port 2
DM32010
DM32011
DM32016

Write
value

Settings

8200
000A
000@

1:N NT Link Mode

Baud rate (high-speed)
@: Largest unit number (1 to 7) of the connected PTs. (See
note.)
Note: When connecting a single Unit in a 1:N connection, set the value of @ to 1 or higher.

For example, to connect PTs with unit numbers 3 to 6 to Port 1 in 1:N NT Links, set DM32000
to 8200 Hex, DM32001 to 000A Hex, and DM32006 to 0006 Hex.
Serial Communications Boards with RS-422A Port for Use with CS-series CPU Units:
CS1W-SCB41 (Port 2 is an RS-422A port.)
Reference To set high-speed 1:N NT Link communications from the CX-Programmer, set the baud
rate to 115,200 bps.

4-20

4-3 High-speed 1:N NT Link

Setting the Front Panel Switches

Using RS-422A

Port 1
RS-232C
Terminating resistance switch (TERM)
Set to ON:
Terminating resistance used
(right position)

Two-wire/four-wire switch (WIRE)

For RS-422A:
Set to 4 for four-wire (right position).

Port 2
RS-422A

Connecting to CS-series Serial Communications Units

CS-series Rack-mounted Type:
CS1W-SCU21
CS1W-SCU31
Reference High-speed 1:N NT Links can be used with Serial Communications Boards and Serial
Communications Units from lot numbers 991220 (December 20, 1999) or later. Boards
and Units with earlier lot numbers cannot be used, so confirm that the lot number is
supported.

CPU Unit DM Area Settings

Write the settings directly from the Programming Device (Programming Console) or Support
Software (CX-Programmer) to the DM Area (Parameter Area) in the CPU Unit. After writing
the settings, enable the settings by turning ON the power again, restarting the Unit, restarting
the communications port, or executing the CHANGE SERIAL PORT SETUP (STUP) instruction.
The following table shows the allocated DM Area words and settings.
Using RS-232C
m = 30000 + 100 unit number
Allocated DM Area words
Port 1
DM m
DM m + 1
DM m + 6

Port 2
DM m + 10
DM m + 11
DM m + 16

Write value

Settings

8200
000A
000@

1:N NT Link Mode

Baud rate (high-speed)
@: Largest unit number (1 to 7) of the connected
PTs. (See note.)
Note: When connecting a single Unit in a 1:N connection, set the value of @ to 1 or higher.

Reference To set high-speed 1:N NT Link communications from the CX-Programmer, set the baud
rate to 115,200 bps.

4-21

4-3 High-speed 1:N NT Link

Setting the Front Panel Switches

Set the unit number of the Serial Communications Unit with the rotary switches on the front of
the Unit. Use a flat-blade screwdriver to set the numerals and symbols of the switch's setting
display window, as follows:

Unit number setting

Set a value between 0 and F that is different from
that of any other Units in the system.

Connecting to CJ-series Serial Communications Units

CJ-series Units:
CJ1W-SCU41 (Port 1 is an RS-422A port and Port 2 is an RS-232C port.)
CJ1W-SCU31 (Both ports 1 and 2 are RS-422A ports.)
CPU Unit DM Area Settings
Write the settings directly from the Programming Device (Programming Console or CXProgrammer) to the DM Area (Parameter Area) in the CPU Unit. After writing the settings, enable the settings by turning ON the power again, restarting the Unit, restarting the communications port, or executing the CHANGE SERIAL PORT SETUP (STUP) instruction.
The following table shows the allocated DM Area words and settings.
The allocations and settings are the same for RS-232C and RS-422A.
m = 30000 + 100 unit number
Allocated DM Area words
Port 1
DM m
DM m + 1
DM m + 6

Port 2
DM m + 10
DM m + 11
DM m + 16

Write value

Settings

8200
000A
000@

1:N NT Link Mode

Baud rate (high-speed)
@: Largest unit number (1 to 7) of the connected PTs. (See
note.)
Note: When connecting a single Unit in a 1:N connection, set the value of @ to 1 or higher.

Reference To set high-speed 1:N NT Link communications from the CX-Programmer, set the baud
rate to 115,200 bps.

4-22

4-3 High-speed 1:N NT Link

Setting the Front Panel Switches

Display indicators
Terminating resistance switch (TERM)
Unit number setting switch
Set a value between 0 and F that is not the same as
these used by other Units in the system.
Two-wire/four-wire switch (WIRE)
For RS-422A: Set to 4 for four-wire operation (right position).
Port 1
RS-422A/485

Port 2
RS-232C

4-23

4-4 Recommended Connector Cables

4-4 Recommended Connector Cables

Always use recommended connectors, connector hoods, and cables, where possible, when
making connector cables. Depending on the Unit, a connector and connector hood may be
included with the Unit.
Check the required components before preparing them.
Name

Model

XM2A-0901

9-pin type
made by OMRON.

XM2A-2501

25-pin type
made by OMRON.

XM2S-0911

9-pin type
made by OMRON.
(mm screws)

Connector

Connector
Hood

XM2S-0911-E
XM2S-0913
XM2S-2511
AWG28 5P
IFVV-SB
CO-MA-VV-SB
5P 28AWG

Cable

Note

Units with the connectors and

connector hoods included.
CS/CJ Series
C-series CQM1 and C200HS
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)
CVM1/CV-series CPU Units
CV500-LK201
CV500-LK201
C200H-LK201-V1
C-series CQM1 and C200HS
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)
CVM1/CV-series CPU Units
CV500-LK201

Details

9-pin type
CS/CJ Series
made by OMRON.
9-pin type
made by OMRON.
(inch screws)
25-pin type
CV500-LK201
made by OMRON.
C200H-LK201-V1
Multiconductor shielded cable
made by Fujikura Densen, Ltd.
Multiconductor shielded cable
made by Hitachi Densen, Ltd.

The connectors tensile load is 30 N max. Do not subject the connectors to a load greater
than that specified.

OMRON Cables with Connectors

The following OMRON Cables with Connectors can be used.
Model
XW2Z-200T
XW2Z-500T
XW2Z-200T-2
XW2Z-200T-5

Cable length
2m
5m
2m
5m

Connector specifications
9-pin-to-9-pin
9-pin-to-CPM2C peripheral port

OMRON RS-232C/RS-422A Converter

Model
NS-AL002
CJ1W-CIF11

Connection method
Connects directly to
RS-232C port.
Connects directly to
RS-232C port.

Terminal block specifications

8-pole terminal block (1:N NT Link)
5-pole terminal block (1:N NT Link)

The connectors for the connecting cables are not included with the PT and must be purchased separately.

4-24

Section 5
Connecting to Host via Ethernet or
Controller Link
This section describes the methods for connecting the PT to the host using the PTs Ethernet
interface and the Controller Link Interface Unit.

5-1 Connecting to Host Via Ethernet....................................................................................... 5-2

5-1-1 Host Types and Settings ........................................................................................... 5-3
5-2 Connecting to the Host Using Controller Link................................................................ 5-15
5-2-1 What Is a Controller Link Network? ...................................................................... 5-15
5-2-2 Data Links .............................................................................................................. 5-16

5-1 Connecting to Host Via Ethernet

5-1 Connecting to Host Via Ethernet

To connect to the network using Ethernet, the network number, node number, and IP address
must be set. Use the CX-Designer to set the settings. For details, refer to System Settings
and Project Properties in the CX-Designers Online Help.
The following connection methods are possible when connecting via the Ethernet only.

Connecting PT Directly to the Host

Connect the PT to the host using twisted-pair cross cable.
PT

Host
Twisted-pair cross cable
10Base-T/100Base-T

Connecting PT to Host with a Hub

Multiple PTs and hosts can be connected using twisted-pair straight cable and a hub.
Hub
Twisted-pair
straight cable
10Base-T/100Base-T

PT 1

PT 2

Host 1

Host 2

Connecting PT and Host Using Transceivers

PTs can be connected in a 10Base-5 network configuration by using a hub and transceiver
that support 10Base-5.
Transceiver

Transceiver
Coaxial cable

Transceiver
cable

Terminator

10Base-5

Terminator

Hub
Twisted-pair
straight cable

Host 2

10Base-T/100Base-T

PT 1

PT 2

Devices Required for Network Configuration

The following additional devices are required to configure the network using the Ethernet and
must be purchased separately.
Always use products that conform to IEEE802.3 standards for all network configuration devices.

5-2

5-1 Connecting to Host Via Ethernet

Network configuration
device
Ethernet Unit
Hub
Twisted-pair cable

Coaxial cable

Transceiver
Transceiver cable
24-VDC power supply
Coaxial cable terminator
(terminating resistance)

Details
A Communications Unit for connecting the PLC to the Ethernet network.
A network device that serves as a central wiring point for multiple
terminals.
Cable consisting of four pairs of thin, copper wires twisted into a
cross cable or a straight cable. Twisted-pair cables are used for
10/100Base-T networks.
Cable consisting of a central conductor surrounded (in concentric
circles) by insulation and an external conductor of braided wire. This
cable is used for 10Base-5 networks.
A device that serves as an interface between the coaxial cable and
nodes.
Cable used to connect the transceiver to the nodes.
A 24-VDC external power supply for supplying power to the transceiver through the transceiver cable.
Connected to both ends of the coaxial cable.

Recommended Network Configuration Devices

The following products are recommended for configuring the network when an Ethernet Unit
is used.
Configuration
devices
Hub

Twistedpair
cable

Phoenix
Contact

100BaseTX

Fujikura

10Base-T

Fujikura

Connectors (Modular
plug)

5-1-1

Maker

Panduit Corp.

Model
FL SWITCH 5TX (5port switching hub)
Note: For FA environment
CTP45-LAN5
0.5 mm x 4P
Specifications: UTP
cable (unshielded
twisted-pair cable)
Category 5, 5e
CTP45-LAN5
0.5 mm x 4P
Specifications: UTP
cable (unshielded
twisted-pair cable)
Category 5, 5e
MP588-C

URL
http://www.phoenixcontact.com/jp

http://www.fujikura.co.jp/ie_e.html

http://www.panduit.com

Host Types and Settings

Units that are used for Ethernet communications vary according to the type and series of
OMRON PLC used.
When connecting an Ethernet Unit, check the series and type of the PLC that it will be connected to and the model of the Unit that is mounted to the PLC.
For details on the hosts that can be connected to NS-series PTs via the Ethernet, refer to Appendix 8 Standard Models.
The types of hosts that can be connected to NS-series PTs with the Ethernet and the host
settings are as follows:

5-3

5-1 Connecting to Host Via Ethernet

Host Settings

The following settings must be set at the host.

Item
Network number
Conversion table

Host Settings
1 to 127
Node number: 1 to 254
IP address: 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
1 to 65535, default is 9600.
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
(blank), 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
1 to 254
Define communications paths for FINS messages. Routing tables are
set from the CX-Programmer.

UDP port number

IP address
Subnet mask
Default gateway
IP proxy address
Node number
Routing tables

IP Address Configuration
The IP address is comprised of 32 bits of binary data, consisting of the net ID and host ID.
The net ID is the address that identifies the network, and the host ID is the ID that identifies
the host (node).
The IP address is divided into class A, B, and C. Select the address system from among the
classes according to the network configuration.

Class A

0 bits

23

31

Host ID (24 bits)

Net ID (7 bits)

15

31

Class B

1 0

Net ID (14 bits)

31

Class C

0 bits

Host ID (16 bits)

0 bits

1 1 0

Net ID (21 bits)

Host ID (8 bits)

The number of networks and hosts that can be identified depends on the class used.
Class
Class A
Class B
Class C

Number of networks
Small
Medium
Large

Number of hosts
24
2 2 max. (16,777,214 max.)
16
2 2 max. (65,534 max.)
8
2 2 max. (254 max.)

The IP address is a 32-bit value divided into four 8-bit fields. Each octet is expressed as a
decimal and is separated by a period.
Example: 10000010 00111010 00010001 00100000 130.58.17.32
Reference

Set the same net ID for all nodes in the same network.
The net ID of the IP address is the value that identifies the Ethernet network (IP network segment). The net ID is not the same as the network address used for FINS
communications.
The IP network segment is the logical network unit that is configured by the nodes
that have the same net ID.

5-4

5-1 Connecting to Host Via Ethernet

IP Address Allocation
The IP addresses are allocated so that they are unique for each node in the network (or between two or more networks). If two or more nodes are allocated the same IP address, the
remote nodes with the same IP address will also malfunction.
IP (Internet Protocol) is a communications protocol that conforms to international standards.
Therefore, to connect to the Internet, always obtain IP addresses that have been allocated by
a public organization (i.e., the NIC in the country of use, such as the JPNIC in Japan). Using
IP addresses that are not recognized by the NIC (JPNIC) to connect to the Internet could
have unforeseen social consequences, such as causing the networks of another organizations to malfunction unexpectedly.
Local IP Address
The local IP address indicates the IP address of the Ethernet Unit that is used to set the settings.
The following IP address settings are not possible.
Net ID with all bits set to 0 or 1.
Host ID with all bits set to 0 or 1.
Subnet ID with all bits set to 1.
IP addresses that begin with 127 (7F Hex) (e.g., 127.35.21.16).
Subnet Mask
When more than one node is connected to the network, network operation and management
can be difficult. Therefore, for convenience, configure the system by dividing a single network
into multiple sub-networks. The system operates internally as multiple networks, but externally appears as a single network.
To operate a system in this way, divide the host ID field of the IP address into a subnet ID
field and a host ID field.
The subnet ID field is identified by the information in the subnet mask. The subnet mask is a
bit mask in which the net ID and subnet ID fields are 1 and the host ID field is 0.
Example: 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 FFFFFF00
The subnet mask must have a value that is common to all nodes on the same sub-network.
Setting the subnet mask is not required if sub-networks are not used. The system recognizes
subnet masks without a subnet ID field (i.e., subnet masks with net ID and host ID fields only).

5-5

5-1 Connecting to Host Via Ethernet

Address Conversion (when Using FINS Communications Service Only)

When using the FINS communications service, nodes must be specified following the FINS
addressing system. Data that is transmitted on the Ethernet network using FINS communications, however, must follow the IP address format. Address conversion changes the FINS address to an IP address.
Ethernet Unit

Ethernet Unit
IP address:
153.211.32.114
Node number: 23

CS1-series
CPU Unit

User program
Network address: 5
Node number: 23
Data

Data

Number
converted
153.211.32.114

To 153.211.32.114

There are three methods for converting addresses, as follows:

Automatic generation method (default address conversion)

IP address table method
IP table + automatic generation method
All of these address conversion methods are performed from the system settings using the
Support Software (CX-Programmer, SYSMAC-CPT, SYSMAC Support Software, or CV Port
Software Ver.2 or later). The details for each method are explained below. Refer to the SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Ethernet Unit Operation Manual (W343) and the SYSMAC CVM1/CV Series Ethernet Unit Operation Manual (W242) for details on setting methods.
Automatic Generation Method
The automatic generation method uses the FINS node number without modification as the
host ID of the IP address. The net ID of the local IP address is used as the net ID.
Automatic generation uses the following type of remote IP address configured from the local
IP address, subnet mask, and remote node number (FINS node number).
Remote IP address = (Local IP Address AND subnet mask)
OR remote node number

Automatic Generation Characteristics

Automatic generation has the advantage of easily understandable handling of FINS addresses and IP addresses. This method, however, does have the following limitations.
1. This method is applicable for addresses with the same net ID only.
2. The remote host ID is restricted to the range of FINS node numbers (1 to 126) (See
note.).
3. The Ethernet Units host ID and node number must be set to the same value.
Automatic generation is set as the default address conversion method, so it does not
need to be set from the CX-Programmer.
Note: Up to 98 hosts can be set on the CX-Designer.

5-6

5-1 Connecting to Host Via Ethernet

IP Address Table Method

Whereas the automatic generation method obtains the IP address from the FINS node number, the IP address table method converts the FINS node number to the IP address based on
a preset conversion table (IP address table).
The IP address table is configured from the system settings using Support Software (CXProgrammer, SYSMAC-CPT, SYSMAC Support Software, or CV Support Software Ver.2 or
later). Refer to the SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Ethernet Unit Operation Manual (W343) and SYSMAC CVM1/CV Series Ethernet Unit Operation Manual (W242) for details on setting methods.
Nodes that have different net IDs for different segments can also be registered.
IP address table
FINS node
number
18
20
23

FINS node number

20

IP address
153.214.0.62
153.214.0.129
153.218.51.8

IP address
153.214.0.129

IP Address Table Method Characteristics

The IP address table method simply prepares a conversion table, offering the advantage of
allowing the correspondence between FINS node numbers and IP addresses to be created
freely.
This method is, however, subject to restrictions. The IP address table allows registration of up
to 32 corresponding addresses only, so no more than 32 nodes, including the local node, can
be registered. If there is no correspondence, the remote FINS node number is not recognized.
IP Table + Automatic Generation Method
This method combines automatic generation and the IP address table method.
First refer to the IP address table, and if the required FINS address is included in the table,
read the corresponding IP address. If the required FINS address is not included, calculate the
IP address using the automatic generation method.
FINS node address
IP address table

When included in
IP address table

When not
included in IP
address table

FINS node
number
18

153.214.0.62

20
23

153.214.0.129
153.218.51.8

IP address

Net ID:

IP address

XX.XX.00.00
IP address

+
FINS node number:

XX

Setting Routing Tables

Routing tables define the communications path between the local node and the network containing the destination node. Routing tables are required to perform network communications.
Routing tables consist of local network tables and remote network tables.
Local Network Tables
A local network tables contains the unit number and network address for every Communications Unit mounted at a node. If there is more than one Communications Unit at a node, each
Unit will contain a local network table.

5-7

5-1 Connecting to Host Via Ethernet

Unit number 04
Unit number 02 Local network table
Local network
address

Unit number

Network 2
Network 3

Remote Network Table

The remote network table provides the node and network address corresponding to the initial
relay point (first point the data must pass) en route to a target network (end network) not directly connected to the local PLC. The table specifies the route from the relay point to the end
network.

Node 1

Node 2

PT at local
node

Node 3

Network 1
Relay Network Table for Local PT
Destination
network
address

Relay
network
address

Node 2

Relay PLC
Node 1 Relay PLC
(a)
(b)

Gateway
node
address

Network 2

Destination
network
address

Relay
network
address

Gateway
node
address

Meaning: To go to network 3,
first go to node 2 of network 2.

Desti- Node 2
nation

Network 3
Relay Network Table for Destination

Relay Network Table for PLC (b)

Relay Network Table for PLC (a)

Meaning: To go to network 3,
first go to node 3 of network 1.

Node 1

Destination
network
address

Relay
network
address

Gateway
node
address

Meaning: To go to network 1,
first go to node 1 of network 2.

Destination
network
address

Relay
network
address

Gateway
node
address

Meaning: To go to network 1,
first go to node 1 of network 3.

Routing tables are created using the CX-Programmer and then transferred to the host. Refer
to the CX-Programmer User Manual for actual procedures.
The methods for setting each Unit are described next.

CS-series PLCs
Note

Always turn OFF the power to the PLC before setting the rotary switches.
Create I/O tables for the CPU Unit when setting the unit number for the first time or changing settings.

CS1G/CS1H and CS1G/CS1H-H Ethernet Units:

CS1W-ETN01
CS1W-ETN11
CS1W-ETN21

5-8

5-1 Connecting to Host Via Ethernet

Setting the Front Panel Switches

Setting Unit Numbers
Always set the unit numbers so that the unit numbers of other CPU Bus Units mounted to the
CPU Unit are all unique.
Use a small screwdriver to set the rotary switches, being careful not to damage them.
The factory setting is 0.
Setting range
0 to F

Setting Node Numbers

Setting range
01 to 7E (1 to 126 decimal)

Set the upper digit using the left rotary switch and the lower digit using the right rotary switch.
The factory setting is 01.
When converting addresses using the automatic generation method, set the node number to
the same value as that set for SW7 and SW8 of the local IP address setting switches, which
are described on the following pages. If the same values cannot be set, the IP address table
method or IP table + automatic generation method must be used to convert the addresses.
Setting the Rear Panel Switches
Setting Local IP Addresses
Set the local IP address for the Ethernet Unit using the eight hexadecimal rotary switches (local IP address setting switches), expressing each 4-bit value as a single hexadecimal digit.
Set the IP address as a hexadecimal using the eight switches combining SW1 and SW2,
SW3 and SW4, SW5 and SW6, and SW7 and SW8, as shown in the following diagram.
Setting range for each switch
0 to F

Local IP address

5-9

5-1 Connecting to Host Via Ethernet

Example: Setting130.58.17.32 (Decimal)

This address will be 82.3A.11.20 in hexadecimal, so the switch would be set as shown in the
following table.
SW1
8

Switch Setting

SW2
2

SW3
3

SW4
A

SW5
1

SW6
1

SW7
2

SW8
0

Local IP address in
hexadecimal

82

3A

11

20

Local IP address in
decimal

130

58

17

32

Reference When using automatic generation (default method) for converting addresses, set the
same value for the node number as that set for SW7 and SW8, and set the other host
ID fields to 0. The ERC indicator will flash if the value of the IP address host ID does
not correspond to the node number value.
Set the subnet mask in the CPU Bus Unit Setup Area using the CX-Programmer.

Ethernet Connectors
CS1W-ETN01
This is the connector used to connect the transceiver cable to the Ethernet.

Electrical characteristics:

Conforms to IEEE802.3 standards.

Lock structure:

Conforms to IEEE802.3 standards for Slide latches.

Connector Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6

7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Hood

5-10

Signal name
Signal ground
Collision detection signal +
Send data +
Signal ground
Receive data +
Voltage common
Power ground (common
with signal ground)
Not used.
Signal ground
Collision detection signal
Send data
Signal ground
Receive data
Transceiver power
Signal ground
Not used.
Frame ground

Abbreviation

Signal direction

GND
COL+
TX+
GND
RX+
VC

Input
Output

Input

GND
COL
TX
GND
RX
VP
GND

FG

Input
Output

Input

5-1 Connecting to Host Via Ethernet

CS1W-ETN11
CS1W-ETN21
This is the connector used to connect the twisted-pair cable to the Ethernet.

Electrical characteristics: Conforms to IEEE802.3 standards.

Connector structure: RJ45 8-pin modular connector (conforms to ISO8877).

Connector Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Signal name
Send data +
Send data
Receive data +
Not used.
Not used.
Receive data
Not used.
Not used.

Abbreviation

Signal direction

TD+
TD
RD+

RD

Output
Output
Input

Input

CJ-series PLCs
Note

Always turn OFF the power to the PLC before setting the rotary switches.
Create I/O tables for the CPU Unit when setting the unit number for the first time or
changing settings.

CJ-series Ethernet Units:

CJ1W-ETN11
CS1W-ETN21
Setting the Front Panel Switches
Setting Unit Numbers
Always set the unit numbers so that the unit numbers of other CPU Bus Units mounted to the
same CPU Unit are all unique.
Use a small screwdriver to set the rotary switches, being careful not to damage them.
The factory setting is 0.
Setting range
0 to F

Setting Node Numbers

Set the node numbers as hexadecimal values with the node number setting switch. Always
set the node numbers so that other Ethernet Units connected to the same Ethernet network
all have unique addresses. As long as the addresses are unique, they can be set between 01
and 7E (1 to 126 decimal).
Setting range
01 to 7E (1 to 126 decimal)

5-11

5-1 Connecting to Host Via Ethernet

Set the upper digit using the top rotary switch and the lower digit using the bottom rotary
switch.
The factory setting is 01.
When using automatic generation to convert addresses, set the node number to the same
value as that of the rightmost byte of the local IP address. If the same values cannot be set,
the IP address table method or combination method must be used to convert the addresses.
Setting Local IP Addresses
For CJ-series Ethernet Units, set the local IP address from the CX-Programmer or other
Support Software for the CPU Unit. Refer to the SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Ethernet Unit Operation Manual (W343) for details on setting methods.
CJ1W-ETN11
CS1W-ETN21
This is the connector used to connect the twisted-pair cable to the Ethernet.

Electrical Characteristics: Conforms to IEEE802.3 standards.

Connector Layout: RJ45 8-pin modular connector (conforms to ISO8877).
1

Connector Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Signal name
Send data
Send data
Receive data +
Not used.
Not used.
Receive data
Not used.
Not used.

Abbreviation
TD+
TD
RD+

RD

Signal direction
Output
Output
Input

Input

CV/CVM1-series (-V@) PLCs

Unit for CV500-CPU01-V1, CV1000-CPU01-V1, CV2000-CPU01-V1, CVM1-CPU01-V2,
CVM1-CPU11-V2, and CVM1-CPU21-V2 CPU Units:
CV500-ETN01
Setting Rotary Switches
Set the unit number and node number with the two rotary switches on the front of the Unit.
Switch Layout
The layout of the two switches is shown in the following diagram.

5-12

5-1 Connecting to Host Via Ethernet

Set the unit number using SW1 and SW2. Set the unit number so that it is different from
other CPU Bus Units in the system.
Set the node number using SW3 and SW4.
Setting Range
Each switch can be set within the following range.
Settings
Unit number (SW1, SW2)
Node number (SW3, SW4)

Setting range
00 to 15 (decimal)
01 to 7E hexadecimal (1 to 126 decimal)

Setting Unit Numbers

The unit number is used to identify each Unit when multiple CPU Bus Units are mounted to
the CPU Unit.
Use the left switch (SW1) to set the tens digit, and the right switch (SW2) to set the ones
digit. Set between 00 and 15 decimal.
Setting Example
This example is for unit number 12.

Reference

The unit number cannot be set to a value more than 15. If the unit number is set to a
value higher than 15, the ERH indicator in the display will light.
When more than one CPU Bus Unit is mounted to a single PLC, set each Unit with a
unique unit number.

Setting Node Numbers

The node number is used to identify PLCs when more than one PLC is connected to the
Ethernet. This setting is the node number used for FINS communications.
Use the left switch (SW3) to set the left digit as a hexadecimal, and the right switch (SW4) to
set the right digit. The setting range is 01 to 7E hexadecimal (1 to 126 decimal).
Setting Example:
This example is for node number 29 (decimal).
29 = 1 16 + 13 = 1D (hexadecimal)

5-13

5-1 Connecting to Host Via Ethernet

Reference

The node number cannot be set to a value higher than 7E (126 decimal). If the node
number is set to a higher value, an error will occur and the ERH indicator in the display will light.
Set the node numbers so that all the nodes in the same network are unique.

Setting IP Addresses for Ethernet Units

The IP address must also be set for Ethernet Units. Ethernet communications are not possible if the IP address of the Ethernet Unit is not set.
Set the IP address for the Ethernet Unit from the CPU Bus Unit Setup Area using Programming Devices (SYSMAC-CPT, SYSMAC Support Software, CV Support Software Ver. 2 or
later, FIT20-MF501-V2, FIT10-MF501-V2, FIT20-MC601, or FIT20-MC701). Refer to the
SYSMAC CVM1/CV Series Ethernet Unit Operation Manual (W242) for details on setting
methods.
Ethernet Unit System
Set the system settings for the Ethernet Unit to operate on the Ethernet network as a node.
Set the system settings using a Programming Device (SYSMAC-CPT, SYSMAC Support
Software, CV Support Software Ver.2 or later, FIT20-MF501-V2 FIT10-MF501-V2, FIT20MC601, or FIT20-MC701).
Reference

For details on operating the Support Software, refer to the CPU Bus Unit Setup Area
in the SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manual: Networks (W201) and SYSMAC
Support Software Operation Manual: CV Series (W249).
Turn ON the power to the CPU Unit again after setting the system settings. The system settings are not enabled after setting them until the power has been turned ON
again.

5-14

5-2 Connecting to the Host Using Controller Link

5-2 Connecting to the Host Using Controller Link

This section explains the method for connecting to the host using a Controller Link Interface
Unit.

5-2-1

What Is a Controller Link Network?

A Controller Link Network is an FA Network that can send and receive large data packets
flexibly and easily among the OMRON C200HX/HG/HE PLC Programmable Terminal (PTs),
SYSMAC CS-series PLCs, CJ-series PLCs, CQM1H-series PLCs, C200HX/HG/HE PLCs,
CVM1/CV-series PLCs, IBM PC/AT or compatible computers, and NS-series PTs. The Controller Link supports data links that enable data sharing and a message service that enables
sending data and receiving data when required. Data link areas can be freely set to create a
flexible data link system and effectively use data areas.
The network is connected using shielded twisted-pair cable or optical fiber cable. In addition,
the Controller Link Network can transfer large quantities of data at high speed, so that it is
possible to construct a wide-area network easily that supports from low-level systems to high.
For details on data links and message service, refer to the Controller Link Support Board Operation Manual (W307), Controller Link Support Board for PCI Bus Operation Manual (W383),
and the Controller Link Unit Operation Manual (W309).
Note: An optical fiber cable is not available for NS-series PTs.

CJ1W-CLK21
Controller Link Unit
PLC, SYSMAC
CJ Series

NS-CLK21
Controller Link
IBM PC/AT or
CVM1-CLK21
CS1W-CLK21
C200HW-CLK21
Interface Unit
compatible
Controller
NS Series
Controller Link Unit Controller Link Unit
Link Unit
NS12-TS@
PLC, SYSMAC
PLC, SYSMAC
PLC, SYSMAC
NT10-TV@
CVM1/CV Series
CS Series
C200HX/HG/HE

CQ1H-CLK21
Controller Link Unit

PLC, SYSMAC
CQM1H Series

3G8F5-CLK21
Controller Link
Support Board

FC98 personal
Personal computer
computer

3G8F7-CLK21
Controller Link
Support Board

3G8F6-CLK21
Controller Link
Support Board

To connect the PT to the Controller Link, it is necessary to install a Controller Link Interface
Unit on the PT. Refer to 3-8 Installing the Controller Link Interface Unit for the procedure for
installing and wire the Controller Link Interface Unit.
When communicating by Controller Link, the network number, node number, routing tables,
and data link tables must be set. Use the CX-Designer to set the settings. For details, refer to
System Settings and Project Properties in the CX-Designers Online Help.
Required Devices

To construct a Controller Link Network, the devices described in the following table are required.

5-15

5-2 Connecting to the Host Using Controller Link

Device
Controller Link Unit
(See note.)

Controller Link Support Board (ISA

Bus/PC98)
Controller Link Support Board (PCI Bus)
Twisted-pair Cable

Model
CVM1-CLK21
C200HW-CLK21
CS1W-CLK21
CQM1H-CLK21
CJ1W-CLK21
3G8F5-CLK21
3G8F6-CLK21
3G8F7-CLK21

Remarks
Required to connect PLC with
Controller Link Network.

Required to connect IBM

PC/AT or compatible computers with Controller Link
Network.

Required to connect the PT,

PLC, and IBM PC/AT or compatible computers. Use
shielded twisted-pair cable.
Controller Link Wired
CJ1W-TB101
Used as a relay terminal block
Relay Terminal Block
for wires and can be used as
required to facilitate replacement and maintenance of
Controller Link Units and
Boards after the communications system has been started.
Note: For details on the CPU Units that support connection to Controller Link Units, refer to Appendix
8 Standard Models.

5-2-2

ESVC0.52C

Data Links
This section outlines data links and the method of setting data link tables when using data
links. For details, refer to the Controller Link Support Board Operation Manual (W307), Controller Link Unit Operation Manual (W309), and the Controller Link Support Board for PCI Bus
Operation Manual (W383).

What Are Data Links?

Data links automatically exchange preset data between nodes (i.e., between PLCs, between
a PLC and an IBM PC/AT or compatible computer, or between a PLC and an NS-series PT).
Data links can be freely created for CS-series PLCs, C200HX/HG/HE PLCs, CVM1, CVseries PLCs, CJ-series PLCs, CQM1H-series PLCs, and NS-series PTs.
Two data link areas, area 1 and area 2, can be set for each node. Data links can be set in either of the following ways.

Data link areas can be set by inputting data link tables through the Controller Link Support
Software. Data link tables are created to define the data links. These tables enable free allocation of data link areas.
Data links can be set automatically from a Programming Device. With automatically set data
links, all link areas are the same size.
Automatic setting and manual setting cannot be used together in the same network.
The following rules apply to these methods of setting data links.
1. Data links are enables concurrently for area 1 and area 2.
2. Separate settings (data link start words and send area size) are made in area 1 and area
2. The sequences of send and receive words are the same in area 1 and area 2.
3. Not all nodes must participate in the data links.

5-16

5-2 Connecting to the Host Using Controller Link

Example 1: The order of send

and receive nodes is free.

Example 2: Some nodes can

send data without receiving data.

Area 1

Area 1

Sending only

Area 2

Area 2

Example 3: Some nodes can

receive data without sending
data.

Area 1

Example 4: A node can receive a

specified number of words from
the beginning of an area.

Area 1
Several words
from the
beginning

Receiving only
Area 2

Area 2
Receiving only

5-17

5-2 Connecting to the Host Using Controller Link

Setting Data Link Tables

To perform data links, data link tables are required. Set data link tables by following the steps
below.
1. Set data link tables using the CX-Net (Network Configurations Tool).
Data link tables are created to define data links. These tables must be set for each node
participating in data links. Refer to the manual for CX-Programmer for the method of setting.
The following table shows the items and setting range for data link tables in the Controller
Link Support Board mounted on the PT.
Setting item
PT Model
Node

Setting range
Set as a "NSB."
1 to 32
Set the address of the refresh nodes.
First data link status If a number is set, it will be invalid because the first word to store data link
word
status is fixed.
Set -.
Area1 Data link
$B0 to $B32767
start word $W0 to $W24575
(See note.) Use CIO for $B and D for $W in the CX-Net.
The same area cannot be set for both area 1 and area 2. Set different areas.
Number of Remote nodes: 0 to the number of source words
words
Set the number of words to be received
Local nodes:
0 to 1000
Set the number of words to be transmitted
The total number of words in area 1 and area 2 in each node must not exceed
1,000.
The number of words in both area 1 and area 2 in each node must not be set
to 0.
Offset
Remote nodes: 0 to one less than number of source words
Set offset for data to be received

Area2

5-18

Local nodes:
Cannot be set.
This setting is not required if an offset is not used.
Data link
$B0 to $B32767
start word $W0 to $W24575
(See note.) Use CIO for $B and D for $W in the CX-Net.
The same area cannot be set for both area 1 and area 2. Set different areas.
Number of Remote nodes: 0 to the number of source words
words
Set the number of words to be received
Local nodes:
0 to 1000
Set the number of words to be transmitted
The total number of words in area 1 and area 2 in each node must not exceed
1,000.
The number of words in both area 1 and area 2 in each node must not be set
to 0.
Offset
Remote nodes: 0 to one less than number of source words
Set offset for data to be received
Local nodes:
Cannot be set.
This setting is not required if an offset is not used.

5-2 Connecting to the Host Using Controller Link

Note

The following examples show how to change CIO and D addresses to $B and $W addresses.
1. Changing to $B addresses:
$B address = Word in CIO address (0 to 2047) 16 + Bit in CIO address (00 to 15)
Example: If the CIO address is 00100.04, $B address = 100 16 + 4 = $B1604.
Word Bit
2. Changing to $W addresses:
$W address = D address (0 to 24575)
Example: If the D address is D00100, $W address = $W100.
The total number of words set in area 1 and area 2 must not exceed 32,000.
Always delete the data link tables if the node does not participate in data links.

Save the data link tables after setting the above items.
2. Set data link tables for the PT side on the CX-Designer
The two setting methods below can be used. Use the appropriate method for the application.
1) Specifying data link tables with CX-Designer:
If the data link tables are set from the CX-Designer, then they cannot be changed via
a network. Even if they are temporarily changed from the CX-Server or Controller Link
Support Software, they will return to the tables set from the CX-Designer the next time
the PT is started. To change the data link tables when they have been set from the
CX-Designer, it is necessary to retransfer the project or setting file to the PT.
Select PT Communication Setting Controller Link in the CX-Designer and
specify the data link tables created in step 1. For details on specifying the data link tables settings file, refer to System Settings and Project Properties in the CX-Designers
Online Help.
2) Setting data link tables across a network:
To do so, transfer the data link tables in the Controller Link Interface Unit from the CXServer or Controller Link Support Software, and do not specify data link tables from
the CX-Designer. If data link tables are set via a network, then they can later be
changed via a network as required. For details on the transfer method, refer to the CXNet Operation Manual (W361) and the Controller Link Support Software Operation
Manual (W369).
3. Transfer the project created on CX-Designer to the PT.

Starting and Stopping Data Links

The PT starts and stops data links according to the status of the data links when participating
in the network. If the data links are started when entering the network, the PT will start its
data links. If network has stopped data links, the PT will not start data links. The PT cannot
control starting/stopping data links independently. Control starting/stopping data links on the
Controller Link network using the startup node or CX-Server.
Note

The data link mode (manual setting or automatic setting) and data link method are determined according to the data link setting in the startup node. In the startup node, set the
data link tables if manual settings are being used and data link automatic setting parameters if automatic settings are being used. If the settings are incorrect, the data links will not
start.

5-19

5-2 Connecting to the Host Using Controller Link

Caution
Check the following items before starting data links.
1. Manually Set Data Links
Check the data link tables in each node participating in
the data link to see that they are correct. Be sure that
data link tables are deleted from nodes that are not participating in the data links.
2. Automatically Set data Links
Be sure that the correct DM parameters have been set
in the data link startup node.
If incorrect data link tables or parameters are set, injury may
result due to unexpected operation of the system.
Even if the correct data link tables or parameters have been
set, do not start or stop data links before verifying that there
will be no adverse influence on the system.

Setting Routing Tables

Routine tables that define the communications path from the local node to the network connected to the destination. Routine tables must be set for the following items.

Local node
All relay nodes that are included for the communication path from local node to the destination.
Make settings for routing tables on the CX-Designer. For details on setting routing tables, refer to System Settings and Project Properties in the CX-Designers Online Help.
For details on setting routing tables for the PLC, refer to Section 7 System Settings in the CXDesigner Operation Manual.

5-20

5-2 Connecting to the Host Using Controller Link

Troubleshooting Using Indicators

The errors indicated by indicators on the Controller Interface Unit and remedies are explained
in this section.
Indicators

RUN: Operating
ERC: Communications error
ERH: EEPROM Error
INS: Network participation
LNK: Data link

Troubleshooting with RUN, ERC, ERH, and INS Indicators

The RUN, ERC, ERH, and INS indicators can be used to check whether the Controller Link
Interface Unit and network participation are operating normally.
Note

Always turn OFF the power to the PT before performing any of the following operations.
Connecting/Disconnecting a Board or a connector.
Securing a Board or a connector.
Setting hardware switches.

Indicators
Probable cause
Remedy
RUN ERC ERH INS
Lit
Not lit Not lit Lit
The Unit operating normally.

Network participation normal.

Not lit Lit

Controller Link Interface Unit is If ERC indicator lights even after

faulty.
mounting on another PT, replace the
Controller Link Interface Unit
Not lit Not lit Not lit Not lit Power is not being supplied to Check the power supply voltage and
PT normally.
supply at the recommended voltage.
The Controller Link Interface
Secure the Controller Link Interface
Unit has become loose.
Unit firmly.
Controller Link Interface Unit is Refer to 3-8 Installing the Controller
mounted in the wrong slot.
Link Interface Unit, and mount the
Board correctly.
Controller Link Interface Unit is If indicators do not light when the
faulty.
Board is mounted on another PT, replace the Controller Link Interface Unit
Lit
Lit

Not lit The same node address is be- Reset so that each node address is
ing used in the same network. used only once within the same network.

5-21

5-2 Connecting to the Host Using Controller Link

Indicators

Probable cause

RUN ERC ERH INS

Lit

Lit

Routing table setting error.

Lit

5-22

Remedy

Remake and set the routing tables

correctly, referring to System Settings
and Project Properties in the CXDesigners Online Help.
When the routing tables are not being
used, delete the routing tables.
EEPROM error.
Send a FINS command to the Controller Link Interface Unit to read status,
correct the data where the error has
occurred, and reset the Board. If the
error occurs again, replace the
Controller Link Interface Unit.
Not lit Terminating resistance is not
Turn ON the terminating resistance at
set correctly.
the nodes at both ends of the network
and turn it OFF at all other nodes.
Cables are not connected cor- Check the cable connections and rerectly.
connect correctly.
The node address is larger than Either reset the maximum node adthe maximum node address set dress using Controller Link Support
for the network parameters.
Software or reset the node address to
below the maximum.
No other nodes exist.
Ensure that 2 or more nodes exist
within the Network.
No nodes have been set as
Set the polling node using the CXpolling node.
Server.
The set baud rate is different
Reset the baud rate for the Controller
from other nodes.
Link in the CX-Designers Communication Setting. For details on setting the
baud rate, refer to System Settings
and Project Properties in the CXDesigners Online Help.

5-2 Connecting to the Host Using Controller Link

Troubleshooting with LNK Indicator

- Data Links Cannot Be Started

The following table describes the LNK indicator and remedies when a data link cannot be
started.
Starting a data link depends on the Controller Link Interface Unit operating normally and participating in the network. Refer to Troubleshooting with RUN, ERC, ERH, and INS Indicators
earlier in this section and check operation before using the following table.
Indicator
LNK
Lit
Flashing

Not lit

Probable cause
Data link operating normally.
There is an error in the data link tables.

Remedy

If ERH or ERR indicator is lit, reset the

data link tables.
Create the data link tables for the startup
node using the CX-Server.

When manual setting is used, either data

link tables have not been created for the
startup node or there is an error in the
data link tables.
Manually set data links are already operat- Set data link tables for the local node.
ing on the same Network.
Automatically set data links are already
Stop the data links, review and set the
operating on the same Network.
parameters in the startup node's DM area,
and then restart.
The PT cannot be the startup node for
automatic settings. Settings must be performed at Controller Link Unit on the PLC.

- Node Cannot Participate in Data Links

The following table describes the LNK indicator and remedies when a Node cannot participate in the data links.
Data link participation in the network depends on the Controller Link Interface Unit operating
normally and participating in the network. Refer to Troubleshooting with RUN, ERC, ERH, and
INS Indicators earlier in this section and check operation before using the following table.
Indicator
LNK
Lit
Flashing
Not lit

Probable cause

Remedy

Data Link operating normally.

When manual setting is used, there is an
error in the data link table.
When manual setting is used, there are no
Data Link Tables set for the local node.
When automatic setting is used, the setup
node is not set to participate in the data
links.

Reset data link tables using the CXServer.

Set the data link tables for the local node.
Stop the data links, remake and set the
parameters in the Startup nodes DM
Area, and then restart the data links.
Setting must be performed at PLC on the
Controller Unit side, because the Controller Link Interface Unit cannot be the
startup node for automatic settings. For
details, refer to the Controller Link Units
Operation Manual.

5-23

Section 6
System Menu Operations
This section describes the methods for operating the System Menu.
This section also provides details on functions that are useful for NS-series PT applications and
for system maintenance.
6-1

Operating Modes and System Menu................................................................................ 6-3

6-1-1 Mode Configuration ................................................................................................. 6-3
6-1-2 System Menu Configuration..................................................................................... 6-3
6-1-3 Overview of Menu Items.......................................................................................... 6-4
6-1-4 Using the System Menu............................................................................................ 6-7

6-2

Initializing and Saving Data and Removing the Memory Card.........................................10

6-2-1 Screen Data Area Format ...........................................................................................11
6-2-2 Initializing or Saving the Alarm/Event History..........................................................12
6-2-3 Initializing and Saving Data Log................................................................................13
6-2-4 Initializing and Saving the Operation Log .................................................................14
6-2-5 Initializing and Saving the Error Log.........................................................................16
6-2-6 Language Selection ....................................................................................................17
6-2-7 Removing the Memory Card ......................................................................................18
6-2-8 Initializing Internal Holding Memories ($HB/$HW) .................................................19

6-3

PT Settings.........................................................................................................................20
6-3-1 Start-up Wait Time .....................................................................................................22
6-3-2 Screen Saver ...............................................................................................................22
6-3-3 Key Press Sound.........................................................................................................23
6-3-4 Buzzer Sound .............................................................................................................23
6-3-5 Backlight ....................................................................................................................24
6-3-6 Calendar Check ..........................................................................................................24
6-3-7 Printer Type................................................................................................................25
6-3-8 Printing Mode.............................................................................................................26
6-3-9 Orientation..................................................................................................................26
6-3-10 Changing Values in Device Monitor Setting..............................................................26
6-3-11 Contrast (NS5-SQ0@/NS5-MQ0@ Only) ..................................................................27

6-3-12 CJK Han Unification Priority .....................................................................................27

6-3-13 Alarm Monitor Registration Procedure ......................................................................27
6-4

Project Settings ..................................................................................................................28

6-4-1 Project Title ................................................................................................................28
6-4-2 Number of Labels.......................................................................................................29
6-4-3 Initial Screen...............................................................................................................29
6-4-4 Initial Label ................................................................................................................29
6-4-5 Alarm/Event History Recording Method ...................................................................29
6-4-6 Data Log Recording Method ......................................................................................29
6-4-7 Operation Log Recording Method..............................................................................30
6-4-8 Error Log Recording Method .....................................................................................30
6-4-9 System Memory .........................................................................................................30

6-5

Setting Passwords ..............................................................................................................31

6-5-1 Changing the Password ..............................................................................................31
6-5-2 Setting the Password Function ...................................................................................32

6-6

Communications Settings ..................................................................................................34

6-6-1 Communications Conditions ......................................................................................34
6-6-2 Setting 1:1 NT Link....................................................................................................36
6-6-3 Setting High-speed 1:N NT Links (Standard, High-speed)........................................36
6-6-4 Setting Ethernet ..........................................................................................................37
6-6-5 Setting the Controller Link Network ..........................................................................40
6-6-6 Setting Bar Code Readers...........................................................................................41
6-6-7 Modem Settings..........................................................................................................42

6-7

Screen Data Check.............................................................................................................43

6-8

Special Screens ..................................................................................................................44

6-8-1 Alarm History.............................................................................................................45
6-8-2 Operation Log ............................................................................................................46
6-8-3 Error Log ....................................................................................................................47
6-8-4 Device Monitor...........................................................................................................48
6-8-5 Communication Test ..................................................................................................50
6-8-6 Video Configuration...................................................................................................51
6-8-7 USB Device List.........................................................................................................53
6-8-8 Display Capture Data .................................................................................................54
6-8-9 Memory Card Transfers .............................................................................................55
6-8-10 External Application Startup ......................................................................................57
6-8-11 Version Display ..........................................................................................................57
6-8-12 PLC Data Trace (NS12, NS10, and NS8 Only)..........................................................58

6-9

Hardware Check ................................................................................................................60

6-9-1 LCD Check.................................................................................................................60
6-9-2 Touch Switch Check ..................................................................................................61

6-10 Starting Operations ............................................................................................................62

6-1 Operating Modes and System Menu

6-1 Operating Modes and System Menu

The System Menu can be used to set various PT settings by operating the touch switches on
the screen. The following diagram shows the menu configuration in the System Menu. Refer
to 6-1-4 Using the System Menu for details on System Menu operations.

6-1-1

Mode Configuration
The NS-series PTs have the following operating modes.
Mode

System Menu:

Displays the System Menu, and sets each of the settings for the PT.

RUN mode:

Displays screens, allows data input, and communicates with each device.

TRANSFER mode: Data transfer with

CX-Designer:
Memory Card transfer:
ERROR mode:

6-1-2

Uploads and downloads screen data and

system programs between the CX-Designer
(computer) and PT.
Uploads and downloads screen data and
system programs via the Memory Card.

Fatal error:

Stops processing (operating) and displays error message.

Non-fatal error:

Continues processing (operating) without displaying error message.

System Menu Configuration

The System Menu items and functions are as follows:
System Menu

Initialize:
Save:

Initializes or saves operation log, alarm/event histories, data log,

error log, and formats screen data, initializes internal holding
memories, provides a function to remove the Memory Card, and
sets the system language.

PT:

Sets the system startup waiting time, screen saver, key press
sound, buzzer, backlight, and calendar check. Also makes the
settings for the printer connected to the PT and the alarm monitor registration method.

Project:

Displays the project title, number of labels, history recording

method, and addresses allocated to the system memory. Displays and sets the screen numbers displayed at startup time.

Password:

Sets the password functions (including passwords with levels).

Also sets and changes passwords.

Comm:

Sets the communications conditions for serial ports A and B, a

modem (data transfer), Host Link, Ethernet, and Controller Link.

Data Check:

Checks the stored screen contents without communications.

Special Screen:

Displays the operation log, alarm history, error log, device monitor, communication test, version display, capture data, and PLC
data trace, and performs video configuration. Also lists devices
connected to the USB port.

Hardware Check:

Performs a hardware check, such as checking that the touch

panel is operating properly.

6-3

6-1 Operating Modes and System Menu

6-1-3

Overview of Menu Items

The following tables show the eight menu items and provide an overview of their contents.
1. Initialize Tab
Item
Screen Data Area
Alarm/Event History

Data Log

Operation Log

Error Log
Select language

Memory Card
Internal Holding Memory
($HB/$HW)

Function
Formats project data, such as screen data.
Initializes or saves in a CSV file in the Memory Card the
alarm/event history data that has been generated during operation.
Initializes or saves in a CSV file in the Memory Card the data log
data that registers changes to the contents of an address, or
saves in the Memory Card as a CSV file.
Initializes or saves in a CSV file in the Memory Card the operation
log data, such as that for functional object operations and screen
switching.
Initializes or saves in a CSV file in the Memory Card the error log
data that is generated by macro errors.
The language to display system menus, input keypads, error messages, etc., can be set to Japanese, English, Italian, Spanish,
French, German, or Chinese (traditional or simplified).
The Memory Card in the PT can be removed.
Initializes the Internal Holding Bit/Word Memories.

Page

P. 6-11
P. 6-12

P. 6-13

P. 6-14

P. 6-16
P. 6-17

P. 6-18
P. 6-19

2. PT Settings Tab
Item
Start-up Waiting Time

Function
Sets the system startup waiting time. Communications are not
performed during this specified time when the power is turned ON
or the PT is reset. The default is 0 s.
Screen Saver
Sets the screen saver to ON or OFF. The default setting is OFF.
Screen Saver Start-up
Sets the amount of time after which the screen saver is started.
Time
The default setting is 15 min.
Key Press Sound
Sets whether a sound will be heard when a touch switch is
pressed. The default setting is ON.
Buzzer Sound
Sets whether a buzzer will be heard when a command from the
host is received or an error occurs. The default setting is ERR ON.
Backlight
Sets the backlight brightness to one of three levels. The brightness cannot be adjusted much.
The default setting is High.
Calendar Check
Displays and sets the date and time for the internal clock.
Printer Type
Sets the control method for the printer connected to the PT.
Orientation
Sets the paper orientation for the printer connected to the PT.
Mode
Sets the printing method for the printer connected to the PT.
Changing Value in Device Selects whether to set or just monitor device monitor values in the
functions for Registered Monitor and 6-3-9 Switch Box.
Monitor Setting
Adjusts the contrast for the screen.
Contrast (NS5-SQ/MQ
only)
CJK Han Unification Prior- The CJK Han unification setting is used to select what character
style (traditional Chinese, simplified Chinese, or Japanese) will be
ity
given priority for display.
Alarm Monitor Registration Specifies the method for performing monitor registration of alarms
and events.
Method

6-4

Page

P. 6-22

P. 6-22
P. 6-22
P. 6-23
P. 6-23
P. 6-24

P. 6-24
P. 6-25
P. 6-26
P. 6-26
P. 6-26
P. 6-27
P. 6-27

P. 6-27

6-1 Operating Modes and System Menu

3. Project Tab
Item
Project Title
Number of Labels
Initial Screen
Initial Label
Alarm/Event Recording
Method
Data Log Recording
Method
Operation Log Recording
Method
Error Log Recording
Method
System Memory ($SB)
System Memory ($SW)

Function
Displays the project title.
Displays the number of corresponding labels.
Sets and displays the screen numbers first displayed after the
power is turned ON.
Sets and displays the label number shown on the screen after the
power is turned ON.
Displays the method for recording the alarm/event histories.

Page

P. 6-28
P. 6-29
P. 6-29
P. 6-29
P. 6-29

Displays the method for recording the data log.

P. 6-29

Displays the method for recording the operation log.

P. 6-30

Displays the method for recording the error log.

P. 6-30

Displays the allocated addresses of the system bit memory ($SB). P. 6-30
Displays the allocated address of the system word memory ($SW). P. 6-30

4. Password Tab
Item
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 4
Level 5
Password mode
Time Out
Timeout (min)
Switch Screen when
canceling the authentication
Switch Screen No.

Function
Changes the level 1 password.
Changes the level 2 password.
Changes the level 3 password.
Changes the level 4 password.
Changes the level 5 password.
Selects the password function (including passwords with levels).
Specifies whether user authentication is automatically canceled
after a set time has elapsed.
Sets the timeout time.
Specifies whether the screen is switched automatically when
authentication is canceled.

Page
P. 6-31
P. 6-31
P. 6-31
P. 6-31
P. 6-31
P. 6-32
P. 6-33
P. 6-33
P. 6-33

Sets the screen number that is displayed at when authentication P. 6-33

is canceled.

5. Comm Tab
Item
Comms. Auto-return
Timeout interval
Retry Counts
Serial Port A
Serial Port B
Expansion Interface
Ethernet
Controller Link

Function
Selects whether automatic recovery is used when a communications error occurs.
Sets and displays the timeout monitor time.
Sets and displays the number of communications retries.
Sets and displays whether serial port A is used, the communications method, and other details.
Sets and displays whether serial port B is used, the communications method, and other details.
Sets and displays the connector used by serial port B (NS5 only).
Sets and displays whether Ethernet is used and communications
details.
Sets and displays whether Controller Link is used and communications details.

Page
P. 6-34
P. 6-34
P. 6-34
P. 6-35
P. 6-35
P. 6-35
P. 6-37
P. 6-40

6-5

6-1 Operating Modes and System Menu

6. Data Check Tab

Item
Screen Number
Show Address

Function
Sets the screen number that is displayed as a sample.
Displays the communications addresses set for the sample display.

Page
P. 6-43
P. 6-43

Function
Displays the alarm history screen.
Displays the screen for recording the operation log.
Displays the screen for recording the error log.
Displays the device monitor screen and communications test
screen. This function also starts external applications, lists USB
devices, performs Video Configuration, displays capture data or
PLC data trace data.
Displays the version display screen.

Page
P. 6-45
P. 6-46
P. 6-47
P. 6-48
to
P. 6-57

7. Special Screen Tab

Item
Alarm History
Operation Log
Error Log
Special Functions

System Version

P. 6-57

8. Hardware Check Tab

Item
LCD Check
Touch Switch Check

6-6

Function
Checks the LCD.
Checks the touch switches.

Page
P. 6-60
P. 6-61

6-1 Operating Modes and System Menu

6-1-4

Using the System Menu

Information on using the menus, such as displaying the System Menu, and selecting menu
items, is provided here.
Reference The system settings set in the project data are given priority over those set in the System Menu.

Displaying the System Menu

The System Menu can be displayed by using any of the following methods.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Press two of the four corners of the touch panel.

Press the command button in the System Menu display.
Press a command button set to switch the screen to the system menu.
Specify screen number 4002 BCD (FA2 binary) and switch the screen.
Press or change the value of a Multifunction Object set to display the System Menu.

1. Pressing the Corners of the Touch Panel

The System Menu can be displayed by pressing two of the four corners of the PT touch panel
simultaneously, as shown in the following diagram.

When pressing the corners of the touch panel, however, first press a corner that does not
have a functional object displayed. If the position of a functional object is pressed, its function
will be performed. If the command button for switching screens is kept pressed after the
screen has been switched, it will be detected as if the button has been released.
The second corner pressed can be any of the other three corners. The System Menu will be

6-7

6-1 Operating Modes and System Menu

displayed even if functional objects are displayed.

2. Pressing the Command Button in the System Menu

While creating screens, if a command button for displaying the System Menu is created in the
screen, the System Menu can be displayed by pressing this command button.
3. Pressing Command Buttons to Switch Screens
The Display System Menu function of command buttons includes an option to display the Initialize Tab (the first screen of the System Menu). Press a command button for which this option has been set.
Alternatively, the Screen Switch command button functions include a Indirect Specification of
Screen No. function. Store the BCD value 4002 (binary FA2) in the communications address
for indirect specification and press the command button.
Refer to 2-9 Buttons in the Programming Manual for information on command buttons.
4. Storing 4002 in $SW0 (in System Memory)
A BCD value of 4002 (binary FA2) can be stored in $SW0 (in System Memory). Refer to 2-4
System Memory in the NS Series Programming Manual for information on the system memory.
5. Press a Multifunction Object to Display the System Menu
Press the Switch Screen Button of Multifunction Object and set it to Display System Menu System Menu Top Page [Initialize Tab]. Then touch or change the value of this Multifunction
Object to display the System Menu.

Selecting Menu Items

Items in the System Menu can be displayed by simply pressing the tab of the menu item to be
displayed.
Example: Press the Hardware Check Tab in the System Menu to display the Hardware
Check Screen.

6-8

6-1 Operating Modes and System Menu

Switching to RUN Status from the System Menu

Press the Exit Button to return to RUN mode.

6-9

6-2 Initializing and Saving Data and Removing the Memory Card

6-2 Initializing and Saving Data and Removing the

Memory Card
The Initialize Tab is used to initialize or save the PT data and specify the system language.
Used these function whenever necessary.

Memory Card (remove)

Alarm/event history (initialize, save)
Data log (initialize, save)
Operation log initialization (initialize, save)
Error log (initialize, save)
Internal Holding Memories ($HB/$HW) (initialize)
Screen data area (format)
NS12 Data Initialize Screen

NS10/NS8 Data Initialize Screen

6-10

6-2 Initializing and Saving Data and Removing the Memory Card

NS5 Data Initialize Screen

Page 1

6-2-1

Page 2

Screen Data Area Format

This function formats the PT screen data. Screen data must be formatted if it is corrupted and
cannot start up properly. The data recorded for the operation log, alarm history, data log, and
error log is not initialized when screen data is formatted.
Note

Before formatting screen data, check that the screen data has been backed up from the CXDesigner.

Format the screen data by using operations from the Initialize Data Tab Page in the System
Menu, as follows:
1.

Press the Screen Data Area Button.

A confirmation message will be displayed. Press the Yes Button to format the data. Press the
No Button to cancel the initialize function.

2.

When the PT has completed formatting screen data, a dialog box will be displayed indicating
that the screen data has finished being formatted.

3.

An error message will be displayed if the System Menu is closed while screen data is being
formatted. Always transfer the screen data from the CX-Designer or Memory Card after formatting.

Reference

The PT must be restarted after screen data has been transferred.

6-11

6-2 Initializing and Saving Data and Removing the Memory Card

6-2-2

Initializing or Saving the Alarm/Event History

This function initializes or saves the alarm/event histories saved in the PT.
Use this function when screen data has been changed, for initializing history data, or for saving history data in the Memory Card as a CSV file.
While the PT is running, the alarm/event histories continually check the status of bits registered as alarms/events and record the date, time, and number of times the bits turned
ON/OFF.
Up to 1,024 alarms/events can be recorded.
Reference

The alarm/event histories can also be initialized by turning ON $SB32 in system memory from the host.
The alarm/event histories will be deleted when project data or system programs are
downloaded.
The alarm/event histories can also be saved by turning ON $SB33 in system memory
from the host. Refer to 2-4 System Memory in the NS Series Programming Manual for
details.

Initialize or save alarm/event histories by using operations from the Initialize Tab Page in the
System Menu, as follows:
Initializing Alarm/Event Histories
1.

Press the Initialize Button.

A confirmation message will be displayed. Press the Yes Button to initialize the data. Press the
No Button to cancel the initialize function.

2.

When the PT has completed initializing the alarm/event histories, a dialog box will be displayed
indicating that the alarm/event histories have finished being initialized.

Saving Alarm/Event Histories

1. Press the Save Button. The Save Button will be lit yellow while data is being saved.
2. When the PT has completed saving the alarm/event histories, the Save Button will return
to its normal color.
A dialog box will be displayed indicating that the save has been finished.

6-12

6-2 Initializing and Saving Data and Removing the Memory Card

6-2-3

Initializing and Saving Data Log

This function initializes or saves the data log saved in the PT.
Use this function when screen data has been changed, or for initializing history data. The
data log is used to record changes over time to the contents of an address that is registered
in the log. Up to 50,000 events can be recorded.
Reference

The data log for the specified group can be initialized by setting the group number in
$SW37 and turning ON $SB35 in the system memory from the host. The data logs for
all groups can be initialized by setting $SW37 to 0.
The data log will be deleted when project data or system programs are downloaded.
The data log for the specified group can be saved by setting the group number in
$SW37 and turning ON $SB36 in the system memory from the host. The data logs for
all groups can be saved by setting $SW37 to 0.

Initialize or save the data log by using operations from the Initialize Tab Page in the System
Menu, as follows:
Initializing the Data Log
1. Press the Initialize Button.
A confirmation message will be displayed. Press the Yes Button to initialize the data. Press the
No Button to cancel the initialize function.

2. When the PT has completed initializing the data log, a dialog box will be displayed indicating that
the data log has finished being initialized.

Saving the Data Log

1. Press the Save Button. The Save Button will be lit yellow while data is being saved.
2. When the PT has completed saving the data log, the Save Button will return to its normal
color. A dialog box will be displayed indicating that the save has been finished.

6-13

6-2 Initializing and Saving Data and Removing the Memory Card

6-2-4

Initializing and Saving the Operation Log

This function initializes or saves the operation log saved in the PT.
Up to 1,024 operations can be recorded in order of occurrence.
Use this function when screen data has been changed, for initializing log data, or for saving
log data as a CSV file in the Memory Card.
The operation log is used to record the number of times the following operations are performed and the order in which they occur.

Functional object operation history

Screen display history
Macro execution history
Refer to 2-4 System Memory in the PT Programming Manual for details.
Reference

The functional objects that can be recorded are ON/OFF buttons, word buttons, Numeral Display & Input, String Display & Input, and thumbwheel switches.
The operation log data can also be initialized by setting the system bit memory address $SB37 to ON from the host.
The operation log will be deleted when project data or system programs are downloaded.
The operation log can also be saved by turning ON $SB38 in system memory from
the host. Refer to 2-4 System Memory in the PT Programming Manual for details.

Initialize or save the operation log by using operations from the Initialize Tab Page in the System Menu, as follows:

6-14

6-2 Initializing and Saving Data and Removing the Memory Card

Initializing the Operation Log

1.

Press the Initialize Button.

A confirmation message will be displayed. Press the Yes Button to initialize the data. Press the
No Button to cancel the initialize function.

2.

When the PT has completed initializing the operation log, a dialog box will be displayed indicating that the operation log has finished being initialized.

Saving the Operation Log

1. Press the Save Button. The Save Button will be lit yellow while data is being saved.
2. When the PT has completed saving the operation log, the Save Button will return to its
normal color.
A dialog box will be displayed indicating that the save has been finished.

Reference

When saving the operation log, the operation log must be controlled from the system
memory. For details on controlling the operation log, refer to 2-4 System Memory in
the PT Programming Manual.

6-15

6-2 Initializing and Saving Data and Removing the Memory Card

6-2-5

Initializing and Saving the Error Log

This function initializes the macro error history saved in the PT or saves the history in the
Memory Card.
Up to 100 errors can be recorded in the error log. The number of errors that can be recorded,
however, also depends on the free space in the memory.
The error log records the errors that occur when the macro function is executed. Initialize or
save the error history by using operations from the Initialize Tab Page in the System Menu, as
follows:
Initializing the Error Log
1. Press the Initialize Button.
A confirmation message will be displayed. Press the Yes Button to initialize the data. Press the
No Button to cancel the initialize function.

2. When the PT has completed initializing the error log, a dialog box will be displayed indicating
that the error log has finished being initialized.

Saving the Error Log

1. Press the Save Button. The Save Button will be lit yellow while data is being saved.
2. When the PT has completed saving the error log, the Save Button will return to its normal
color.
A dialog box will be displayed indicating that the save has been finished.

Reference

The error log is deleted when project data or system programs are downloaded.
The error log can also be initialized by turning ON $SB42 in system memory from the
host, and can be saved by turning ON $SB43 in system memory from the host. Refer
to 2-4 System Memory in the PT Programming Manual for details.

6-16

6-2 Initializing and Saving Data and Removing the Memory Card

6-2-6

Language Selection
The system language can be set to Japanese, English, Italian, Spanish, French, German, or
Chinese (traditional or simplified). The system language will be used on the System Menu, input keypads, message dialog boxes, etc, on the PT.
The system language is set from the Initialize Tab Page in the System Menu Window using
the following procedure.
1. Select the system language in the Select Language Area.

2. After specifying the language, click the Write Button. The system language will be
switched after the new setting has been saved.
Reference

If ASCII codes are set as the character display format for String Display & INPUT, list
display, or data block tables (character fields), the following character codes will be
used depending on the system language that is set.
System Language

Character display

Japanese

Shift-JIS code

Chinese (traditional
and simplified)
English and other
languages

GB2312 code
Latin 1code

Display example
(character code B5)
The corresponding
character does not
exist, so nothing is
displayed.

The above codes will also be used when indirect specifications are made for label
strings for label objects.

6-17

6-2 Initializing and Saving Data and Removing the Memory Card

6-2-7

Removing the Memory Card

The Memory Card can be removed from the PT while the PT is ON. Use the following procedure from the Initialize Tab Page of the System Menu to remove the Memory Card.
1. Press the Remove Button next to Memory Card.

2. The following dialog box will be displayed when it is safe to remove the Memory Card.
Press the OK Button.

3. Confirm that it is safe to remove the Memory Card, and remove it from the PT.

Note: When the Memory Card is removed, reinsert the Memory Card into the PT to use it again.
Once a Memory Card is removed, it must be reinserted before the PT can access it.

Reference The Memory Card in the PT can be removed if the system memory bit $SB50 turns ON
(indicating that the Memory Card is ready to be removed) when the Host turns ON system memory bit $SB49. Refer to 2-4 System Memory in the NS Series Programming
Manual for details.

6-18

6-2 Initializing and Saving Data and Removing the Memory Card

6-2-8

Initializing Internal Holding Memories ($HB/$HW)

The following procedure is used to initialize the Internal Holding Memories in the PT ($HB0 to
$HB8191 and $HW0 to $HW8191). Use the following procedure from the Initialize Tab Page
of the System Menu to initialize the Internal Holding Memories.
1. Press the Initialize Button for the Internal Holding Memories ($HB/$HW). The following
confirmation message will be displayed. Press the Yes Button to initialize.

2. When Internal Holding Memory ($HB/$HW) initialization has been completed, the following notification message will be displayed. Press the OK Button.

Reference The NS-series PTs internal holding memory ($HB/$HW) can be initialized by turning
ON the system memory bit $SB34 from the host. Refer to 2-4 System Memory in the NS
Series Programming Manual for details.

6-19

6-3 PT Settings

6-3 PT Settings
The PT Tab Page is used to set the following functions.

Start-up wait time

Screen saver
Key press sound
Buzzer sound
Backlight
Calendar check
Printer type
Mode
Changing values
Contrast (NS5-SQ/MQ only)
CJK Han unification priority
Alarm Monitor Registration Method
PT Tab Page for the NS12
(Page 1)

(Page 3)

6-20

(Page 2)

6-3 PT Settings

PT Tab Page for the NS10 and NS8

(Page 1)

(Page 2)

(Page 3)

PT Tab Page for the NS5

(Page 1)

(Page 3)

(Page 2)

(Page 4)

6-21

6-3 PT Settings

(Page 5)

6-3-1

Start-up Wait Time

The start-up wait time refers to the waiting time before the PT starts communicating with the
host after the PT power is turned ON or the PT is reset Set the system startup waiting time
when the host requires time before it starts running.
The setting range is between 0 and 10 s and the default is 0 s.
Set the system startup waiting time by using operations from the PT Tab Page in the System
Menu, as follows:
1. Set the waiting time in the Start-up Wait Time field in second units.
Input the value in the dialog box that is displayed by pressing the setting input column.

2. After setting, press the Write Button to save the setting.

Reference Nothing is displayed during the system startup waiting time.

The system startup waiting time is calculated from when initialization finishes.
Therefore, if the startup waiting time is set to 0 s, the PT will not start actual communications with the host immediately after the power is turned ON.

6-3-2

Screen Saver
To extend the life of the backlight, the screen saver function turns OFF the screen display
when operations are not performed for a fixed period of time.
The default setting is for no screen saver.
The time before the screen saver function is activated can be set in one-minute units between
1 and 255 minutes. The default setting is 15 min.
Set the screen saver movement by using operations from the PT Tab Page in the System
Menu, as follows:

6-22

6-3 PT Settings

1. Select either OFF or Display Erased for the screen saver.

3. If Display Erased is selected, set the screen saver startup time.
Input the value in the dialog box that is displayed by pressing the setting input column.

4. After setting, press the Write Button to save the setting.

Reference Pressing any part of the touch panel will cancel the screen saver and display the previously displayed screen. When canceling the screen saver, If the part of the touch panel
corresponds to the input for a functional object, the screen saver will be cancelled only.
The input for the functional object will not be processed.

6-3-3

Key Press Sound

This function sets whether an input sound is heard when the touch switches that allow input
functions for the PT are pressed.
ON:

Input sound is heard when the touch switches that allow input functions for the
PT are pressed.
OFF: Input sound is not heard when the touch switches that allow input functions for
the PT are pressed.
The default setting is ON.
1. Select either ON or OFF for the touch switch input sound.

5. After setting, press the Write Button to save the setting.

6-3-4

Buzzer Sound
The buzzer is used at times such as when a command from the host is received or an error
occurs. This function is set to ON or OFF in the System Menu.
ON:

Buzzer turns ON when a command is received from the host or an error

occurs.
OFF:
Buzzer is OFF.
ERR ON: Buzzer turns ON when an error occurs only.
The default setting is ERR ON.

6-23

6-3 PT Settings

Reference Other commands and settings associated with the buzzer exist, but the settings here
have the highest priority.
When the buzzer is set to ON or ERR ON, the buzzer will be heard when messages
are displayed with a cross (X) or exclamation mark (!) icon.
Refer to 2-18 Special Functions in the Programming Manual for details on the buzzer
function.

Set the buzzer to ON/OFF by using operations from the PT Tab Page in the System Menu, as
follows:
1. Select either ON, OFF, or ERR ON for the buzzer setting.

6. After setting, press the Write Button to save the setting.

6-3-5

Backlight
This function sets the backlight brightness to one of three levels.
The default setting is high.
Set the brightness of the backlight by using operations from the PT Tab Page in the System
Menu, as follows:
2. Select one of the three backlight brightness levels to set to high, middle, or low.

7. After setting, press the Write Button to save the setting.

6-3-6

Calendar Check
This function displays the time and date of the PTs internal system clock.
The factory settings for the date and time are not correct.
Set and display the date and time by using operations from the PT Tab Page in the System
Menu, as follows:
1. The currently set date and time will be displayed in the Date and Time Setting field.
2. To change the date/time, set the date/time in the dialog box that is displayed by pressing the
date and time field.

6-24

6-3 PT Settings

Use the following input format to set the date:

yyyy.mm.dd (yyyy: year, mm: month, dd: day)

Set the year using four digits.
Example: Set March 15, 2002 as 2002.3.15. (Adding 0 prefix to single-digit settings is not required.)

Use the following input format to set the time.

hh.mm.ss (hh: hour, mm: minute, ss: second)
Set the year using the 24-hour clock.
Example: Set 06:01:01 p.m. as 18.1.1. (Adding 0 prefix to single-digit settings is not required.)

8. Press the Enter Button to enable the settings.

6-3-7

Printer Type
If there is a printer connected to the PT, select the printers control method.
Setting item
ESC/P Raster
BJ Raster

Details
Sets the printers control method to ESC/P Raster. Use this setting if
mainly using Epson printers.
Sets the printers control method to BJ Raster. Use this setting if
mainly using Canon printers.

1. Select either ESC/P Raster or BJ Raster in Print Control.

9. After setting, press the Write Button to save the setting.

6-25

6-3 PT Settings

6-3-8

Printing Mode
If there is a printer connected to the PT, select the printers control method.
Setting item
Color Print
Monochrome Print
Monochrome Print (Inverse)

Details
Prints in color.
Prints in monochrome.
Prints in inverted monochrome.

1. Select Color Print, Monochrome Print, or Monochrome Print (Inverse) in Print Type.

10. After setting, press the Write Button to save the setting.

6-3-9

Orientation
Select the printer paper orientation when a printer is connected to the NS-series PT.
1. Select either Portrait or Landscape in Orientation.
Portrait: Prints with the longer page measurement as the height (factory default).
Landscape: Prints with the shorter page measurement as the height.
2. After setting, press the Write Button to save the setting.

6-3-10 Changing Values in Device Monitor Setting

This setting enables using the registered monitor and switch box functions of the device
monitor only for monitoring by prohibiting address changes while monitoring.
Disable Button: Prohibits changing monitor values
Enable Button: Enables changing monitor values (factory default)
This setting can also be made with the CX-Designer on the PT Operation Tab Page of the
System Settings.

6-26

6-3 PT Settings

6-3-11 Contrast (NS5-SQ0@/NS5-MQ0@ Only)

This function adjusts the screen contrast. Contrast can be adjusted in 100 degrees.
Adjust the contrast by using operations from the PT Tab Page in the System Menu, as follows:
1. Change the contrast setting using the left and right arrow buttons (<<, <, >, >>) for contrast adjustment. The contrast will change as soon as the buttons are pressed.

<< Button: Decreases the contrast by ten degrees.

< Button: Decreases the contrast by one degree.
> Button: Increases the contrast by one degree.
>> Button: Increases the contrast by ten degrees.
Check the contrast from the sample display of eight shades above the arrow buttons.

6-3-12 CJK Han Unification Priority

The CJK Han unification setting is used to select what character style (traditional Chinese,
simplified Chinese, or Japanese) will be given priority for display.
If Japanese or Chinese is used, the displayed character form will differ even if the character
code is the same. In this case, use the CJK Han unification priority setting to select what
character style will be given priority for display. Use the following procedure starting from the
PT Settings Tab in the System Menu to select the priority.
1. In the CJK Priority Area, select from J
C (Simplified)
C (Traditional), C (Simplified)

C (Traditional)
J, or C (Traditional)
C (Simplified)
J.
J indicates Japanese and C indicates Chinese.

2. After completing the setting, press the Write Button. The setting will be saved.

6-3-13 Alarm Monitor Registration Procedure

Set the method for performing monitor registration of alarms and events.
Normally, the method is set to When switching screens.
If multiple alarms or events are registered, the screen-switching speed may increase if the At
startup Option is selected. If there is no difference, set the method to When switching screens.
Set the alarm monitor registration method by performing the following operation from the PT
Tab Page in the System Menu.
1.

Set either At startup or When switching screens for the alarm monitor registration
method.

2.

After completing the setting, press the Write Button. The setting will be saved.

6-27

6-4 Project Settings

6-4 Project Settings

The Project Tab Page is used to display and set the following functions.

Project title
Number of labels
Initial screen
Initial label
Alarm/event history recording method:
Method for recording log of generated and deleted alarms/events.
Data log recording method:
Method for recording log of changes to addresses.
Operation log recording method:
Method for recording log of functional object operations, screen switching, and macro executions.
Error log recording method:
Method for recording log of macro execution errors.
System memory:
The addresses allocated in system memory will be displayed.

6-4-1

Project Title
This function displays title of projects that are registered in the PT.
The title is read-only and cannot be edited.

6-28

6-4 Project Settings

6-4-2

Number of Labels
Multiple label data can be created in each project. This function displays the number of labels
set for the project that is registered in the PT.
The number of labels is read-only and cannot be edited.
Reference For details on setting multiple labels for a project, refer to System Settings and Project
Properties in the CX-Designers Online Help.
Refer to Labels in 2-8 Common Functional Object Functions in the Programming
Manual for information on how to set multiple labels for a functional object.

6-4-3

Initial Screen
This function displays and sets the screen number of the screen that is first displayed when
the PT is started.
Display and set the initial screen number by using operations from the Project Tab Page in
the System Menu, as follows:
1. The number of the screen that is displayed when the PT is started is displayed in the initial
screen field.
2. To change the initial screen number, input the value using the tenkey, which is displayed by
pressing the display area.
3. After setting, press the Write Button to save the setting.

Reference The initial screen number can also be set from the CX-Designer.

6-4-4

Initial Label
This function displays and sets the label number that is shown on the screen when the PT is
started.
Reference This initial label number can also be set from the CX-Designer.

6-4-5

Alarm/Event History Recording Method

This function displays the method for recording the alarm/event histories. The alarm/event
history recording method is read-only and cannot be edited.
This alarm/event history recording method is set from the CX-Designer.
If a ring buffer is used, when the specified number of records is exceeded, the oldest data is
deleted and the new data is recorded.
If the ring buffer is not used, the PT stops collecting history data when the specified number
of records has been reached. Initialize the alarm/event histories to reopen the history records.
Reference Refer to 6-2-2 Initializing or Saving the Alarm/Event History for details on initializing the
alarm/event histories.

6-4-6

Data Log Recording Method

This function displays the data log recording method.
The data log recording method is read only and cannot be edited.
The use of a ring buffer for the data log recording method is fixed.
When the specified number of log entries is exceeded, the oldest data is deleted and the new

6-29

6-4 Project Settings

data is recorded.
Use the CX-Designer to set the number of log entries.
Reference Refer to 6-2-3 Initializing and Saving Data Log in this manual and Data Log Function in
2-18 Special Functions in the Programming Manual for details on the data log.

6-4-7

Operation Log Recording Method

This function displays the method for recording the operation log. The operation log recording
method is read only and cannot be edited. This operation log recording method is set from the
CX-Designer.
If Save in Ring Buffer Format is set, when the specified number of items is exceeded, the oldest data is deleted and the new data is recorded.
If the log is not saved in ring buffer format, the PT stops collecting log data when the specified
number of items has been reached. Initialize the operation log to reopen the record.
Reference Refer to 6-2-4 Initializing and Saving the Operation Log in this manual and Operation
Log Function in 2-18 Special Functions in the Programming Manual for details on the
operation log.

6-4-8

Error Log Recording Method

This function displays the error log recording method. The error log recording method is read
only and cannot be edited. The use of a ring buffer for the error log recording method is fixed.
When the maximum number of items is exceeded, the oldest data is deleted and the new
data is recorded.
Reference Refer to 6-2-5 Initializing and Saving the Error Log in this manual and Error Log Function in 2-18 Special Functions in the Programming Manual for details on the error log.

6-4-9

System Memory
The system memory is used to control the PT and exchange information between the host
and the PT, such as notifying the host of PT status. The system memory can be allocated to
host addresses or to PT memory.
Allocating the system memory as host addresses allows operations such as controlling the
PT from the host. The allocated location in the host is displayed in the System Memory and
cannot be edited.
The location where the system bit memory and system word memory is allocated (allocated
host and address) is displayed in the System Bit Memory ($SB) and System Word Memory
($SW).
Reference Refer to 2-4 System Memory in the PT Programming Manual for details on the system
memory.

If the system memory has been set to NT compatibility, allocations for the Control Area, Notification Area, and Window Control Area will be displayed.

6-30

6-5 Setting Passwords

6-5 Setting Passwords

The NS-series PTs password function is divided into the following two functions.

Password Function
Requires a password input before allowing operations on a password-protected functional object.

Password with Levels Function

Requires a password for authentication when performing operations on a passwordprotected functional object for the first time. Once authentication has been completed,
operations can be performed on all functional objects of the same or lower password levels. Operations cannot be performed on functional objects protected with higher-level
passwords.
The passwords are set from the CX-Designer and up to five passwords (5 levels) can be set
for a single project. The passwords can be set and changed from the System Menu.

6-5-1

Changing the Password

Perform the following procedure from the System Menu to change the password.
1. Select the Password Tab.

4. Select the password to be changed using the Level 1 to Level 5 Buttons.

5. Input the old password and new password in the corresponding fields, and then input the new
password again in the confirmation field. Input the password using the virtual keyboard (text input dialog box) that is displayed by pressing the input column.

6. After changing the password, press the Write Button to save the setting. Save separately for
each password level that is changed.

Note

When changing passwords, do not reset the PT or turn OFF the power until the write operation has been completed (i.e., the Write Button has returned to the status before being
pressed). If the password is not saved properly, the screen may malfunction.
If the password is forgotten, it cannot be checked from the PT. Check the password using
the CX-Designer.

6-31

6-5 Setting Passwords

6-5-2

Setting the Password Function

Perform the following procedure from the System Menu to set a password.
1. Select the Password Tab.

6-32

2.

Press the Password mode Button.

3.

After making the required settings, press the Write Button to save the settings.

6-5 Setting Passwords

Settings for the Password Function

The following table describes the password functions setting items.
Setting item
Level

Function
Press the OFF (password) or ON (password with levels)
Button to select the function.

OFF

Requires a password input before allowing operations on a

password-protected functional object.

ON

Requires a password input for level authentication. During a

session from authentication to cancellation, the user only
can perform operations on functional objects that are allowed for the password level that was input at the start of the
session. The user cannot perform operations on functional
objects at higher levels.

Time Out

Click the ON or OFF Button to specify whether authentication is automatically canceled (timed out) after a set time
has elapsed.
This option can be set when the password with levels function has been turned ON.
ON

A user is automatically timed out if there are no functional

object operations within the timeout time.

OFF

Authentication is not automatically canceled. To cancel authentication, press a command button set for cancellation.
When the Time Out Option is set to ON, this setting specifies the timeout time in minutes (1 to 60 minutes).
Click the ON or OFF Button to specify whether the screen is
automatically switched to a specified screen when a user
logs out.
This option can be set when the password with levels function has been turned ON.
The screen is switched to the specified Switch Screen No.
when authentication is canceled.
The screen is not switched when authentication is canceled.

Timeout (min)
Switch Screen when canceling the authentication

ON
OFF
Switch Screen No.

If switching the screen when authentication is canceled has

been turned ON, the screen is changed to the screen number set here when authentication is canceled.

Reference The password settings can also be made from the CX-Designer.
Note
When changing passwords, do not reset the PT or turn OFF the power until the write operation has
been completed (i.e., the Write Button has returned to the status before being pressed). If the password is not saved properly, the screen may malfunction.
If the password is forgotten, it cannot be checked from the PT. Check the password using the CXDesigner.

6-33

6-6 Communications Settings

6-6 Communications Settings

The methods for setting the communications conditions with the host are described here.

6-6-1

Communications Conditions
Set the communications conditions by using operations from the Comm Tab Page in the System Menu, as follows:
After inputting the communications conditions, press the Write Button to save the settings.
Changed settings are enabled after the PT is restarted.

Communications Conditions Setting Items

The setting items for the communications conditions between the PT and host are as follows:

Communications Auto-return
Select whether or not to use communications auto-return using the ON and OFF Buttons.
ON:

The PT will automatically return to RUN mode when a communications error occurs, without displaying an error message dialog box.

OFF:

The PT will stop running when a communications error occurs and an error message dialog box will be displayed. Press the OK Button in the error message dialog box to return to RUN mode. The default setting is OFF.

Time-out Interval
Set the time before a timeout error occurs when a response is not received from the host.
The timeout interval can be set to between 1 and 10 (unit: s). Input the value by using the
tenkey or the Up ( ) and Down ( ) buttons that are displayed by pressing the display area.
The default setting is 3 s.
Note

Set the time-out interval to 3 s min. when using 1:N NT Links. If the time-out interval is less
than 3 s, abnormal communications may occur.

Retry Counts
Set the number of retries for communications before an error screen will be displayed, when
a communications error occurs while communicating with the host. If communications are un-

6-34

6-6 Communications Settings

successful after the number of communications retries specified here have been executed,
processing set for the communications auto return will be executed. The number of retries
can be set to between 0 and 255 times. Input the value by using the tenkey or the Up ( )
and Down ( ) buttons that are displayed by pressing the display area.
The default setting is 5 retries.
Note

Set the retry counts to 5 retries min. when using 1:N NT Links. If less than 5 retries is set, abnormal communications may occur.

Port Communications Method and Communications Type

Set the communications method for serial ports A and B, for Ethernet and for Controller Link. The
right half of the screen will change according to the settings.

Reference

To change the communications method for another port, the Write Button must be pressed before
continuing. The settings will not be saved if the communications method is switched without
pressing the Write Button.

For details on Temperature Controller and Memory Link setting methods and other procedures,
refer to the NS Series Host Connection Manual (V085).

For details on Host Link setting methods and other procedures, refer to the NS Series Host Connection Manual (Host Link).

Supported Communications Method Combinations

It is not possible to connect to a PLC via NT Link (1:N) with both serial ports A and B at the
same time. It is not possible to use a Bar Code Reader with both serial ports A and B at the
same time. It is also not possible to use a modem with both serial ports A and B at the same
time.
Serial ports A and B, Ethernet and Controller Link can be used in any combination with other
communications methods.
Serial ports A and B, Ethernet and Controller Link, however, cannot be all used simultaneously (except when using a Bar Code Reader).
Reference Serial ports A and B, Ethernet and Controller Link can be set to be used simultaneously,
but proper operations cannot be guaranteed (except when using a Bar Code Reader).
Therefore, do not set all the ports to be used simultaneously.

Interface Setting (NS5 Only)

A setting in the System Menu for the NS5 enables switching serial port B between using the
expansion interface connector and the serial port B interface connector. Communications will

6-35

6-6 Communications Settings

not be possible with the CX-Designer through the serial port B connector if the expansion interface is selected.
The use of the expansion interface is for future expansion and cannot yet be used. Always
use the serial port B connector. (The default setting is Disable.)

6-6-2

Setting 1:1 NT Link

Select the Comm Tab from the System Menu, and press the NT Link 1:1 Button as the
communications method for serial port A or B.
After setting, press the Write Button to save the setting.

When 1:1 NT Link is selected, there are no details settings.

6-6-3

Setting High-speed 1:N NT Links (Standard, High-speed)

Select the Comm Tab from the System Menu, and press the NT Link 1:N Button as the
communications method for serial port A or B.
The setting items for high-speed 1:N NT Links will be displayed on the right side of the screen.
Set the unit number and communications speed.
After setting, press the Write Button.

6-36

6-6 Communications Settings

Communications Conditions for 1:N NT Links

Setting item
Unit number
Communications Speed

Reference

Function
Sets the unit number.
Sets the baud Communications speed.

Settings
0 to 7
Standard, high-speed

The unit numbers that can be set depend on the type of host used, as follows:
C200HE(-Z):
Unit numbers 0 to 3 (up to four PTs for each port of the host)
C200HG(-Z), C200HX(-Z), CS1G/H, CS1G/H-H, CQM1H, CJ1G, and CJ1G/H-H:
Unit numbers 0 to 7 (up to eight PTs for each port of the host)
Refer to 4-2 1:N Host Connection for the host settings.

6-6-4

Setting Ethernet
To use Ethernet, select the Comm Tab from the System Menu and press the Enable Button.
The setting items for Ethernet will be displayed on the right side of the screen. Display and
set the network address, node address, IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway. Display the MAC address and IP address table display.
After setting, press the Write Button.

6-37

6-6 Communications Settings

Setting Ethernet Communications Conditions

Setting item
Network Add.
Node Add.
IP address
Sub-net
Default gateway
MAC address

Function
Sets the network address used for
Ethernet communications.
Sets the local node address.
Sets the local IP address.

Sets the subnet mask of the local node.

Sets the IP router.
Displays the MAC address (devicespecific information to identify each device connected to the network.)
LAN SPEED
Selects the method used to set the
Ethernet baud rate.
FTP
Selects whether or not to use the FTP
server.
IP Address: Show Table Displays the node numbers and IP addresses of other nodes connected
through Ethernet.
Note: Do not set the following values for the IP address.
Host ID with all bits set to 0 or 1 (e.g., 192.168.21.0).
Net ID with all bits set to 0 or 1 (e.g., 255.255.21.16).
Subnet ID with all bits set to 1 (e.g., 192.168.255.16).
IP addresses that begin with 127 (e.g., 127.35.21.16).

Settings
1 to 127
0 to 254
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
(See note.)
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
Read-only.

Automatic switch or fixed

10Base-T
Enable or disable
Node addresses: 1 to 254
IP addresses:
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Host Settings
This setting is used to display detailed data for hosts connected using Ethernet or Controller
Link. The host type, network address, and node address for each host can also be changed.
1. Press the ETN/CLK Host Display Button. The registered hosts will be displayed in a list.

2. Select the host by pressing the button to the left of the host name.
3. Press the Detail Button.
4. The host type, network address, and node address for the selected host can be changed.

6-38

6-6 Communications Settings

Setting item
Host type

Function
Change the host type by pressing the Up (
Buttons.

Network address
Node address

Set the network address of the host.

Details
SYSMACCS/CJ,
SYSMAC-CV,
Trajexia
1 to 127

Set the node address of the host.

1 to 254

) and Down (

5. After completing the settings, press the Write Button.

6-39

6-6 Communications Settings

6-6-5

Setting the Controller Link Network

If using a Controller Link Network is enabled for the project, settings for the network will be
displayed on the right side of window. Set the node address and baud rate (Comm. Speed).
Click the Write Button after setting these items. The Controller Link is supported by the NS12
and NS10 PTs only, and is not supported by the NS8 PTs.

Setting Communications Conditions for the Controller Link Network

Item
Network Add.
Node Address
Comm. Speed
Read Status

Function
Setting
Displays the network address
Display only
used for Controller Link.
Sets the local node address.
1 to 32
Sets the baud rate.
500K, 1M, or 2M
Displays whether Controller Link status is read (display
only).
Displays address where status is read (display only).

Read Allocation
Add.
Note: Using the Controller Link network and the network number cannot be changed at the PT. If you
change the setting, display the communications settings in the CX-Designer by selecting PT
Communication Setting, change the setting, and then transfer the project to the PT.

6-40

6-6 Communications Settings

6-6-6

Setting Bar Code Readers

The PT has a Bar Code Reader input function allowing input of barcode data as character
strings in the String Display & Input object.
The methods for setting the communications conditions with the Bar Code Reader are described here.
Reference Refer to 3-4 Connecting to Bar Code Readers for information on methods for connecting Bar Code Readers.
The Bar Code Reader can be connected to either serial port A or serial port B only.

Set the communications conditions and confirmation method for the Bar Code Reader using
the following procedure from the System Menu.
Set the Bar Code Readers communications method for serial port A or serial port B.
The setting items for the Bar Code Reader will be displayed on the right side of the screen.
Set the Communications speed, data bits, stop bits, parity, and input method.
After setting, press the Write Button to save the settings.

Setting Communications Conditions for Bar Code Reader Mode

Setting item
Comm. speed

Data bits
Stop bits
Parity
Input method
Continuous input

Function
Sets the communications speed for
communications with the Bar Code
Reader.
Sets the data bit length.
Sets the data stop bit length.
Sets the data parity bits.
Sets the confirmation method used after
inputting data in the input column.
Sets continuous barcode input to Yes or
No.

Settings
4800, 9600, or 19200 (bps)

7 or 8 bits
1 or 2 bits
None, odd, or even
Auto or manual confirmation
Yes or No

6-41

6-6 Communications Settings

6-6-7

Modem Settings
Data can be transferred from a personal computer to the PT through a modem. The method
used to set the data transfer conditions for the modem is described here.
Reference Refer to 10-1 PT Transferring Data to the PT in the CX-Designer Operation Manual for
details on modem types and connections.
The modem can be connected to either Serial Port A or Serial Port B, but not to both
at the same time.

Set the communications conditions for the modem from the System Menu using the following
procedure.
6. Set the communications method for serial port A or serial port B to the modem, and press
the Detail Button
7. The settings for the modem will be displayed on the right side of the screen. Set the
communications speed. After the setting is entered, press the Write Button to save it.

Setting Communications Conditions for Modem Data Transfers

Setting item
Comm. Speed

6-42

Function
Sets the communications speed.

Settings
9600, 19200, 38400, 57600,
or 115200 (bps)

6-7 Screen Data Check

6-7 Screen Data Check

Registered screens (numbers 0 to 3,999) can be displayed and checked using operations
from the System Menu.
Reference The screen displayed when checking screen data is a sample and cannot be used to
communicate with the host. The flicker function is also disabled.
Only the user screens (0 to 3,999) can be displayed. System screens cannot be displayed.

Display check screens by using the following procedure from the System Menu.
1. Select the Data Check Tab.

2. Set the screen number and press the Display Button to display the screen as a sample.
3. Press the ON Button next to the Show Address heading and display the sample screen to display the set address instead of the functional object label.

4. Press any part of the sample screen that is displayed to return to the Screen Data Check
Screen.

Reference Addresses are not displayed for data block tables.

6-43

6-8 Special Screens

6-8 Special Screens

These screens are used to display the data histories, device monitor, communications test,
and version information.
Item
Alarm history
Operation log
Error log
Special function

Function
Displays the alarm history.
Displays the operation log.
Displays the error log.
Performs the following special functions.
Switches PLC operating modes, displays and changes specified PLC addresses, and displays and deletes PLC error data.
Refer to 6-8-4 Device Monitor for information on how to display the Device
Device monitor
Monitor Screen.
Refer to Device Monitor in 2-18 Special Functions in the Programming
Manual for details on the device monitor.
Communications test Checks the PT communications functions.
Video Configuration Performs video configuration.
USB device list
Displays a list of the devices connected to the USB port.
Display Capture
Displays video capture data or screen capture data stored in a Memory
Data
Card.
Transfer Memory
Transfers screen data and the system program on the PT to a Memory
Card
Card.
Reads the results of a data trace executed in the PLC and displays the
PLC Data Trace
results in a time chart. The data trace parameters can also be set.
External applications Starts external applications.
System Version
Displays information on the PT version.

Details on how to use the functions are explained here.

6-44

6-8 Special Screens

6-8-1

Alarm History
This function displays the alarm history. The alarm history can be displayed in order of occurrence or frequency.
Display alarm history data by using operations from the Special Screen Tab Page in the System Menu, as follows:
1. Press the Alarm History (Sort by Occurrence) Button or Alarm History (Sort by Frequency)
Button to display the history contents.

2. Press the Back Button to return to the Special Screen.

Reference Refer to Alarm/Event History in 2-18 Special Functions in the Programming Manual for
details on the alarm history function.

6-45

6-8 Special Screens

6-8-2

Operation Log
This function displays the operation log. The operation log can be displayed in order of occurrence or frequency.
Display operation log data by using operations from the Special Screen Tab Page in the System Menu, as follows:
1. Press the Operation Log (Sort by Occurrence) Button or Operation Log (Sort by Frequency)
Button to display the operation log contents.

2. Press the Back Button to return to the Special Screen.

Reference

6-46

Refer to 6-2-4 Initializing and Saving the Operation Log in this manual and Operation
Log in 2-18 Special Functions in the Programming Manual for details on the operation
log.

6-8 Special Screens

6-8-3

Error Log
This function displays the macro error history. Macro errors can be displayed in order of occurrence or frequency.
Display error log data by using operations from the Special Screen Tab Page in the System
Menu, as follows:
1. Press the Error Log (Sort by Occurrence) Button or Error Log (Sort by Frequency) Button to
display the error log contents.

2. Press the Back Button to return to the Special Screen.

Reference

Refer to 6-2-5 Initializing and Saving the Error Log in this manual and Error Log in 2-18
Special Functions in the Programming Manual for details on the error log.

6-47

6-8 Special Screens

6-8-4

Device Monitor
The device monitor is an expansion function of the PT. This function is supported by CPM1A,
CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H, C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z), CS1G/CS1H, CS1D,
CS1G/CS1H-H, CJ1G, and CJ1M PLCs.
The device monitor has the following functions.

Switches the PLC operating modes.

Displays, changes, and performs force-sets/resets of current values in specified addresses
(registered monitor).
Displays a list of the current values (continuous monitor) in consecutive addresses (DM,
EM, and WR Area words).
Displays PLC error information (error logs) and deletes the errors (error information).
Details on methods of opening the Device Monitor Screen are explained here. Refer to Device Monitor in 2-18 Special Functions in the Programming Manual for details on the function
and operation methods.
Note

6-48

Always check carefully that the system is safe before performing the following operations using the device monitor.
Changing the monitor data and timer/counter current values.
Switching operating modes.
Performing force-sets/resets.
Changing timer/counter set values.

6-8 Special Screens

The Device Monitor Screen is displayed by using operations from the Special Screen Tab
Page from the System Menu, as follows:
1. Select Device Monitor from the Special Functions List Box, and press the START Button.

2. The Device Monitor Screen will be displayed.

3. Press the Quit Button to return to the Special Screen.

6-49

6-8 Special Screens

6-8-5

Communication Test
This function checks whether communications are enabled, by performing simple communications.
Display the Communication Test Screen by using operations from the Special Screen Tab
Page in the System Menu, as follows:
1. Select Communication Test from the Special Functions List Box, and press the START Button.

2. Press the Communication Test Button to switch to the Communications Test Screen.

3. Set each of the setting items, as follows:

6-50

6-8 Special Screens

Setting and Display Items in Communication Test Screen

Item
Send to

Send message
Number of
sends
Receive Timeout

Details
Sets the address of the transmission destination in the format (network address).(node address).(unit number).
Sets the following addresses when performing a communications test for a node
connected to serial port A or B.
Serial port A: 111.1.0
Serial port B: 112.1.0
Sets the FINS command being to be sent.
Displays the number of times messages are transmitted. The number of times is
fixed to 1.
Sets the time before the message timeout occurs. Displays an error message
when the timeout time is exceeded after transmission.
The setting time is applicable for Ethernet only. For serial communications, the
timeout monitor time set from the Comm Tab is used.

4. Press the Start Button to start transmission.

The sending indicator will remain lit until the transmission is completed.
After transmission, the Receiving indicator will remain lit until reception is completed.
5. If communications are normal, a response will be received from the transmission destination and
the following items will be displayed. Refer to the FINS Command Reference Manual (W227) for
details on FINS commands and information displayed in comments.

Display Items in Communication Test Screen

Item
SID (See note 1.)

Details
The SID used for transmission is displayed as a hexadecimal.
The SID is incremented between 0 and 0xFF and returns to 0 after 0xFF is
exceeded.
Received header
Displays the FINS header that is received. (See note 2.)
Received message Displays the received message.
ms
Displays the time lapsed in ms from sending the FINS command until receiving the FINS response.
Comment
Displays the status, such as "normal completion," according to the completion code after reception.
Note 1. SID is the source process ID.
2. The FINS header is the header that precedes the FINS command.

Refer to the FINS Command Reference Manual (W227) for details on FINS commands.
6. Press the Back Button to return to the Special Screen.

6-8-6

Video Configuration
A Video Input Unit can be mounted to the PT to display images by connecting video devices.
The user can adjust the image and output signals to a Vision Sensor from this window.
This section describes only the procedure for opening the window. For details, refer to 2-1810 Video Configuration in the NS Series Programming Manual.
The Video Configuration Window can be access by selecting the System Menu and clicking
the Special Screen Tab as shown below.

6-51

6-8 Special Screens

1. Select Video Configuration from the list under Special Function, and click the Start button.

The Video Configuration Window will be displayed.

2. Press the Back Button to return to the Special Window.

Reference

6-52

Press the Write Button to save the adjustments to the displayed image.
When starting the PT next time, the saved settings for the adjustments will be automatically reflected on the display.

6-8 Special Screens

6-8-7

USB Device List

This function displays information about the devices connected to the PTs USB port.
Item
Device list
Driver list

Details
A list of the devices currently connected to the USB port is displayed.
A list of connectable USB devices that are supported by the NS
Series is displayed.

1. Select USB Device List from the Special Functions List Box, and press the START Button.

2. The USB Device List Window will be displayed.

A list of USB devices currently connected and a list of USB devices supported by the NS Series
are displayed. Press the Update Button to reconfirm the connected USB devices and refresh the
display.
3. Press the Return Button to return to the Special Screen.

6-53

6-8 Special Screens

6-8-8

Display Capture Data

Video capture data and screen capture data stored in a Memory Card can be displayed. Perform the following procedure under Special Screen Tab on the System Menu.
1. Select Display capture data from the Special Function List Box and press the START
Button.

2. The Capture Data Display Screen will be displayed.

1
5
3
4
2

6
7
8
9
10
11

1
2
3

No.

Item
Data
File name
Display

Delete

Details
Displays a BMP file stored in the LOG folder in the Memory Card.
Display the file name and time stamp of the BMP file.
Press the Display Button and then the bitmap to enlarge the display.
Press the Print Button to print the BMP file. Press the Full Screen
Button to display the BMP file in original format. The original display
divided into four areas will return if BACK is pressed.
The following dialog box will appear if the Delete Button and then the
bitmap are pressed.

Press the Yes Button to delete the BMP. The capture display screen
will return if the No Button is pressed.

6-54

6-8 Special Screens

No.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

6-8-9

Item
Back
Sort by name
(Ascending)
Sort by name
(Descending)
From Old Date &
Time
From New Date
& Time
< Button and
> Button
<< Button and
>> Button

Details
Press to return to the Special Screens Tab Page.
Press to sort the bitmap file names alphabetically.
Press to sort the bitmap file names reversed alphabetically.
Press to sort the bitmap file names starting from the oldest one.
Press to sort the bitmap file names starting from the newest one
Press to display the next or previous page (4 files) of bitmaps.
Press to display the page back or forward by 3 pages (12 files) of bitmaps.

Memory Card Transfers

With a Memory Card is inserted into the PT, please perform the following procedures using
the Special Screens Tab Page of the System Menu. You can manually transfer screen data
and system programs without manipulating the DIP switch on the PT. The Memory Card can
be used to transfer data in the following situations.

To transfer data to or from a Memory Card already inserted to save or read data such as
data logs and captured data.
To transfer data after replacing a Memory Card already inserted to save data such as data
logs and captured data with a Memory Card for data transfer.
To transfer data after inserting a Memory Card to a PT without one.
Perform the following procedures as required by the application.

Transferring Data to a Memory Card in the PT

No special action is required prior to transferring data to the Memory Card.

Replacing a Memory Card in the PT with Another Memory Card Used to

Save Data
Use the following procedure to replace the Memory Card already in the PT with another
Memory Card that will be used to save data. Perform the following procedure from the Initialize Tab Page of the System Menu. Remove the Memory Card that is currently inserted, and
insert another one.
1. Press the Remove Button next to Memory Card of the Initialize Tab Page.
2. Confirm that it is safe to remove the Memory Card, and remove it from the PT.
3. Insert the Memory Card that will be used to save data into the PT.

Inserting a Memory Card into a PT without One

Insert the Memory Card into the PT.

Transferring Memory Card Data

Use the following procedure from the Special Screen Tab Page of the System Menu to transfer data to Memory Card. Press the EXIT Button at the top left of the Memory Card Transfer
screen to reset the PT.
1. Select Memory Card Transfer from the Special Functions list, and press the Start Button.

6-55

6-8 Special Screens

2. A Memory Card transfer will be executed, and the following screen will be displayed on
the PT.

3. Specify the direction (download or upload), contents (Project, Project & System, or System), and banks. The IPP file name and system version that are stored in both the specified bank of the Memory Card and the PT will be displayed in the Project File and System
Version Fields. After confirming the details, press the Go Button.
4. The following screen will be displayed if data transfer security has been set for the project
data stored in the PT to protect the project data in the PT from unauthorized data transfers. Input the password and press the ENTER Button.

5. A message confirming the transfer will be displayed. Press the OK Button to execute the
specified data transfer operation. When downloading, the screen data previously stored in
the PT will be deleted. Also, specify whether or not to delete the log data.
Note

Always clear the log data for the following.

When changing settings related to alarms, events, or the data logs.
When transferring a different project to the PT.

6. A warning message will be displayed if the PT model, system program/screen data versions, or language for the data stored in the PT are different from that for the data stored
in the Memory Card. Press the Yes Button to continue transferring the data.
7. The uploading/downloading screen will be displayed while data is being transferred. A
screen indicating that the transfer has been completed will be displayed when the transfer
has finished. (If an error occurs, a transfer error screen will be displayed. Refer to page
3-25 if an error occurs.)
8. The indicator will flash green and the following screen will be displayed when the transfer
is completed.

9. If you want to continue using the Memory Card, press the Reset Button to reset the PT.
If you remove or replace the Memory Card, press the Reset Button immediately after removal
or replacement to reset the PT.

6-56

6-8 Special Screens

The system settings (System Settings on CX-Designer) cannot be changed for uploading.
Note

Please refer to the procedure above for removing a Memory Card when transferring data
and always follow the messages displayed on the PT. If a Memory Card is removed at the
wrong time, the data that has been transferred may not work properly.
The data that can be transferred using the Memory Card Transfer operation on the System
Menu is only the screen and system program data can be manually transferred with a
Memory Card inserted. The DIP switch on the PT must be manipulated to insert a Memory
Card and automatically upload/download screen or system program data. Refer to 3-6 Using Memory Cards for details.

6-8-10 External Application Startup

This function closes the regular work screen and starts up an external application, such as
the Programming Console function or Ladder Monitor.
The following describes the procedure for starting up external applications. Refer to the individual manual for more details on functions and operations applicable to the application. Refer
to 2-18-11 Programming Console Functions in the NS-Series PT Programming Manual for
more details.
Start up an external application by using operations from the Special Screen Tab in the
System Menu as follows:
1. Select an external application from the Special Functions List Box, and press the START Button.
The following diagram shows the screen with Ladder Monitor selected.

2. The NS-series PT resets.

3. The NS-series PT reboots, and the selected application starts up.

If an application displays a message, refer to its manual.

Reference

Device monitor, Communication Test, Video Configuration, USB Device List,

Display Capture Data, and PLC Data Trace are not external applications. The screen
in the System Menu switches when you press the START button with one of these
selected, but the NS-series PT does not reset.

6-8-11 Version Display

This function displays information on the PT version.
Display the Version Display Screen by using operations from the Special Screen Tab Page
in the System Menu, as follows:
1. Press the System Version Button to switch to the Version Display Screen.
2. The product model and version will be displayed.

6-57

6-8 Special Screens

3. Press the Back Button to return to the Special Screen.

6-8-12 PLC Data Trace (NS12, NS10, and NS8 Only)

The PLC Data Trace function uses the data trace function within a CS/CJ-series PLC (CPU
Unit) and displays the results of the PLCs data trace at the PT.
After receiving the data trace execution command from the NS-series PT, the PLC establishes the specified trigger condition, reads the specified bits status according to the sampling conditions, and stores the sampled data in the CPU Units Trace Memory.
The PT reads the data stored in the PLC and displays that data on the screen as a time chart.
The PLC Data Trace function can be used in the NS12, NS10, and NS8 PTs only.
NS-series PT
(NS12, NS10 or NS8)

Results
Execute PLC
Data Trace

CPU Unit

Stored data trace results

This section only explains how to open the PLC Data Trace Screen. Refer to 2-18 Special
Functions in the NS Series Programming Manual for details on the specifications and operation of the data trace function,.
Note

6-58

The data trace function is supported by the CS/CJ-series PLCs (except CP-series PLCs). This
function cannot be used with other PLC models.

6-8 Special Screens

Display the PLC Data Trace Screen by using operations from the Special Screen Tab Page in
the System Menu, as follows:
1. Select PLC Data Trace from the Special Functions List Box, and press the START Button.

2. The PLC Data Trace Screen will be displayed.

3. Press the Back Button to return to RUN mode.

6-59

6-9 Hardware Check

6-9 Hardware Check

The hardware check is used to check the following functions.
Item
LCD check
Touch switch check

6-9-1

Function
Checks the LCD.
Checks touch panel input.

LCD Check
This function checks whether the LCD (screen display) is operating normally.
Check the LCD by using operations from the Hardware Check Tab Page in the System Menu,
as follows:
1. Press the LCD Check Button to switch to the LCD Check Screen.

2. Press the Back Button to return to the Hardware Check Screen.

6-60

6-9 Hardware Check

6-9-2

Touch Switch Check

This function checks whether the touch switches are operating normally.
Check the touch panel by using operations from the Hardware Check Tab Page in the System
Menu, as follows:
1. Press the Touch Switch Check Button to switch to the Touch Switch Check Screen.
2. Press the screen. If the part of the screen touched is shown in inverse display, the touch switch
is operating normally.
The position touched
is shown in inverse
display.

3. Press the button in the top right corner to return to the Hardware Check Screen.

Reference Two points cannot be touched at the same time on the Touch Panel Check Screen.

6-61

6-10 Starting Operations

6-10 Starting Operations

The host and PT connected to it start operating after the project data has finished being
transferred and the System Menu settings (communications conditions with the host, etc.)
have been completed.
Note

Start actual operation only after sufficiently checking the operation of the screen data and
host programming.

Switching to RUN Mode and Starting Up

Pressing the Exit Button at the top right of the screen in the System Menu will display the
screen that was displayed before moving to the System Menu, change the status to RUN
mode, and start running the PT. The pop-up screens that were open before switching to the
System Menu, however, will not be displayed.
Reference The error message indicating a project read error will be displayed if the System Menu
is closed while screen data is being initialized. Always transfer the screen data from the
CX-Designer or Memory Card after initializing screen data.

Checking Communications with the Host

Execute the host program and check that the following operations are normal.

Check that the PT screens will switch according to the host program.
If the screen displays cannot be switched normally, check whether the PT and host are
connected properly, and whether the hardware settings are correct. For details, refer to
Section 4 Connecting the Host to the Serial Port or Section 5 Connecting to Host via
Ethernet or Controller Link.
Use the Support Software (CX-Programmer, etc.) to display the details on words and bits to
check that the results of PT button operations and numerical/character string input operations have been properly transmitted to the host.
If the operation results are not transmitted to the host properly, check the object settings.
Refer to the object descriptions in the PT Programming Manual for details on object settings.

6-62

6-10 Starting Operations

Communications Not Established with Host

Use the following procedure to check communications if the PT and host are not communicating normally.
Check cables

Check the cable models and cable pins.

Refer to Appendix 5 Preparing Connecting Cables.

Check PT settings

Check the communications settings under the System Menu.

Refer to 6-6 Communications Settings.

Check host settings

Check the host settings using the CX-Programmer or other Programming

Device. Refer to Section 4 Connecting the Host to Serial Port and Section 5
Connecting to Host via Ethernet or Controller Link.

Check connections host to PT

Check the connections between the PT and the host. Refer to Section 4
Connecting to the Host with Serial Port and Section 5 Connecting to Host via
Ethernet or Controller Link.

Check functional object

addresses

Note

Check the addresses and host names set for functional objects. Be
sure that all address settings are within range.

The whole system may stop, depending on the method used to turn the power ON and OFF.
Always follow the specified procedure when turning the power ON or OFF.

6-63

Section 7
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
This section describes the maintenance and inspection methods for preventing errors occurring,
and troubleshooting measures when errors occur in the PT.

7-1 Maintenance....................................................................................................................... 7-2

7-1-1 Replacing the Battery ............................................................................................... 7-2
7-2 Inspection and Cleaning..................................................................................................... 7-4
7-3 Troubleshooting and Maintenance..................................................................................... 7-6
7-4 Requesting a Replacement PT ......................................................................................... 7-14

7-1 Maintenance

7-1 Maintenance
Perform maintenance operations to maintain the PT in optimum condition.

Do not attempt to take the Unit apart and do not

touch any internal parts while the power is being
supplied. Doing either of these may result in electrical shock.

Backing up Project Data

Always back up project data and store it in a safe place when the PT malfunctions and needs
to be sent out for repair, or when replacing the Unit.

Spare Units
Prepare a spare PT to allow quick recovery of the system at such times as when the PT malfunctions, or the service life of the backlight has expired causing poor screen visibility.

Backlight
The backlight must be replaced when the brightness of the display backlight dims and the
display becomes difficult to see. The backlight cannot be replaced by the user.
Contact your nearest OMRON representative.

Backlight Replacement Guidelines

Replace the backlight according to the following guidelines under normal conditions.
After 50,000 hours of use at room temperature and humidity, (or after approximately
40,000 hours if an NS8-V1 PT is used.)
The service life of the backlight will be especially shortened if used in a low-temperature environment. Replace the backlight when the brightness dims and the display becomes difficult to
see.

7-1-1

Replacing the Battery

Use a lithium battery to back up data other than screen data, such as calendar, clock, and log
data.
The battery service life is approximately five years at 25C. The service life will be shortened
if the battery is used at higher temperatures. Replace the battery periodically, according to
the operating environment.
Keep a spare battery available, so that the battery can be replaced immediately when required.

Battery Models
CJ1W-BAT01

7-2

7-1 Maintenance

Replacement Guidelines
The guidelines for replacing the battery are as follows:

Replace when five years have lapsed since a new battery was installed in the Unit.
Replace within five days after the RUN indicator lights orange.
Note

Never use batteries that have been subjected to a severe shock, such as being dropped on
the ground. Batteries subjected to shock may leak.
When mounting the battery, be sure to use the correct battery and mount it correctly.

Replacement Method
Perform the following procedure within five minutes to replace the battery.
The shape of the battery cover and the direction for installing the connector depend on the
PT model.
1. After power to the PT has been turned ON and at least five minutes have lapsed, turn
OFF the power.
2. Open the battery cover on the rear panel of the PT.
3. Remove the battery that is secured inside the PT, grasp the cable, and pull the connector
out vertically to remove it.

4. Connect the new battery connector, and insert the battery into the battery holder in the
battery cover.

5. Close the battery cover, being careful not to squash the battery cable.

7-3

7-2 Inspection and Cleaning

7-2 Inspection and Cleaning

Clean and inspect the PT periodically to maintain it in optimum condition for use.

Cleaning Methods
The screen visibility will be impaired if the display becomes dirty. Clean the display periodically using the following methods:

For daily cleaning, wipe with a soft, dry cloth. Attempting to remove heavy dirt with the
cloth may scratch the front panel sheet. Use a damp cloth and wipe the surface again to
remove dirt.
If dirt cannot be removed using a dry cloth, dampen the cloth sufficiently with a neutral
cleaning agent solution (approximately 2%), squeeze the cloth out, and then wipe the surface.
Materials such as rubber, vinyl, or tape that are attached to the Unit will leave stains if left
for a long time. If such material is attached to the Unit, remove when cleaning.
Note

Never use benzene, thinner, or other volatile solvents, or chemical cloths to clean the PT.

Inspection Methods
Inspect the PT once every six to twelve months. Shorten the interval between inspections
when using the PT in extreme conditions, such as under high temperatures, high humidity, or
environments subject to large quantities of dust.

7-4

7-2 Inspection and Cleaning

Inspection Items
Inspect the PT for the following items to check whether the PT is operating within the specified criteria. If the PT is outside the criteria, use measures such as improving the operating
environment to conform to the standards, or tightening screws.
Inspection
items
Power
supply
Ambient
environment

Mounting
conditions

Parts with
limited
service life

Note

Inspection details
Power terminal voltage
fluctuation
Ambient temperature
(temperature in control panel)
Ambient humidity
(temperature in control panel)
Presence of dust
Presence of oil

Criteria

Allowable voltage range

(24 VDC 15%)
0 to 50C
(Refer to Appendix 1.)
35% to 85%
(Refer to Appendix 1.)
No dust accumulated.
No oil between front panel sheet
and molding.
Looseness of fixed mounting Specified torque.
bracket
Connection status of
Fully inserted, locked, and with
Connecting Cable
No looseness.
Connectors
Looseness of external wiring No looseness.
screws
Status of external connecting No breaks or other damage
cables
Backlight brightness
Sufficient brightness.
Backlight life (at room temperature of 25C) is 50,000 hours,
as a guideline.
Battery
5 years (at room temperature of
25C).

Inspection means
Tester
Thermometer
Temperature meter
Visual inspection
Visual inspection
Phillips screwdriver
Phillips screwdriver

Phillips screwdriver
Visual inspection,
tester
Visual inspection

Replace every 5
years

Do not disassemble, repair, or modify the PT.

Follow all local government regulations, where applicable, when disposing of the Unit and
used batteries.

7-5

7-3 Troubleshooting and Maintenance

7-3 Troubleshooting and Maintenance

When an error occurs while operating the PT, search for the symptom in the following table
and take measures according to those provided.
Errors during Data Transfer
Symptoms at
PT
Serial transfer
not possible
between CXDesigner and
PT.

Personal
computer
cannot detect
PT when
connected via
USB.

Timeout
occurs during
screen transfer using USB.

Causes
The CX-Designer is
not connected to
the PT.
The Expansion Interface for serial
port B is set to the
expansion interface
(NS5 only).

Measures
Check the wiring conditions of the connecting cable.
(Refer to 3-3 Connecting the CX-Designer.)
Set the Expansion Interface to Disable on the Comm Tab
Page from the NS5 System Menu.

The installed PT
system is using
system program
lower than Ver. 6.2.

Install system program Ver. 6.2 or higher in the PT.

The PT has a lot

number earlier than
that indicated in
3-3-2 Connecting
via USB.

Use a PT from the lot number (or later) indicated in 3-3-2

Connecting via USB.

The USB cable is

longer than 2 m.

To use a cable longer than 2 m, connect a USB Hub between the PT and personal computer as shown in Connection Methods under in 3-3-2 Connecting via USB.

A malfunction has
occurred due to
external noise.

Configure the USB Hub and wire the USB cables taking
measures to prevent noise.

The USB cable is

longer than 2 m.

To use a cable longer than 2 m, connect a USB Hub between the PT and personal computer as shown in Connection Methods under in 3-3-2 Connecting via USB.

A malfunction has
occurred due to
external noise.

Configure the USB Hub and wire the USB cables taking
measures to prevent noise.

Errors during PT Startup

Symptoms at
PT
Indicators do
not light.

The indicator
is lit orange
and the screen
is blank.

7-6

Causes

Measures

Power is not being

supplied to the PT.
The fuse is broken.

Check the connection points and supply power to the PT

correctly. (Refer to 3-1 Installing the PT.)
The PT needs repair. Contact your nearest OMRON representative.
The PT may be faulty. Contact your nearest OMRON representative.

The system
program is corrupted (fatal error).
The system
program is
corrupted (fatal
error).
The Memory Card
cannot be recognized.

The PT may be faulty. Contact your nearest OMRON representative.

Use a Memory Card specified by OMRON. (Refer to 3-6

Using Memory Cards.)

7-3 Troubleshooting and Maintenance

Symptoms at
PT
The indicator
is lit green and
the screen is
blank.

The indicator
is flashing
green and the
buzzer repeatedly turns
ON and OFF.
The screen is
blank and the
indicator is
flashing green.
The screen is
blank and the
indicator is
flashing red.

The indicator
is lit red and
the screen is
blank.

Causes
The system program is corrupted
(non-fatal error).
The combination of
NS-series PT
hardware and system program version is incorrect.
In the following
cases, project data
was downloaded
without clearing the
log data saved in
the NS.
A project was
downloaded to
the NS-series PT
in which settings
related to history,
such as alarm/
event or data log
settings, have
been changed.
An attempt was
made to
download a project that was different from the
project saved in
the NS.
The backlight has
malfunctioned.

Measures
Recovery/update the system program. (Refer to 3-6 Using
Memory Cards.)
Contact your nearest OMRON representative if the same
problem occurs after recovering/updating the system program.

Download the project data again. When downloading the

project data again, be sure to clear the log data saved in
the NS.

The backlight must be replaced. Contact your nearest

OMRON representative.

Automatic upload/
download has
ended normally.

This is not an error. Turn OFF all the DIP switch pins and
turn ON the power to the PT again.

Automatic upload/download has

ended abnormally.

The system program may be corrupted. Reinstall the system program.

(Refer to 3-6 Using Memory Cards.)
If the same problem occurs after reinstalling the system
program, the PT may be faulty. Contact your nearest
OMRON representative.
An attempt may have been made to transfer screens that
are larger than the memory of the PT. Check the screen
data at the transfer destination.
Reinstall the system program. (Refer to 3-6 Using Memory
Cards.)
If the same problem occurs after reinstalling the system
program, the PT may be faulty. Contact your nearest
OMRON representative.

The PT is faulty,
or the system
program is
corrupted.

7-7

7-3 Troubleshooting and Maintenance

Errors during PT Powerup

7-8

Message
FATAL ERROR No. 01:
Touch Panel is not connected: Please contact your
OMRON service center.

Cause
Touch panel error.

FATAL ERROR No. 02:

SRAM Initialization Error:
Please contact your
OMRON service center.

Hardware error in log SRAM.

FATAL ERROR No. 03:

MAC Address Error: Please
contact your OMRON service center.

Incorrect MAC address.

FATAL ERROR No. 04: PT

Model type Identify Error:
Please contact your
OMRON service center.
ERROR No. 10: File System
Error: Please recover the
system program.

Built-in model code cannot be

read.

Contact your nearest OMRON

representative.

File system is corrupted.

(A hardware fault occurred or
power was interrupted during
writing.)

Reinstall the system program by

inserting the Memory Card containing the recovery program in
the PT and resetting the PT or
turning the power supply OFF
and ON again. (Refer to 3-6
Using Memory Cards in the
Setup Manual.)
When the PT contains a readonly file, do a clean installation.
After the clean installation, verify
that the project data does not
contain any read-only files and
transfer the project data.
If the same problem occurs after
reinstalling the system program,
contact your nearest OMRON
representative.

ERROR No. 10: Fail in loading files or executing

program: Please recover the
system program.

File reading or program

execution failed.

ERROR No. 10: Fail in loading files: Please recover the

system program.

File reading failed.

ERROR No. 11: Fail in loading files: Please reinstall the

system program.

File reading failed.

ERROR No. 11: Device

check program error: Please
reinstall the system program.

Hardware check program is

corrupted.

ERROR No. 11: SRAM

check program error: Please
reinstall the system program.

Log SRAM check program is

corrupted.

ERROR No. 11: IP Address

Setting Error: Please reinstall the system program.

IP address setting program is

corrupted.

A read-only file is being

transferred to the PT.

Possible countermeasure
Contact your nearest OMRON
representative.

Execute automatic download of

the system program. If the same
problem occurs after downloading, insert the Memory Card containing the recovery program in
the PT and reset the PT or turn
the power supply OFF and ON
again. (Refer to 3-6 Using Memory Cards in the Setup Manual.)
If the same problem occurs after
reinstalling the system program,
contact your nearest OMRON
representative.

7-3 Troubleshooting and Maintenance

Message
ERROR No. 11: Device
check program error: Touch
the screen to continue.

Cause
At startup with DIP switch 6 set
to ON, the hardware check program is corrupted.

ERROR No. 12: Fail in loading fonts: Please reinstall

the system program.

Reading of font files when operation performed with DIP

switch 6 set to ON failed.

ERROR No. 12: Installed

system program is not applicable for this hardware:
Please reinstall the system
program.

The installed system program

does not match the hardware.

WARNING No. 20: Date and

Time are not set: Touch the
screen to continue.
WARNING No. 21: SRAM
previously broken
Initialization Complete:
Touch the screen to continue.
WARNING No. 22: Memory
Card Error: Some files in a
memory card may be corrupted. Safely remove the
memory card, and check
whether files are not corrupted on a computer.
You can continue to startup
the PT by touching on the
screen, however, it may
NOT operate correctly when
accessing to the memory
card. (The same message
will also be displayed in
Japanese. This is not a
fault.)

Date set outside the PTs allowable range of 2000 to 2049.

SRAM contents could not be
held because the battery was
not connected or there was insufficient capacity. For this reason, SRAM was initialized.
The two following causes are
possible:
The previous time the PT was
used, power was turned OFF
while accessing the Memory
Card.
Memory Card access safety
information could not be held
because the battery was connected or there was insufficient
capacity.

Possible countermeasure
The Memory Card transfer program started up after this can be
used. If operation is not restored
after continuing with the Memory
Card transfer program, insert the
Memory Card containing the recovery program in the PT and
reset the PT or turn the power
supply OFF and ON again. (Refer to 3-6 Using Memory Cards in
the Setup Manual.) If the same
problem occurs after reinstalling
the system program, contact your
nearest OMRON representative.
Download the system program by
automatic download that does
not use DIP switch 6. If operation
is not restored after downloading,
insert the Memory Card containing the recovery system program
in BANK 1 in the PT. (Refer to 36 Using Memory Cards in the
Setup Manual.) If the same problem occurs after reinstalling the
system program, contact your
nearest OMRON representative.
Touch the touch panel to continue booting. Then set the correct date in the System Menu.
Touch the touch panel to continue booting. Replace the battery the next time power is turned
OFF.
Touch the touch panel to continue booting. When the Memory
Card is accessed, however, the
PT may not operate normally.

7-9

7-3 Troubleshooting and Maintenance

Message
WARNING No. 23: Screen
data file(s) is not correct:
Touch the screen to continue and transfer screen
data again.

Cause
The PT screen data is corrupted. (The cable was disconnected or the power was turned
OFF during screen data transfer).

Possible countermeasure
Touch the PTs touch panel, and
after connecting is displayed at
the bottom right of the screen, or
after the message "No project
data is registered. Press OK button and download project data."
is displayed, reattempt screen
transfer.

Errors while Connecting to the Host

Symptoms at
PT
PT cannot
communicate
with the host.
(An error message is displayed or connecting is displayed at the
bottom right of
the screen.)

7-10

Causes

Measures

The settings for

Ethernet connection,
such as node number,
network number, and
IP address, are not
set correctly.
The protocol settings
for the host and the
settings at the PT do
not match.
The PT is not connected to the host
properly.
For 1:N NT Link connections, two or more
Units have the same
unit number.
With the NS5, the
Expansion Interface
for serial port B is set
to the expansion interface when the connection is to serial
port B.

Set the settings correctly, referring to Section 5 Connecting to Host via Ethernet or Controller Link.

Set the communications settings using the CX-Designer.

Check that the type, length, and wiring of the connecting

cables meet the specifications.
(Refer to Section 4 Connecting the Host to Serial Port.)
Reset so that each Unit has a unique unit number.
(Refer to 6-6 Communications Settings.)

Set the Expansion Interface to Disable on the Comm Tab

Page from the NS5 System Menu.

7-3 Troubleshooting and Maintenance

Errors during PT Operation

Symptoms at
PT
RUN indicator
does not light.
The screen is
blank.

Causes

Measures

Power is not being

supplied to the PT.
The fuse is broken.
The PT is in system
startup waiting
status.
The screen saver
function is operating.

Check the connection points and supply power to the PT

correctly. (Refer to 3-1 Installing the PT.)
Contact your nearest OMRON representative.
This is not an error. Information will be displayed when the
waiting time has lapsed.

The backlight is
OFF.

The display
update is slow.

The backlight has

malfunctioned.
Screen switching,
opening and closing
pop-up screens,
and switching
frames are being
performed frequently.
The message communications interval
is too long.

Screens are
slow to
change.

Communications
are not possible
with the host.

The touch
panel does not
respond.

PT has malfunctioned due to external noise.

The touch panel is
damaged.

The display is
dark.

The brightness setting is too low.

The backlight is
faulty or its service
life has expired.

This is not an error. Touch the screen, or operate the system memory for switching the screen from the host to
switch the screen as follows:
Set the screen number in $SW0.
Set the pop-up screen number in $SW1, 4 and 7.
(Refer to 2-4 System Memory in the PT Programming Manual for details on the system memory.)
Turn ON the backlight by setting system memory bits $SB6
to 8 for adjusting backlight brightness to ON. (Refer to 2-4
System Memory in the PT Programming Manual for details
on the system memory.)
The backlight must be replaced. Contact your nearest
OMRON representative.
If screens are opened and closed frequently, the display
update may take some time and communications may be
delayed.
Adjust the interval between screen switches so that the
system is not overloaded.

In the CX-Designer, select PT - Communication Setting,

click the Comm-All Tab, and set a shorter communications
interval. (For details, refer to System Settings and Project
Properties in the CX-Designers Online Help.)
If a communications error is displayed, refer to 5-2-7 Communication Errors and Countermeasures in the NS Series
Programmable Terminals PROGRAMMING MANUAL
(Cat. No. V073)
Communications errors will not be displayed if automatic
recovery is set for communications. If automatic recovery is
set, check if communications with the host are possible
using the communications test on the System Menu. If
more than one host is registered, test communications with
all of the hosts.
Reset the PT, and wire it according to noise prevention
measures.
Test the touch panel using the hardware check in the System Menu. If an error has occurred, contact your nearest
OMRON representative.
Increase the backlight brightness in the PT Tab Page of the
System Menu.
The backlight must be replaced. Contact your nearest
OMRON representative.

7-11

7-3 Troubleshooting and Maintenance

Symptoms at
PT
Cannot enter
the device
monitor function.

Causes
The communications settings are
incorrect.

The PLC does not

support the device
monitor function.

Measures
When using the device monitor, set the communications
mode as follows:
C-series PLCs:
1:1 NT Link or 1:N NT Links
CS1-series PLCs:
1:N NT Links (normal, high speed)
The device monitor function is not supported for Ethernet
or Controller Link.
The PLCs that support the device monitor function are restricted. Check the PLC model being used.
(Refer to 6-8-4 Device Monitor.)

Errors during Object Operation

Symptoms at
PT
The numerical
and character
string update
is slow.

7-12

Causes
Communications
are unstable due to
external noise.
There are too many
Numeral Display &
Input objects and
String Display &
Input objects in the
display.
For RS-422A communications, the
branch is incorrect
or the terminating
resistance is not
set properly.
The host is processing a large volume of data and
the cycle time is
long.
The message
communications
interval is too long.

Some objects
in the screen
configuration
are not displayed.

A communications
error has occurred.
The control flags
set in the object
include Hide Display Flags.

The Log Flag

display does
not match the
actual log timing.

The communications address set

for the event of log
timing is turning ON
and OFF at high
speed.

Measures
Perform noise countermeasures such as separating communications cables from power lines.
Reduce the number of Numeral Display & Input and String
Display & Input objects in the screen where update is slow.

Wire correctly, referring to Appendix 4 Using NS-AL002

Converters.

Shorten the host cycle time.

In the CX-Designer, select PT - Communication Setting,

click the Comm-All Tab, and set a shorter communications
interval. (For details, refer to System Settings and Project
Properties in the CX-Designers Online Help.)
Check the communications settings again.
Display the control flags for the objects set to be not displayed, as follows:
Display the Expansion Tab from the functional object property setting using the CX-Designer. Select Display from
Display/Hide in the Control Flags Tab Page.
Turn ON the indirect address of the control flag set for the
object.
Set the ON/OFF cycle of the communications address for
events to a longer time.

7-3 Troubleshooting and Maintenance

Symptoms at
PT
Cannot input
numerical
values.

Cannot input
for some functional objects.

Cannot input
to any functional object.
Cannot move
to System
Menu.
The list selection and bitmap object are
blank.

Causes
The numerical
value input upper
and lower limit
check function is
running.
The control flags
set in the objects
include Input Prohibit Flags.
A password has
been set.
PT is set to input
prohibit mode.
Moving to System
Menu is prohibited.
There is no reference file.
The number of
rows specified in
the first row of the
list selection is
above the maximum.

Measures
Display the Expansion Tab from the functional object property setting using the CX-Designer. Check the set values in
the Input Upper and Lower Limits Tab Page and correct if
necessary.
Display the Expansion Tab from the functional object property settings using the CX-Designer. Select Enable for Input
in the Control Flag Tab Page.
Turn ON the indirect address of the control flag set for the
object.
Input the password in the password input dialog box that is
displayed.
Set system memory bit $SB19 to OFF.
Touch the screen and input the password to cancel disabling inputs.
Set system memory bit $SB3 to OFF.

Use the CX-Designer to check whether the folder storing

project data contains a reference file, and resend the
screen data to the PT.
Set the number of rows to less than the maximum.

7-13

7-4 Requesting a Replacement PT

7-4 Requesting a Replacement PT

Always observe the following precautions when faults are detected during inspection and the
PT is to be replaced.

Create a backup of the PT project data.

Project data may be deleted when the PT is repaired by OMRON.
Always turn OFF the power before replacing the PT.
After replacing the PT, check to confirm that the new PT has no faults.
When returning a faulty PT for repair, include a document with the Unit that provides as
many details on the fault as possible, and send to your OMRON representative.

7-14

Appendices

Appendix 1 Specifications..................................................................................................... A-3

A-1-1 General Specifications............................................................................................. A-3
A-1-2 Characteristics ......................................................................................................... A-5
A-1-3 Communications Specifications .............................................................................. A-7

Appendix 2 Dimensions ...................................................................................................... A-10

Appendix 3 Using NS-AL002 Converters........................................................................... A-17
A-3-1 Dimensions............................................................................................................ A-17
A-3-2 Mounting and Removing....................................................................................... A-18
A-3-3 Specifications ........................................................................................................ A-18
A-3-4 DIP Switch Settings............................................................................................... A-19
A-3-5 Pin Arrangement.................................................................................................... A-20
A-3-6 Handling the Shield on RS-422A/485 Cables ....................................................... A-21
A-3-7 Connection Example ............................................................................................. A-24
Appendix 4 Using NT-AL001 Converters .......................................................................... A-25
A-4-1 Dimensions............................................................................................................ A-25
A-4-2 Methods for Mounting and Removal .................................................................... A-25
A-4-3 Specifications ........................................................................................................ A-27
A-4-4 DIP Switch Settings............................................................................................... A-28
A-4-5 Pin Arrangement.................................................................................................... A-29
A-4-6 Block Diagram ...................................................................................................... A-30
Appendix 5 Preparing Connecting Cables........................................................................... A-31
A-5-1 Cable Preparation .................................................................................................. A-31
A-5-2 Soldering ............................................................................................................... A-32
A-5-3 Hood Assembly ..................................................................................................... A-32
A-5-4 Preparing Connecting Cables for Host Connection............................................... A-33
Appendix 6 Preparing Cables for Computer Connection ................................................... A-37
A-6-1 Connecting Cable Assembly ................................................................................. A-37
Appendix 7 Preparing Connecting Cables for Bar Code Readers ....................................... A-39
Appendix 8 Standard Models .............................................................................................. A-40
Appendix 9 List of Optional Products................................................................................. A-53
A-9-1 Anti-reflection Sheets: NS12-KBA04, NS7-KBA04, NT30-KBA04 ................... A-53
A-9-2 Protective Covers: NS12-KBA05(N), NS7-KBA05(N), NT31C-KBA05(N)...... A-53
A-9-3 NT30-KBA01 Chemical-resistant Cover .............................................................. A-54
A-9-4 Replacement Battery: CJ1W-BAT01 .................................................................... A-55
A-9-5 Recommended Memory Cards .............................................................................. A-55

A-1

A-9-6 NS-CLK21 Controller Link Interface Unit ........................................................... A-56

A-9-7 NS-CA001/CA002 Video Input Unit .................................................................... A-56
A-9-8 Attachments: NS12-ATT01(B)/ NS12-ATT02/NS8-ATT01/NS8-ATT02........... A-56
Appendix 10 System Memory List........................................................................................ A-57
Appendix 11 Differences between "-V1"/"-V2" Models and Other Models......................... A-60
Appendix 12 NS5 System Menu ........................................................................................... A-62

Appendix 1 Specifications

Appendix 1
A-1-1

Specifications

General Specifications
Specifications
Item

NS12-TS0@-V1
NS12-TS0@-V2

NS10-TV0@-V1
NS10-TV0@-V2

NS8-TV@@-V1
NS8-TV0@-V2

NS5-SQ0@-V1
NS5-SQ0@-V2
NS5-TQ0@-V2
NS5-MQ0@-V2

Rated power supply volt- 24 VDC

age
Allowable voltage range 20.4 to 27.6 VDC (24 VDC 15%)
Allowable input power
No restriction.
interruption time
Power consumption
25 W max
15 W max.
Ambient operating
0 to 50C (See notes 1, 2, and 3.)
temperature
Storage temperature
20 to 60C (See note 2.)
Ambient operating
35% to 85% (0 to 40C) with no condensation
humidity
35% to 60% (40 to 50C) with no condensation
Operating environment
No corrosive gases.
Noise immunity
Conforms to IEC61000-4-4, 2 KV (power lines)
2
Vibration resistance
10 to 57 Hz with 0.075 mm amplitude and 57 to 150 Hz with 9.8 m/s acceleration for
(during operation)
30 min in each of X, Y, and Z directions
2
Shock resistance
147 m/s 3 times in each of X, Y, and Z directions.
(during operation)
Dimensions
315 241 48.5 mm (W H D)
232 177 48.5 mm 195 142 54 mm
(W H D)
(W H D) Width
Panel cutout dimensions Width 302 +10
Width 302 +10
Width 220.5 +0.50
184 +0.50 Height
Height 228 +10 mm
Height 228 +10 mm
Height 165.5 +0.50 mm 131 +0.50 mm
Panel thickness:
Panel thickness:
Panel thickness:
Panel thickness:
1.6 to 4.8 mm
1.6 to 4.8 mm
1.6 to 4.8 mm
1.6 to 4.8 mm
Weight
2.5 kg max.
2.0 kg max.
1.0 kg max.
Enclosure rating
Front panel: Equivalent to IP65F (NEMA4) (See note 4.)
Battery life
5 years (at 25C)
The SRAM and RTC will be backed up for 5 days after the battery runs low (indicator lights
orange).
The SRAM and RTC will be backed up by a super capacitor for 5 minutes after removing
the old battery (i.e., after turning ON power after 5 minutes).
International standards
UL 1604 Class 1 Division 2, EC Directives
Note 1. The operating temperature is subject to the following restrictions, depending on the
mounting angle and whether an Expansion Unit is installed or not.
Without any Expansion Unit Installed
- NS12-V1/-V2, NS10-V1/-V2, NS8-V1/-V2
Mounting angle of 0 to less than 30 to the horizontal:
Operating temperature range of 0 to 45C
Mounting angle of 30 to 90 or less to the horizontal:
Operating temperature range of 0 to 50C
- NS5-V1/-V2
Mounting angle of 0 to 90 or less to the horizontal:
Operating temperature range of 0 to 50C

A-3

Appendix 1 Specifications

With an Expansion Unit (Video Input Unit or Controller Link Unit) Installed
- NS12-V1/-V2, NS10-V1/-V2
Mounting angle of 0 to less than 30 to the horizontal:
Operating temperature range of 0 to 35C
Mounting angle of 30 to 90 or less to the horizontal:
Operating temperature range of 0 to 50C
- NS8-V1/-V2
Mounting angle of 0 to less than 30 to the horizontal:
Operating temperature range of 0 to 35C
Mounting angle of 30 to less than 90 to the horizontal:
Operating temperature range of 0 to 45C
Mounting angle of 90 to the horizontal:
Operating temperature range of 0 to 50C

2.

Operate the PT within the temperature and humidity ranges shown in the following diagram.
90

Display surface
30

Humidity (RH)

Wet-bulb temperature (C)

Horizontal 0

Storage
Operating

Temperature (C)

3. When a STN LCD display device is used (NS5-SQ
-V1/-V2 or NS5-MQ
-V2), the display quality will decline (e.g., the contrast ratio will be reduced) if the temperature exceeds 40C. Also, when the temperature drops, the response speed is lowered due to
characteristics of liquid crystals.
4. May not be applicable in locations with long-term exposure to oil.

A-4

Appendix 1 Specifications

A-1-2

Characteristics

Display Specifications
Specifications
Item
Display
Display device
panel
Number of dots
(See note 5.)
Display color

Display area

View angle

Backlight
Life expectancy
(See note 4.)
Brightness
adjustment
Backlight error
detection

Front panel
indicators

RUN

Item
Display
panel
Display device
(See note 5.)
Number of dots
Display color

Display area
View angle

NS12-TS0@-V1 NS10-TV0@-V1
NS12-TS0@-V2 NS10-TV0@-V2
High-definition TFT color LCD

NS8-TV@@-V1

NS8-TV0@-V2

800 dot horizontal 640 dot horizontal 480 dot vertical

600 dot vertical

256 colors (32,768 colors for BMP/JPEG images, NS5: 4,096 colors for
BMP/JPEG images)
Width 246.0 mm Width 215.2 mm Width 162.2 mm Width 170.9 mm
height
height
height
height
184.5 mm
162.4 mm
121.7 mm
128.2 mm
(12.1 inches)
(10.4 inches)
(8.0 inches)
(8.4 inches)
Left/right 60,
Left/right 60,
Left/right 65,
Left/right 60,
Top 45,
Top 35,
Top 50,
Top 50,
Bottom
Bottom 65
Bottom 60
Bottom 60
-V1: 55,
-V2: 75
50,000 hours min. (See note 1.)

40,000 hours min. 50,000 hours min.

(See note 1.)
(See note 1.)

There are 3 levels of adjustment by operating the touch panel.

(See note 2.)
Error is detected automatically,
No detection
Error is detected
and the RUN indicator flashes
function.
automatically,
green as notification. (See note 3.)
and the RUN
indicator flashes
green as
notification.
(See note 3.)
Lit green:
PT is operating normally.
Flashing green: The Memory Card transfer has ended normally or a
backlight error was detected immediately after power
was turned ON. (Backlight errors are not detected for
the NS8-V1.)
Lit orange:
Immediately after power turns ON, indicates file
system check in progress, battery low, or disconnected and operating normally.
Flashing orange: Memory Card transfer in progress.
Flashing red:
Memory Card transfer has ended abnormally.
Specifications
NS5-SQ0@-V1
STN color LCD

NS5-SQ0@-V2
STN color LCD

NS5-TQ0@-V2

NS5-MQ0@-V2

High-definition
TFT color LCD

Monochrome
STN LCD

256 colors
(32,768 colors
for BMP/JPEG
images)

Monochrome/16
grayscale levels

320 dot horizontal 240 dot vertical

256 colors (4,096 colors for

BMP/JPEG images)

Width 117.2 mm Height 88.4 mm (5.7 inches)

Left/right 50,
Left/right 70,
Left/right 50,
Top 30,
Top 45,
Top 70,
Bottom 50
Bottom 50
Bottom 50

Left/right 45,
Top 20,
Bottom 40

A-5

Appendix 1 Specifications

Backlight
Life expectancy
(See note 4.)
Brightness
adjustment
Backlight error
detection
Front panel RUN

indicators

50,000 hours min. 75,000 hours min. (See note 1.)

(See note 1.)

50,000 hours min.

(See note 1.)

There are 3 levels of adjustment by operating the touch panel. (See

note 2.)
No detection
Error is detected automatically, and the RUN indicafunction.
tor flashes green as notification. (See note 3.)
Lit green:
PT is operating normally.
Flashing green: The Memory Card transfer has ended normally or a
backlight error was detected immediately after power
was turned ON. (Backlight errors are not detected for
the NS5-V1.)
Lit orange:
Immediately after power turns ON, indicates file system check in progress, battery low, or disconnected
and operating normally.
Flashing orange: Memory Card transfer in progress.
Flashing red:
Memory Card transfer has ended abnormally.

Note 1. This is the estimated time before brightness is reduced by half at room temperature and
humidity. It is not a guaranteed value. (It is based on the middle brightness setting using
the NS8.)
The life expectancy will be drastically shortened if PT is used at low temperatures. For
example, using the PT at temperatures of 0C will reduce the life expectancy to approximately 10,000 hours (reference value).
2. The brightness cannot be adjusted much.
3. This function does not detect service life expectancy.
It detects when the backlight is not lit due to a disconnection or other errors. Backlight error detection indicates that all backlights (2) are OFF.
4. Contact your nearest OMRON representative to replace the backlight.
5. There may be some defective pixels in the display. This is not a fault as long as the
numbers of defective light and dark pixels fall within the following standard ranges.
Model
NS12-TS@@-V1/-V2
NS10-TV@@-V1/-V2
NS8-TV@@-V1/-V2
NS5-SQ@@-V1/-V2
NS5-MQ@@-V1/-V2
NS5-TQ@@-V1/-V2

Standard range
Number of light and dark pixels:
10 or less. (Must not be 3 consecutive.)
Number of light and dark pixels:
4 or fewer defects the size of 0.2 < (minor axis + major axis)
/ 2 0.55 mm (within 1 per 20-mm square)

Operating Specifications
Specifications
Item

Touch panel
(Matrix type)

A-6

NS12-TS0@-V1/
NS12-TS0@-V2

NS10-TV0@-V1/
NS10-TV0@-V2

Method: Resistive membrane

Number of switches: Number of switches:
1900
1200
(50 horizontal 38 (40 horizontal 30
vertical)
vertical)
16 16 dots for
16 16 dots for
each switch.
each switch.
Input: Pressure-sensitive
Service life: 1,000,000 touch operations.

NS8-TV@@-V1/
NS8-TV@@-V2

NS5-SQ0@-V1
NS5-SQ0@-V2
NS5-TQ0@-V2
NS5-MQ0@-V2

Number of switches:
768
(32 horizontal 24
vertical)
20 20 dots for
each switch.

Number of switches:
300
(20 horizontal 15
vertical)
16 16 dots for
each switch.

Appendix 1 Specifications

Data Capacity Specifications

Specifications
Item

Standard
screen data
capacity

NS12-TS0@-V2
NS12-TS0@-V1
NS8-TV@@-V1 NS5-SQ0@-V1
NS10-TV0@-V2
NS10-TV0@-V1
NS8-TV0@-V2
60 MB

20 MB

NS8-TV0@-V1: 6 MB
6 MB
NS8-TV1@-V1:
20 MB

NS5-SQ0@-V2
NS5-TQ0@-V2
NS5-MQ0@-V2
20 MB

External Interface Specifications

Specifications
NS12-TS0@-V1/-V2
NS5-SQ0@-V2
Item
NS10-TV0@-V1/-V2
NS5-SQ0@-V1
NS5-TQ0@-V2
NS8-TV@@-V1/-V2
NS5-MQ0@-V2
USB HOST
1 port (for connecting printers)
None
USB Slave
1 port (screen data transfer, connected to personal computer)
Memory card
1 ATA-Compact Flash interface slot.
interface
Used to transfer and store screen data and to store history data.
Expansion interface For Expansion Interface Units
For Expansion Interface Units
(See note.)
Used to install a Controller Link Used to install Expansion Units specially
Interface Unit or Video Input Unit. designed for the NS5.
Note: This interface is for NS-series PTs only. Units not specified in this manual cannot be
installed.

Programming Device (Software for Creating Screen Data)

Item
Name
Model

A-1-3

Specifications
CX-Designer
NS-CXDC1-V@

Communications Specifications
Serial Communications
Item

Specifications
Conforms to EIA RS-232C.
D-Sub female 9-pin connector
5-V output (250 mA max.) through pin 6
(See note 1.)
Port B
Conforms to EIA RS-232C.
D-Sub female 9-pin connector (See note 2.)
5-V output (250 mA max.) through pin 6.
(See note 1.)
Note 1: The 5-V output of serial ports A and B cannot be used at the same time.
Note 2: With the NS5, the Expansion Interface on the Comm Tab Page in the System Menu settings can be set to use a communications port in the expansion interface connector. The
expansion interface, however, is a future expansion, which cannot yet be used. Always
use the serial port B connector (D-Sub female 9-pin connector).
Port A

A-7

Appendix 1 Specifications

1:1 NT Link
Item
Communications standards
Connectors
Number of Units connected
Transmission distance

Specifications
Conforms to EIA RS-232C.
D-Sub female 9-pin connector (Serial ports A and B)
1:1
Up to 15 m. (See note 1.)

1:N NT Links
Item
Communications standards
Connectors
Number of Units connected
Transmission distance

Specifications
Conforms to EIA RS-232C.
D-Sub female 9-pin connector
(Serial ports A and B)
1:1 to 8
Up to 15 m. (See note 2.)

Note 1. When using an NS-AL002 Adapter, the transmission distance is as follows:

RS-422A cable: Up to 500 m total extended length.
2. The NS-AL002 is required when connecting two or more PTs to the host.
RS-422A cable: Up to 500 m total extended length.

Bar Code Reader

Item
Communications
standards
Communications
settings

Ports that can be

connected
Number of Units
connected
Transmission distance
Communications
protocol
Data format
Power supply

Specifications
Conforms to EIA RS-232C.
Start-stop synchronization
Baud rate: 4,800, 9,600, or 19,200 bps
Data length: 7 or 8 bits
Stop bits: 1 or 2 bits
Parity: None, odd, or even
Flow control: RS/CS control
Either port A or port B only.
1:1
Using PT serial port and D-Sub 6-pin Using external power supply
2m
15 m
No protocol mode
[STX]

Data (0 to 254 bytes)

[ETX]

Using PT serial port and D-Sub 6-pin Using external power supply
5 V 5% 250 mA max.
Depends on Bar Code Reader
specifications.

Ethernet Specifications (NS12-TS01(B)-V1, NS10-TV01(B)-V1, NS8TV@1(B)-V1, NS5-SQ01(B)-V1, NS5-SQ01(B)-V2, NS5-TQ0@(B)-V2, NS5MQ0@(B)-V2)

Item
Conformance standards
Transmission medium
Transmission distance
Connector

A-8

Specifications
Conforms to IEEE 802.3 / Ethernet (10/100Base-T).
2 pair Cat 3 UTP 22 to 26AWG, Cat 5, Cat 5e, Cat 6
100 m (node-to-hub and hub-to-hub)
8-pin modular connector

Appendix 1 Specifications

Ethernet
Item
Network address
Node address
UDP port number
IP address
Subnet mask
Default gateway
IP proxy address
Conversion table

Specifications
1 to 127
1 to 254
1024 to 65535 (See note 1.)
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 (See note 2.)
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
(blank), 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
Node address: 1 to 253
IP address: 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
Note 1. The default UDP port number is 9600.
2. Do not set the following values for the IP address.
Host ID with all bits set to 0 or 1.
(Example: 192.168.21.0)
Net ID with all bits set to 0 or 1.
(Example: 255.255.21.16)
Subnet ID with all bits set to 1.
(Example: 192.168.255.16)
IP addresses that begin with 127. (Example: 127.35.21.16)

Controller Link Specifications (with NS-CLK21 Controller Link Interface

Unit Mounted)
Item
Communications
method
Code
Modulation
Synchronization
Transmission path
type
Baud rate and
maximum transmission distance
Media

Specification
N:N token bus
Manchester code
Baseband code
Flag synchronization (conforming to HDLC frames)
Multidrop (bus)
The maximum transmission distances depends on the baud rate setting as follows:
2 Mbits/s: 500 m
1 Mbits/s: 800 m
500 Kbits/s: 1 km
Specified shielded twisted-pair cable
2 signal lines and 1 shield
PLCs:
Connected via terminal block
Personal computers: Connected via special connector (provided)
32 modes

Connections to
nodes
Max. number of
nodes
Communications
Data links and message service
functions
Number of data link Transmission area per node:
words
1,000 words max. (2,000 bytes)
Send/receive data link areas per SYSMAC CS-series PLC:
12,000 words max. (24,000 bytes)
Send/receive data link areas per SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE,
CVM1, or CV-series PLC:
8,000 words max. (16,000 bytes)
Send/receive data link areas per personal computer:
32,000 words max. (64,000 bytes)
Total send data link words on entire network:
32,000 words max. (64,000 bytes)
Data link areas
Bit (CIO, and LR Area), data memory (DM Area), expansion data memory (EM
Area)
Message length
2,012 bytes max.
RAS functions
Polling unit backup function
Self-diagnosis (hardware check at startup)
Internode tests and broadcast test (via FINS commands)
Watchdog timer
Error log
Error correction
Manchester code check
CRC check (CCITT.X16+X12+X5+1)

A-9

Appendix 2 Dimensions

Appendix 2

Dimensions

NS12-V1/-V2, NS10-V1/-V2
(Includes Mounting Dimensions)

Mounting panel
Mounting bracket

min.
max.
(Unit: mm)

With Controller Link Interface Unit Mounted

A-10

With Video Input Unit Mounted

M o u n tin g p a n e l

M o u n tin g p a n e l

M o u n tin g b ra ck e t

M o u n tin g b ra c ke t

Appendix 2 Dimensions

NS12-V1/-V2, NS10-V1/-V2 Cable Connection Dimensions

NS12-V1/-V2 and NS10-V1/-V2 Video Board (NS-CA001) Mounted Dimensions

NS12-V1/-V2 and NS10-V1/-V2 Video Board (NS-CA002) Mounted Dimensions

A-11

Appendix 2 Dimensions

NS12-V1/-V2 and NS10-V1/-V2 Controller Link Interface Unit Mounted Dimensions

NS12/NS10 (without "V1") Cable Connection Dimensions

31.5
30.8

90.2

4.3

59.4

103

69.5

A-12

20
60

Appendix 2 Dimensions

NS8-V1/NS8-V2 Main Unit Dimensions (Mounted)

Mounting panel
Mounting bracket

39 min.
42 max.

(Unit: mm)

A-13

Appendix 2 Dimensions

NS8-V1/ NS8-V2 Cable Connection Dimensions

9.6
50.1

31.13
32.49

33.6

33.28

64.55

59.3

9.2

43.2

26.6
44.1
63.4

91

NS8-V1/-V2 Video Board (NS-CA001) Mounted Dimensions

149

68.3

8.7

45.3
27.3

58.2

59.1

48.4

36.8

89.3

9.3

NS8-V1/-V2 Video Board (NS-CA002) Mounted Dimensions

149

19.6

59.4

A-14

58.9

1.57

58.2

59.6

68.9

48

36.2

37.3

89.3

23.9

Appendix 2 Dimensions

NS7 Cable Connection Dimensions

26.6
50.1

31.13
32.49

33.6

33.28

64.55

59.3

9.2

43.2

44.1
63.4

91

NS5-V1/-V2 Dimensions

Mounting panel
Mounting bracket

A-15

Appendix 2 Dimensions

NS5-V1/-V2 Cable Connection Dimensions

A-16

Appendix 3 Using NS-AL002 Converters

Appendix 3

Using NS-AL002 Converters

The NS-AL002 RS-232C/RS-422A Converter is connected directly to RS-232C port A or B

of the PT, and converts RS-232C communications to RS-422A/RS-485. Any of the Converters listed in Appendix 9 Standard Models can be used. A summary of the NS-AL002
external dimensions, mounting and removal methods, and specifications is provided here.
Refer to this information when designing the control panel. Refer to the Instruction Sheet
included with the NS-AL002 for details.
Note

Dimensions

42

Mounting screws (2)

49

A-3-1

The NS-AL002 is an uninsulated RS-232C/RS-422A Converter. Therefore, if differences

in ground potential or effects from noise are concerns, it is recommended that an insulated NT-AL001 RS-232C/RS-422A Converter be used instead. For details, refer to Appendix 4 Using NT-AL001 Converters.

45

12
28.5

A-17

Appendix 3 Using NS-AL002 Converters

A-3-2

Mounting and Removing

Connect the NS-AL002 directly to port A or port B of the PT. Two NS-AL002 Adapters
cannot be connected to ports A and B simultaneously.
Mount the Adapter by tightening and securing the mounting screws on both of the D-Sub
connectors. The correct tightening torque is 0.3 Nm. The correct tightening torque for the
terminal block is 0.5 Nm.
To remove the Adapter, loosen the screws and pull out the Adapter.
Note

A-3-3

Always turn OFF the power to the PT before removing the Adapter.
Do not touch the surface or the mounted parts of the Board with bare hands.
Always discharge any static electricity from your body before handling the Board.
Mount to the PT after securely connecting the cable to the terminal block.
Be sure to tighten the mounting screws on both of the D-Sub connectors. If the screws
are loose, the FG terminals of the PT and NS-AL002 will not be connected.

Specifications
The following table shows the general specifications and communications specifications of
the Adapter.

General Specifications
Item
Dimensions
Weight
Ambient operating temperature
Storage temperature
Ambient operating humidity
Rated power supply
Power consumption
Operating environment
Vibration resistance
Shock resistance

Specifications
45 49 28.5 mm (W H D)
50 g max.
0 to 50C
20 to 60C
35% to 85% (without condensation)
5 V 10% (through pin 6 of the RS-232C connector)
150 mW max.
No corrosive gases.
Conforms to PT specifications.
Conforms to PT specifications.

Reference NS-series RS-485 (two-wire) communications are used to connect to an OMRON

Temperature Controller. The NS-AL002 cannot be used with the NT-series PTs or
PLCs.

Communications Specifications
RS-422A Interface
Item
Specifications
Baud rate
115.2 kbps max.
Transmission distance
500 m total length (See note 1.)
Terminal block format
8-terminal terminal block, M3.0
Insulation
No insulation (See note 2.)
Note 1: This specification is for a configuration in which all the Adapters connected on the same
transmission path are NT-AL002 Link Adapters. If a CJ1W-CIF11 Conversion Adapter is
used, the total length is 50 m.
Note 2: The RS-422A and RS-232C are not insulated.

A-18

Appendix 3 Using NS-AL002 Converters

A-3-4

DIP Switch Settings

The NS-AL002 Adapter has four DIP switch pins for setting the RS-422A communications
conditions.
Set the DIP switch pins before connecting the cables to the Adapter.
DIP switch

ON

OFF

The factory setting for the DIP switch is all pins set to OFF.
Pin
Pin 1
Pins 2 and 3
Pin 4

Function
Transmission mode
Two-wire/four-wire method selection
Terminating resistance

ON
RS/CS control
Two-wire method
Yes

OFF
Normal transmission
Four-wire method
None

For 1:1 NT Link, set the RS-422A transmission mode to normal transmission (pin 1 OFF).
For 1:N NT Links (normal, high speed), set the RS-422A transmission mode to RS/CS
control (pin 1 ON).
Note

Use the following DIP switch settings when connecting a CJ1W-CIF11 Conversion
Adapter to the PT.

Pin
Pin 1

Function
Terminating resistance selection

Pin 2
Pin 3
Pin 4
Pin 5
Pin 6

Two-wire/four-wire method selection

Two-wire/four-wire method selection
Not used.
Selection of RS control for RD
Selection of RS control for SD

Setting
ON: Terminating resistance enabled
OFF: Terminating resistance disabled
OFF (four-wire)
OFF (four-wire)
OFF
OFF (no RS control)
ON (RS control)

When a CJ1W-CIF11 Conversion Adapter is used, the total transmission length is 50 m.

If NT-001/NT-002 Link Adapters are used together with CJ1W-CIF11 Conversion Adapters on the same transmission path, the total transmission length is also 50 m.
For details, refer to the Appendix G in the SYSMAC CJ Series Operation Manual
(W393).
Make sure that both of the mounting screws on the D-Sub connector are tightened to a
torque of 0.3 Nm.

A-19

Appendix 3 Using NS-AL002 Converters

A-3-5

Pin Arrangement
The Adapter has a connector for RS-232C interface connection and a terminal block for
RS-422A/485 interface connection.
The pin arrangements for the RS-232C connector and RS-422A/485 terminal block are as
follows:

RS-232C Connector
Terminal block Signal name
pin number
1
2
3
4
5
6

NC
RD
SD
CS
RS
5V
(30 mA max.)
7 or 8
NC
9
SG
Connector hood FG

Signal direction
Adapter PT

(RS signal short-circuited internally)

(Pins 7 and 8 are short-circuited.)

Connects to functional ground terminal of PT.

RS-422A Terminal Block

Terminal block
pin number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

A-20

Signal name
FG
RDB (+)
SDB (+)
RSB (+)
NC
RDA ()
SDA ()
RSA ()

Signal direction
Adapter Host

Connects to functional ground terminal of PT.

--

Appendix 3 Using NS-AL002 Converters

Crimp Terminals
Use M3 crimp terminals.
Forked type

Round type

6.2 mm max.

6.2 mm max.

Applicable Crimp Terminal Examples

Forked type
Manufacturer
J.S.T. Mfg. Co., Ltd.
Molex

Model
V1.25-N3A
VSY1.25-3.5L

Recommended cable size

2
AWG22 to 16 (0.25 to 1.65 mm )
2
AWG22 to 16 (0.3 to 1.65 mm )

Model
V1.25-MS3
RAV1.25-3

Recommended cable size

2
AWG22 to 16 (0.25 to 1.65 mm )
2
AWG22 to 16 (0.3 to 1.65 mm )

Round type
Manufacturer
J.S.T. Mfg. Co., Ltd.
Molex

Recommended Cable
Manufacturer
Tachii Electric Wire Co., Ltd.
HIRAKAWA HEWTECH CORP.

A-3-6

Model
TKV VBS3P-03
CO-HC-ESV-3P7/0.2

Handling the Shield on RS-422A/485 Cables

Perform the following procedures to connect, process the shield, and connect to ground
for communications systems using the NS-AL002. Incorrect connection may result in
communications errors with the host.

Connecting the NS-AL002 D-Sub Connector

Always securely tighten the screws on both sides of the D-Sub connector. Otherwise, the
functional ground terminal (FG: ) of the PT will not be properly connected to the functional ground of the NS-AL002.

Connecting the Ground Wire

The PT has a functional ground terminal (FG: ).
1. Ground according to Figure (a) for normal grounding.
Connect the ground terminal (GR) of the devices to the functional ground (FG: ).
Make sure that each signal line is grounded at only one point and ground to 100 max.
Short the LG terminal of the PLC to the ground terminal (GR).
2
Use a wire gauge of at least 2 mm for the ground wire.
Refer to the manual for individual Communications Units for details on proper wiring procedures.
2. Do not ground the functional ground (FG: ) of the PT if it is mounted to the same
panel as devices that generate noise, such as motors or inverters, as shown in Figure
(b).

A-21

Appendix 3 Using NS-AL002 Converters

Preparing the Shield of RS-422A/485 Connectors

Always prepare RS-422A/485 cable shields properly. Otherwise, communications errors
may occur with the host.
Ground only one end of the shield when connecting the ground terminal (GR) of the devices to the functional ground (FG: ), and grounding each signal line at only one point
and to 100 max, as shown in Figure (a).
Ground both ends of the shield when not grounding the functional ground (FG: ) of the
PT, as shown in Figure (b).
When using the CJ1W-CIF11 or when using the NT-AL001/NS-AL002 together with the
CJ1W-CIF11, always performs connections, shield processing, and grounding as shown in
Figure (b).

A-22

Appendix 3 Using NS-AL002 Converters

Example of Recommended Wiring

Figure (a)

Figure (b)

CPU Rack
CPU Unit or
Communications Unit

CPU Rack
Power
supply
Unit

CPU Unit or
Communications Unit

Power
supply
Unit
LG
GR

LG
GR

PT

PT
RS-422A/485

RS-422A/485

FG

FG

NS-AL002

NS-AL002
Signal line

Signal line

PT

PT
FG

FG

NS-AL002

NS-AL002

PT

PT

FG

NS-AL002

FG

NS-AL002

A-23

Appendix 3 Using NS-AL002 Converters

A-3-7

Connection Example
An example of connecting a PLC and a PT using an RS-232C/RS-422A Converter is
shown below. Use the wiring example as reference for correct wiring.
CPU Rack

Built-in RS-232C
port on PCU unit

RS-422A Converter
(CJ1W-CIF11)

PT (unit No. 0)

PT (unit No. 1)

RS-422A Converter
(NS-AL002)

RS-422A Converter
(NS-AL002)

1:N NT Link

Wiring Example

Note: Refer to A-3-6 Handling the Shield on RS-422A/485 Cables for information on processing
the shield wire on the RS-442A/485 cable.

A-24

Appendix 4 Using NT-AL001 Converters

Appendix 4

Using NT-AL001 Converters

This section outlines the external dimensions, procedure for mounting and removal, and specifications of an NT-AL001 RS-232C/RS-422A Converter. Refer to this information when designing
the control panel. For details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the NT-AL001.

A-4-1

Dimensions

110

30 (W) 114 (H) 100.2 (D) mm: with the RS-422A terminal block cover closed
30 (W) 114 (H) 119.5 (D) mm: with the RS-422A terminal block cover open

A-4-2

Methods for Mounting and Removal

The RS-232/RS-422 converter unit (NT-AL001) can be mounted on a DIN rail or in an operation panel.
The RS-422A terminal block of the converter unit can be easily removed.

Mounting to a DIN Rail

Latch the top part of the rear face of the converter unit (a in the figure) onto the top edge
of the DIN rail, and push the unit in the direction indicated by b in the figure.
Now fit end plates at the right and left of the converter unit to secure it and ensure that it
cannot shift laterally.

A-25

Appendix 4 Using NT-AL001 Converters

Removal from a DIN Rail

Remove the end plates at right and left of the converter unit and, as shown in the figure
below, insert a flat blade screwdriver into the rail stopper at the bottom face of the converter unit and prize it free.

Mounting to an Operation Panel

Drill two mounting screw holes in an operation panel with a thickness of at least 2 mm
(0.08 inch) and secure the converter unit with screws.

Note:

A-26

In order to ensure a secure and strong mount, mount the converter unit in an operation
panel with a thickness of at least 2 mm (0.08 inch).

Appendix 4 Using NT-AL001 Converters

A-4-3

Specifications
The general specifications and communications specifications of the converter unit are
shown below.

General Specifications
Item
Dimensions

Weight
Operating ambient
temperature
Operating ambient
humidity
Rated power supply
voltage
Rated power supply
current
Rush current
Insulation resistance
Dielectric strength

Operating environment
Storage ambient
temperature
Vibration resistance
Shock resistance

Specification
30 (W) 114(H) 100.2(D) mm: with the RS-422A terminal block cover
closed
30 (W) 114(H) 119.5(D) mm: with the RS-422A terminal block cover
open
200 g max.
0 to 55 C
10% to 90% (with no condensation)
+5 V 10% (using pin No. 6 of the RS-232C connector)
150 mA max.
0.8 A max.
20 M or higher, measured between all RS-422A terminal signal lines
collectively and functional ground terminal with a 500 VDC Megger Tester.
1500 VAC for 1 minute between all RS-422A terminal signal lines collectively and functional ground terminal
Leakage current: 10 mA max.
No corrosive gases
20 to 75C
Conforms to JIS C0911 60 minutes in each of X, Y, and Z directions
2
Conforms to JIS C0912 147m/s , 3 times in each of X, Y, and Z directions

Communications Specifications
RS-232C Interface
Item
Communications speed
Transmission distance
Connector

Specification
115.2k max. bps
2 m max.
9-pin D-SUB connector (female)

RS-422A/485 Interface
Item
Communications speed
Transmission distance
Connector

Specification
115.2k max. bps (depends on the RS-232C communications speed)
500 m max.
8-terminal detachable terminal block, M3.0

A-27

Appendix 4 Using NT-AL001 Converters

A-4-4

DIP Switch Settings

The converter unit has 6 digits DIP switch for setting the RS-422A/485 communication
conditions.
Before connecting the cable to the converter unit, make the DIP switch settings.

When using the host link or 1:1 NT Link, set the RS-422A send mode to continual sending
(set both SW1-5 and 6 OFF).
When using the 1:N NT Link (standard or high-speed), set the RS-422A send mode to
comply with CS control of RS-232C (i.e., one of SW1-5 and SW1-6 must be ON).
Note:
Do not set both SW1-5 and SW1-6 ON at the same time. This may damage internal circuits.
The power supply to the device supplying +5 V must be turned OFF before starting wiring work.
Before connecting the RS-232C cable and turning on the power to an RS-232C device
such as a PT (i.e., turning on the power to the converter unit), check that the cable is
wired correctly and that the DIP switch settings are correct. If the power is turned on
while there is a wiring fault, the internal circuits of the converter unit or the RS-232C device may be damaged.

A-28

Appendix 4 Using NT-AL001 Converters

When the converter unit is connected to a C200HX/HG/HE (-ZE), CQM1H, CS1G/H

model of OMRON PLC as an RS-422A device, set DIP switches SW1-5 and SW1-6 as
indicated below.

A-4-5

Pin Arrangement
The converter unit has a terminal block for an RS-422A/485 interface connection and a
connector for an RS-232C interface connection.
The pin arrangements for the RS-422A/485 terminal block and the RS-232C connector
are as follows.

RS-422A/485 Terminal Block

RS-232C Connector

A-29

Appendix 4 Using NT-AL001 Converters

A-4-6

Block Diagram
A diagram showing the internal blocks of the converter unit is shown below. Refer to this
diagram when making cables yourself, or when connecting devices with special interfaces.

A-30

Appendix 5 Preparing Connecting Cables

Appendix 5

Preparing Connecting Cables

Use the following procedure to prepare connecting cables.

Refer to this cable preparation method to prepare cables for the RS-232C/RS-422A Converter.

A-5-1

Cable Preparation
1. Cut the cables to the required length.
2. Remove the vinyl cable covering using a razor blade or other tool.
Use care not to damage the shield (braided mesh).
3. Cut the shield using scissors.
4. Strip back to the core of each wire using a stripper.
5. Bend back the shields.
6. Wrap the section of the shields that is bent back with aluminum foil tape.

(Unit: mm)

Aluminum foil tape

A-31

Appendix 5 Preparing Connecting Cables

A-5-2

Soldering
1. Pass a heat-shrinking tube over each wire.
2. Pre-solder each wire and connector terminal.
3. Solder each of the wires to the connector terminals.

Soldering iron

Heat-shrinking tube
Internal diameter: 1.5
Length = 10

4. Replace the heat-shrinking tube up to the soldered section, and shrink the tube onto
the wire by applying heat using a soldering gun.

Heat-shrinking tube

A-5-3

Hood Assembly
Assemble the hood as shown in the following diagram.

End with Connector

A-32

Aluminum foil tape

End without Connector

Appendix 5 Preparing Connecting Cables

A-5-4

Preparing Connecting Cables for Host Connection

Refer to the following information when preparing the connecting cables for connecting the
PT to the host.

Wiring Layout between PT and Host (RS-232C)

PT
Signal Pin No.
Connector
food

Shield

Host
Pin No. Signal
Connector
food

RS232C
connector

RS232C
connector

9-pin connector
9-pin connector

Wiring Layout between NS-AL002 and Host (RS-422A)

Host

NS-AL002
RS-422A cable

When connecting individual signals with twisted-pair cable, connect RDA and RDB, and
SDA and SDB, as pairs in the twisted-pair cable. A communications error may occur if the
pairs are not combined correctly.

A-33

Appendix 5 Preparing Connecting Cables

Wiring Layout between NS-AL002 and NS-AL002 (RS-422A)

Host side

NS-AL002

RS-422A

NS-AL002

NS-AL002
Signal

Signal

RS-422A
terminal
block

RS
-422A
terminal
block

Shield

FG

FG

Wiring Layout between NT-AL001 and Host (RS-422A)

NT-AL001

NT-AL001

Host

RS-422A

RS-232C

Usable Cables with Connectors

Host Link, NT Link (1:1), NT Link (N:1). +5 V provided from the PLC.
XW2Z-070T-1 (9-pin to 9-pin, 0.7 m)
XW2Z-200T-1 (9-pin to 9-pin, 2 m)
6

NT-AL001
Signal

PLC or PT

Pin No.

RS-232C
CONNECTOR

FG

Shield

Pin No.

Signal

Hood

FG

---

---

SD

SD

RD

RD

RS

RS

CS

CS

+5 V

+5 V

---

---

---

---

SG

9-pin type

RS-232C
CONNECTOR

SG

9-pin type

When connected to a PLC with a +5-V output, an external power supply is not required for
the NT-AL001.

A-34

Appendix 5 Preparing Connecting Cables

Wiring Layout between NT-AL001 and NT-AL001 (RS-422A)

Wiring Layout to CS1G/H Serial Communications Boards, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) Communications Boards, CQM1H Serial Communications Boards, and CVM1/CV Series Host
Link Units
Applicable Units:
CS1G-CPU42(-V1), CS1G-CPU43(-V1), CS1G-CPU44(-V1),
CS1G-CPU45(-V1), CS1H-CPU63(-V1), CS1H-CPU64(-V1),
CS1H-CPU65(-V1), CS1H-CPU66(-V1), CS1H-CPU67(-V1),
C200HE-CPU32(-Z), C200HE-CPU42(-Z), C200HG-CPU33(-Z),
C200HG-CPU43(-Z), C200HG-CPU53(-Z), C200HG-CPU63(-Z),
C200HX-CPU34(-Z), C200HX-CPU44(-Z), C200HX-CPU54(-Z),
C200HX-CPU64(-Z), C200HX-CPU65-Z, C200HX-CPU85-Z,
CQM1H-CPU51, CQM1H-CPU61, CV500-LK201(COM port 2)

For details on processing shielded cable, refer to A-3-6 Handling the Shield on RS422A/485 Cables.

A-35

Appendix 5 Preparing Connecting Cables

Wiring Layout to CVM1/CV-series CPU Units

Applicable Units:
CV500-CPU01-V1, CV1000-CPU01-V1, CV2000-CPU01-V1,
CVM1-CPU01-V@, CVM1-CPU11-V@, CVM1-CPU21-V@
CVM1/CV Series CPU Units without the -V@ suffix cannot be connected by any communications method.

For details on processing shielded cable, refer to A-3-6 Handling the Shield on RS422A/485 Cables.

A-36

Appendix 6 Preparing Cables for Computer Connection

Appendix 6

Preparing Cables for Computer

Connection

Refer to the following information when preparing the CX-Designer connecting cables.

A-6-1

Connecting Cable Assembly

Wire the RS-232C connector to the DOS or 98-NX computer according to the type, as
follows:

25-pin Connector

Computer

PT serial port

Shield
Connector hood

Connector hood

Use the following products to assemble the connecting cable.

Name
Connector

Model
XM2D-2501
XM2A-0901

Connector
hood

XM2S-2511
XM2S-0911

Cable

AWG28 5P IFVV-SB
CO-MA-VV-SB 5P 28AWG

Details
25-pin type
Manufactured by OMRON (computer side)
9-pin type
Manufactured by OMRON (PT side)
25-pin type
Manufactured by OMRON (computer side)
9-pin type, mm screws
Manufactured by OMRON (PT side)
Multiconductor shielded cable
Manufactured by Fujikura Densen.
Multiconductor shielded cable
Manufactured by Hitachi Densen.

A-37

Appendix 6 Preparing Cables for Computer Connection

9-pin Connector

Computer

PT serial port

Shield
Connector hood
Connector hood

Use the following products to assemble the connecting cable.

Name
Connector

Details
9-pin type
Manufactured by OMRON (computer side)
XM2A-0901
9-pin type
Manufactured by OMRON (PT side)
Connector
XM2S-0911
9-pin type, mm screws
hood
Manufactured by OMRON.
(See note.) XM2S-0913
9-pin type, inch screws
Manufactured by OMRON.
Cable
AWG28 5P IFVV-SB
Multiconductor shielded cable
Manufactured by Fujikura Densen.
CO-MA-VV-SB 5P 28AWG
Multiconductor shielded cable
Manufactured by Hitachi Densen.
Note: Use a connector hood for the computer that conforms to the standards for the screws of the
computer connector.

A-38

Model

XM2D-0901

Appendix 7 Preparing Connecting Cables for Bar Code Readers

Appendix 7

Preparing Connecting Cables for Bar

Code Readers

Refer to the following information when preparing the connecting cables for connecting the
V520-RH21-6 Bar Code Reader.

Connector Pin Arrangement

2
5
3
7

4
8

1
6

Connector pin
arrangement at
computer

Pin
number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Signal name

Abbreviation

Send data
Receive data
Request to send
Clear to send
Not connected.
Data terminal ready
0V
Power supply (Vcc)

Signal direction
V520-RH21-6

PT

SD (TXD)
RD (RXD)
RS (RTS)
CS (CTS)
ER (DTR)
SG
+5 V

Wiring Method
PT
Signal

V520-RH21-6
Pin No.

Signal

Pin No.

RS-232C
interface

When connecting to the 5-V output of the PTs serial port, use a cable length of less than
2 m. If the cable is 2 m or longer, connect pins 7 and 8 of the Bar Code Reader to an external power supply.

Connector Types
Use the following products to assemble the connecting cable.
Name
Connector

Model
XM2A-0901
TCS2280-01-2011

Connector hood

XM2S-0911

Cable

AWG28 5P IFVV-SB
CO-MA-VV-SB 5P 28AWG

Details
9-pin type
Manufactured by OMRON (PT side)
8-pin DIN type Hoshiden, Co., Ltd.
Panel-mounting type
9-pin type
Manufactured by OMRON.
Multiconductor shielded cable
Manufactured by Fujikura Densen.
Multiconductor shielded cable
Manufactured by Hitachi Densen.

Use the following cables if the V400-H111 or V400-H211 is used.

Model
V400-W20-2M
V400-W20-5M

Cable length
2m
5m

A-39

Appendix 8 Standard Models

Appendix 8

Standard Models

Programmable Terminals (PTs)

Model
NS12-TS01-V1
NS12-TS01B-V1
NS12-TS00-V1
NS12-TS00B-V1
NS12-TS01-V2
(See note 3.)
NS12-TS01B-V2
(See note 3.)
NS12-TS00-V2
(See note 3.)
NS12-TS00B-V2
(See note 3.)
NS10-TV01-V1
NS10-TV01B -V1
NS10-TV00 -V1
NS10-TV00B-V1
NS10-TV01-V2
(See note 3.)
NS10-TV01B-V2
(See note 3.)
NS10-TV00-V2
(See note 3.)
NS10-TV00B-V2
(See note 3.)
NS8-TV01-V1
(See note 1.)
NS8-TV01B-V1
(See note 1.)
NS8-TV11-V1
(See note 1.)
NS8-TV11B-V1
(See note 1.)
NS8-TV00 -V1
(See note 1.)
NS8-TV00B-V1
(See note 1.)
NS8-TV10 -V1
(See note 1.)
NS8-TV10B-V1
(See note 1.)
NS8-TV01-V2
(See note 3.)
NS8-TV01B-V2
(See note 3.)
NS8-TV00-V2
(See note 3.)
NS8-TV00B-V2
(See note 3.)

A-40

LCD

Ethernet

Case

Type
TFT
TFT
TFT
TFT
TFT

Size
12.1 inch
12.1 inch
12.1 inch
12.1 inch
12.1 inch

Color
Color
Color
Color
Color
Color

Number of dots
800 600
800 600
800 600
800 600
800 600

10/100Base-T
10/100Base-T
Not supported.
Not supported.
10/100Base-T

Color
Ivory
Black
Ivory
Black
Ivory

TFT

12.1 inch

Color

800 600

10/100Base-T

Black

TFT

12.1 inch

Color

800 600

Not supported.

Ivory

TFT

12.1 inch

Color

800 600

Not supported.

Black

TFT
TFT
TFT
TFT
TFT

10.4 inch
10.4 inch
10.4 inch
10.4 inch
10.4 inch

Color
Color
Color
Color
Color

640 480
640 480
640 480
640 480
640 480

10/100Base-T
10/100Base-T
Not supported.
Not supported.
10/100Base-T

Ivory
Black
Ivory
Black
Ivory

TFT

10.4 inch

Color

640 480

10/100Base-T

Black

TFT

10.4 inch

Color

640 480

Not supported.

Ivory

TFT

10.4 inch

Color

640 480

Not supported.

Black

TFT

8.0 inch

Color

640 480

10/100Base-T

Ivory

TFT

8.0 inch

Color

640 480

10/100Base-T

Black

TFT

8.0 inch

Color

640 480

10/100Base-T

Ivory

TFT

8.0 inch

Color

640 480

10/100Base-T

Black

TFT

8.0 inch

Color

640 480

Not supported.

Ivory

TFT

8.0 inch

Color

640 480

Not supported.

Black

TFT

8.0 inch

Color

640 480

Not supported.

Ivory

TFT

8.0 inch

Color

640 480

Not supported.

Black

TFT

8.4 inch

Color

640 480

10/100Base-T

Ivory

TFT

8.4 inch

Color

640 480

10/100Base-T

Black

TFT

8.4 inch

Color

640 480

Not supported.

Ivory

TFT

8.4 inch

Color

640 480

Not supported.

Black

Appendix 8 Standard Models

Model
NS5-SQ01-V1
(See note 2.)
NS5-SQ01B-V1
(See note 2.)
NS5-SQ00-V1
(See note 2.)
NS5-SQ00B-V1
(See note 2.)
NS5-SQ01-V2
(See note 2.)
NS5-SQ01B-V2
(See note 2.)
NS5-SQ00-V2
(See note 2.)
NS5-SQ00B-V2
(See note 2.)
NS5-TQ01-V2
(See note 2.)
NS5-TQ01B-V2
(See note 2.)
NS5-TQ00-V2
(See note 2.)
NS5-TQ00B-V2
(See note 2.)
NS5-MQ01-V2
(See note 2.)
NS5-MQ01B-V2
(See note 2.)
NS5-MQ00-V2
(See note 2.)
NS5-MQ00B-V2
(See note 2.)

LCD

Ethernet

Case

Type
STN

Size
5.7 inch

Color
Color

Number of dots
320 240

10/100Base-T

Color
Ivory

STN

5.7 inch

Color

320 240

10/100Base-T

Black

STN

5.7 inch

Color

320 240

Not supported.

Ivory

STN

5.7 inch

Color

320 240

Not supported.

Black

STN

5.7 inch

Color

320 240

10/100Base-T

Ivory

STN

5.7 inch

Color

320 240

10/100Base-T

Black

STN

5.7 inch

Color

320 240

Not supported.

Ivory

STN

5.7 inch

Color

320 240

Not supported.

Black

TFT

5.7 inch

Color

320 240

10/100Base-T

Ivory

TFT

5.7 inch

Color

320 240

10/100Base-T

Black

TFT

5.7 inch

Color

320 240

Not supported.

Ivory

TFT

5.7 inch

Color

320 240

Not supported.

Black

STN

5.7 inch

320 240

10/100Base-T

Ivory

STN

5.7 inch

320 240

10/100Base-T

Black

STN

5.7 inch

320 240

Not supported.

Ivory

STN

5.7 inch

Monochrome
Monochrome
Monochrome
Monochrome

320 240

Not supported.

Black

Note 1. The capacity of the NS8-TV00/TV01(B)-V1 is 6 Mbytes and the capacity of the NS8TV10/TV11(B)-V1 is 20 Mbytes.
2. The capacity of the NS5-SQ00/SQ01-V1 is 6 Mbytes and the capacity of the NS5-V2 is
20 Mbytes.
3. The capacity of the NS12-V2, NS10-V2, and NS8-V2 is 60 MB.

A-41

Appendix 8 Standard Models

Serial Communications Units

Model
CS1W-SCU21
CS1W-SCU41

CJ1W-SCU41

Specifications
RS-232C (2 ports)
Base-mounting type
RS-232C (1 port)
RS-422A (1 port)
Base-mounting type
RS-232C (1 port)
RS-422A (1 port)
Building-block type

Applicable PLC
CS-series CS1G/H and CS1G/H-H
CS-series CS1G/H and CS1G/H-H

CJ-series CJ1G/H-H and CJ1M

CPU Units That Connect to PTs in 1:1 NT Links

PLC Series
C200HE/HG/HX Series
CQM1(H) Series
CPM1A Series
CPM2A Series
CPM2C Series
CVM1/CV Series

A-42

Specifications
With RS-232C connector (switching/9-pin type)
With RS-232C connector (9-pin type)
Connects to RS-232C cable using RS-232C Adapter CPM1CIF01.
With RS-232C connector (9-pin type)
Connects to RS-232C connector branched using CPM2CCN111 with converting cable.
With RS-232C connector (switching/9-pin type)

Appendix 8 Standard Models

CPU Units That Connect in 1:1 NT Links via RS-232C to PT Serial Ports
PLC Series
C Series

CPU Units with built-in 1:1 NT Link

functionality
C200HS-CPU21
C200HS-CPU23
C200HS-CPU31
C200HS-CPU33
C200HE-CPU42 (-Z)

CPU Units that connect via optional Communications Boards

---

C200HE-CPU32 (-Z) (See note 1.)

C200HE-CPU42 (-Z) (See note 1.)
C200HG-CPU33(-Z) (See note 1.)
C200HG-CPU43(-Z) (See note 1.)
C200HG-CPU53(-Z) (See note 1.)
C200HG-CPU63(-Z) (See note 1.)
C200HX-CPU34(-Z) (See note 1.)
C200HX-CPU44(-Z) (See note 1.)
C200HX-CPU54(-Z) (See note 1.)
C200HX-CPU64(-Z) (See note 1.)
C200HX-CPU65-Z
C200HX-CPU85-Z
---

C200HG-CPU33(-Z)
C200HG-CPU43(-Z)
C200HG-CPU53(-Z)
C200HG-CPU63(-Z)
C200HX-CPU34(-Z)
C200HX-CPU44(-Z)
C200HX-CPU54(-Z)
C200HX-CPU64(-Z)
C200HX-CPU65-Z
C200HX-CPU85-Z
CQM1-CPU41-V1
CQM1-CPU42-V1
CQM1-CPU43-V1
CQM1-CPU44-V1
CQM1-CPU45-EV1
--CPM1A-10CD@-@ (-V1)
CPM1A-20CD@-@ (-V1)
CPM1A-30CD@-@ (-V1)
CPM1A-40CD@-@ (-V1)
--CPM2A-30CD@@-@
CPM2A-40CD@@-@
CPM2A-60CD@@-@
CPM2C-10@@@@@@-@ (See note 4.) --CPM2C-20@@@@@@-@ (See note 4.)
CQM1H-CPU21 (See note 2.)
--CQM1H-CPU51 (See note 2.)
CQM1H-CPU61 (See note 2.)
CV Series
CV500-CPU01-V1
--(See note 3.) CV1000-CPU01-V1
CV2000-CPU01-V1
CVM1 Series CVM1-CPU01-V2
--(See note 3.) CVM1-CPU11-V2
CVM1-CPU21-V2
Note 1. A C200HW-COM02/COM04/COM05/COM06-V1 Communications Board is required.
2. A CQM1H-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is required.
3. Connection is not possible to CVM1/CV-series PLC CPU Units without "-V1" in the
model number.
4. A CS1W-CN118 Conversion Cable or XW2Z-200T-2 Cable with connector must be used
for the connection.

Reference CS-series CPU Units cannot connect to 1:1 NT Links, but a 1:1 connection can be
made using 1:N NT Links (normal or high-speed). Refer to 4-2 1:N Host Connection and 4-3 High-speed 1:N NT Link for details.

A-43

Appendix 8 Standard Models

CPU Units That Connect in 1:1 NT Links via RS-422A to PT Serial Ports
PLC Series

CPU Units with built-in 1:1 NT Link functionality

C200HE-CPU32 (-Z) (See note 1.)
C200HE-CPU42 (-Z) (See note 1.)
C200HG-CPU33 (-Z) (See note 1.)
C200HG-CPU43 (-Z) (See note 1.)
C200HG-CPU53 (-Z) (See note 1.)
C200HG-CPU63 (-Z) (See note 1.)
C200HX-CPU34 (-Z) (See note 1.)
C200HX-CPU44 (-Z) (See note 1.)
C200HX-CPU54 (-Z) (See note 1.)
C200HX-CPU64 (-Z) (See note 1.)
C200HX-CPU65-Z (See note 1.)
C200HX-CPU85-Z (See note 1.)
CQM1H-CPU51 (See note 2.)
CQM1H-CPU61 (See note 2.)
CV Series (See note 3.)
CV500-CPU01-V1
CV1000-CPU01-V1
CV2000-CPU01-V1
CVM1 Series (See note 3.)
CVM1-CPU01-V2
CVM1-CPU11-V2
CVM1-CPU21-V2
Note 1. A C200HW-COM03-V1 or C200HW-COM06-V1 Communications Board is required.
2. A CQM1H-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is required.
3. Connection is not possible to CVM1/CV-series PLC CPU Units without "-V1" in the model
number.
C Series

Reference NS-series RS-485 (two-wire) communications are used to connect to an OMRON

Temperature Controller. The NS-AL002 cannot be used with the NT-series PTs or
PLCs. Connect using RS-422A (4-wire).

CPU Units That Connect to PTs in Standard 1:N NT Links

Model
C200HE/HG/HX Series
CQM1H Series
CS Series
CJ Series

A-44

Specifications
With RS-232C connector (switching/9-pin type)
With RS-232C connector (9-pin type)
With RS-232C connector (9-pin type)
With RS-232C connector (9-pin type)

Appendix 8 Standard Models

CPU Units That Connect in 1:N NT Links via RS-232C to PT Serial Ports
PLC Series

CS Series

CJ Series

C Series

Connecting with built-in ports

CS1G-CPU42(-V1)
CS1G-CPU43(-V1)
CS1G-CPU44(-V1)
CS1G-CPU45(-V1)
CS1H-CPU63(-V1)
CS1H-CPU64(-V1)
CS1H-CPU65(-V1)
CS1H-CPU66(-V1)
CS1H-CPU67(-V1)
CS1G-CPU42H
CS1G-CPU43H
CS1G-CPU44H
CS1G-CPU45H
CS1H-CPU63H
CS1H-CPU64H
CS1H-CPU65H
CS1H-CPU66H
CS1H-CPU67H
CS1D-CPU65H
CS1D-CPU67H
CJ1G-CPU42H (See note 2.)
CJ1G-CPU43H (See note 2.)
CJ1G-CPU44H (See note 2.)
CJ1G-CPU45H (See note 2.)
CJ1M-CPU11
CJ1M-CPU12
CJ1M-CPU13
CJ1M-CPU21
CJ1M-CPU22
CJ1M-CPU23
CJ1H-CPU65H
CJ1H-CPU66H
CJ1H-CPU67H
CJ1H-CPU65H-R
CJ1H-CPU66H-R
CJ1H-CPU67H-R
C200HE-CPU42(-Z)
C200HG-CPU43(-Z)
C200HG-CPU63(-Z)

C200HX-CPU44(-Z)
C200HX-CPU64(-Z)
C200HX-CPU65-Z
C200HX-CPU85-Z

---

Connecting via optional

Communications Boards
Same as at left (See note 1).

Same as at left (See note 2).

C200HE-CPU32(-Z) (See note 3.)

C200HE-CPU42(-Z) (See note 3.)
C200HG-CPU33(-Z) (See note 3.)
C200HG-CPU43(-Z) (See note 3.)
C200HG-CPU53(-Z) (See note 3.)
C200HG-CPU63(-Z) (See note 3.)
C200HX-CPU34(-Z) (See note 3.)
C200HX-CPU44(-Z) (See note 3.)
C200HX-CPU54(-Z) (See note 3.)
C200HX-CPU64(-Z) (See note 3.)
C200HX-CPU65-Z (See note 3.)
C200HX-CPU85-Z (See note 3.)
CQM1H-CPU21 (See note 4.)
CQM1H-CPU51 (See note 4.)
CQM1H-CPU61 (See note 4.)

Note 1. A CS1W-SCB21/SCB41 Serial Communications Board or a CS1W-SCU21 Serial Communications Unit is required.
2. A CJ1W-SCU41 Serial Communications Unit is required.
3. A C200HW-COM02/COM04/COM05/COM06(-V1) Communications Board is required.
4. A CQM1H-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is required.

Reference NS-series RS-485 (two-wire) communications are used to connect to an OMRON

Temperature Controller. The NS-AL002 cannot be used with the NT-series PTs or
PLCs. Connect using RS-422A (4-wire).

A-45

Appendix 8 Standard Models

CPU Units That Connect in 1:N NT Links via RS-442A to PT Serial Ports
PLC Series
CS Series

CJ Series

C Series

Unit
CS1G-CPU42(-V1)
CS1G-CPU43(-V1)
CS1G-CPU44(-V1)
CS1G-CPU45(-V1)
CS1H-CPU63(-V1)
CS1H-CPU64(-V1)
CS1H-CPU65(-V1)
CS1H-CPU66(-V1)
CS1H-CPU67(-V1)
CS1G-CPU42H
CS1G-CPU43H
CS1G-CPU44H
CS1G-CPU45H
CS1H-CPU63H
CS1H-CPU64H
CS1H-CPU65H
CS1H-CPU66H
CS1H-CPU67H
CS1D-CPU65H
CS1D-CPU67H
CJ1G-CPU42H
CJ1G-CPU43H
CJ1G-CPU44H
CJ1G-CPU45H
CJ1M-CPU11
CJ1M-CPU12
CJ1M-CPU13
CJ1M-CPU21
CJ1M-CPU22
CJ1M-CPU23
CJ1H-CPU65H
CJ1H-CPU66H
CJ1H-CPU67H
CJ1H-CPU65H-R
CJ1H-CPU66H-R
CJ1H-CPU67H-R
C200HE-CPU32(-Z)
C200HE-CPU42(-Z)
C200HG-CPU33(-Z)
C200HG-CPU43(-Z)
C200HG-CPU53(-Z)
C200HG-CPU63(-Z)
C200HX-CPU34(-Z)
C200HX-CPU44(-Z)
C200HX-CPU54(-Z)
C200HX-CPU64(-Z)
C200HX-CPU65-Z
C200HX-CPU85-Z
CQM1H-CPU21
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61

Serial Communications Board or

Unit required for connection
CS1W-SCB41 Serial Communications
Board

CJ1W-SCU31/41 Serial Communications Unit

C200HW-COM03/COM06(-V1) Communications Board

CQM1H-SCB41 Serial Communications Board

Reference Both the normal 1:N NT Links and high-speed NT Links are supported for CSseries PLC CPU Units with "-V1" in the model number. If the most recent Serial
Communications Unit or Board is used, these connections are also supported by
CPU Units without "-V1." Refer to 4-3 High-speed 1:N NT Link for details.

A-46

Appendix 8 Standard Models

CPU Units That Connect to PTs in High-speed 1:N NT Links

Model
Specifications
CS Series (See note.)
With RS-232C connector (9-pin type)
CJ Series
With RS-232C connector (9-pin type)
Note: Connection is not possible for CPU Units without "-V1" in the model number.

CPU Units That Connect in 1:N NT Links via RS-232C to PT Serial Ports
PLC Series
CS Series

Unit

Serial Communications Board or

Unit required for connection
Same as at left (See note 2).

CS1G-CPU42-V1 (See note 1.)

CS1G-CPU43-V1 (See note 1.)
CS1G-CPU44-V1 (See note 1.)
CS1G-CPU45-V1 (See note 1.)
CS1H-CPU63-V1 (See note 1.)
CS1H-CPU64-V1 (See note 1.)
CS1H-CPU65-V1 (See note 1)
CS1H-CPU66-V1 (See note 1.)
CS1H-CPU67-V1 (See note 1.)
CS1G-CPU42H
CS1G-CPU43H
CS1G-CPU44H
CS1G-CPU45H
CS1H-CPU63H
CS1H-CPU64H
CS1H-CPU65H
CS1H-CPU66H
CS1H-CPU67H
CS1D-CPU65H
CS1D-CPU67H
CJ Series
CJ1G-CPU42H
Same as at left (See note 3).
CJ1G-CPU43H
CJ1G-CPU44H
CJ1G-CPU45H
CJ1M-CPU11
CJ1M-CPU12
CJ1M-CPU13
CJ1M-CPU21
CJ1M-CPU22
CJ1M-CPU23
CJ1H-CPU65H
CJ1H-CPU66H
CJ1H-CPU67H
CJ1H-CPU65H-R
CJ1H-CPU66H-R
CJ1H-CPU67H-R
Note 1. CS-series PLC CPU Units without "-V1" in the model number do not support high-speed
NT Links.
2. A CS1W-SCB21/SCB41 Serial Communications Board or a CS1W-SCU21 Serial Communications Unit is required.
3. A CJ1W-SCU41 Serial Communications Board is required.

A-47

Appendix 8 Standard Models

CPU Units That Connect in 1:N NT Links via RS-442A to PT Serial Ports
PLC Series
CS Series

CJ Series

A-48

Unit
CS1G-CPU42(-V1)
CS1G-CPU43(-V1)
CS1G-CPU44(-V1)
CS1G-CPU45(-V1)
CS1H-CPU63(-V1)
CS1H-CPU64(-V1)
CS1H-CPU65(-V1)
CS1H-CPU66(-V1)
CS1H-CPU67(-V1)
CS1G-CPU42H
CS1G-CPU43H
CS1G-CPU44H
CS1G-CPU45H
CS1H-CPU63H
CS1H-CPU64H
CS1H-CPU65H
CS1H-CPU66H
CS1H-CPU67H
CS1D-CPU65H
CS1D-CPU67H
CJ1G-CPU42H
CJ1G-CPU43H
CJ1G-CPU44H
CJ1G-CPU45H
CJ1M-CPU11
CJ1M-CPU12
CJ1M-CPU13
CJ1M-CPU21
CJ1M-CPU22
CJ1M-CPU23
CJ1H-CPU65H
CJ1H-CPU66H
CJ1H-CPU67H
CJ1H-CPU65H-R
CJ1H-CPU66H-R
CJ1H-CPU67H-R

Serial Communications Board or

Unit required for connection
CS1W-SCB41 Serial Communications Board

CJ1W-SCU31/41 Serial Communications Unit

Appendix 8 Standard Models

CPU Units That Connect to PTs via Ethernet

PLC Series
CV Series

CVM1 Series

CS Series

CJ Series

CPU Unit
CV500-CPU01-V1
CV1000-CPU01-V1
CV2000-CPU01-V1
CVM1-CPU01-V2
CVM1-CPU11-V2
CVM1-CPU21-V2
CS1G-CPU42(-V1)
CS1G-CPU43(-V1)
CS1G-CPU44(-V1)
CS1G-CPU45(-V1)
CS1G-CPU42H
CS1G-CPU43H
CS1G-CPU44H
CS1G-CPU45H
CS1H-CPU63(-V1)
CS1H-CPU64(-V1)
CS1H-CPU65(-V1)
CS1H-CPU66(-V1)
CS1H-CPU67(-V1)
CS1H-CPU63H
CS1H-CPU64H
CS1H-CPU65H
CS1H-CPU66H
CS1H-CPU67H
CS1D-CPU65H
CS1D-CPU67H
CJ1G-CPU42H
CJ1G-CPU43H
CJ1G-CPU44H
CJ1G-CPU45H
CJ1M-CPU11
CJ1M-CPU12
CJ1M-CPU13
CJ1M-CPU21
CJ1M-CPU22
CJ1M-CPU23
CJ1H-CPU65H
CJ1H-CPU66H
CJ1H-CPU67H
CJ1H-CPU65H-R
CJ1H-CPU66H-R
CJ1H-CPU67H-R

Specifications
Mount a CV500-ENT01 Ethernet
Unit (10Base-5).
Mount a 10Base-T Adapter to the
Ethernet Unit and a 10Base-T cable
can also be used.
Mount a CS1W-ENT01 Ethernet Unit
(10Base-5).
Mount a 10Base-T Adapter to the
Ethernet Unit and a 10Base-T cable
can also be used.
Mount a CS1W-ENT11 Ethernet Unit
(10Base-T).
Mount a CS1W-ETN21 Ethernet Unit
(10Base-T/100Base-T).

Mount a CJ1W-ENT11 Ethernet Unit

(10Base-T).
Mount a CJ1W-ENT21 Ethernet Unit
(10Base-T/100Base-T).

A-49

Appendix 8 Standard Models

CPU Units That Connect to PTs via Controller Link

PLC Series
CS Series

CPU Unit
All CS-series CPU Units

CJ Series

All CJ-series CPU Units

C200HE/HG/
HX Series
(See note 1.)

C200HE-CPU32 (-Z)
C200HE-CPU42 (-Z)
C200HG-CPU33 (-Z)
C200HG-CPU43 (-Z)
C200HG-CPU53 (-Z)
C200HG-CPU63 (-Z)
C200HX-CPU34 (-Z)
C200HX-CPU44 (-Z)
C200HX-CPU54 (-Z)
C200HX-CPU64 (-Z)
C200HX-CPU65-Z
C200HX-CPU85-Z
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61
All CV-series CPU Units

CQM1 Series

Specifications
Mount a CS1W-CLK21 Controller
Link Unit.
Mount a CJ1W-CLK21 Controller
Link Unit.
Mount a C200HW-CLK21 Controller
Link Unit.

Mount a CQM1H-CLK21 Controller

Link Unit.
Mount a CVM1-CLK21 Controller
Link Unit.

CV Series
(See note 2.)
CVM1 Series
All CVM1-series CPU Units
(See note 2.)
Note 1. The following are required when mounting a Controller Link Unit:
C200HW-COM01/COM04 Communications Board
C200HW-CE001/CE002/CE012 Bus Connection Unit
2. Always set routing tables when using a CVM1/CV-series CPU Unit manufactured in April
1996 or earlier. The manufacturing date can be checked with the 4-digit lot number given
on the side of the CPU Unit, as shown below.
Lot No.:

@ @ 4 6

.........Manufactured April 1996

The rightmost digit of the year, 1996
in this example
The month of manufacture
1 to 9 = January to September
X to Z = October to December

Refer to the Controller Link Units Operation Manual (W309) for setting methods for the
PLC Controller Link Units.

RS-232C/RS-422A Converters
Model
NT-AL001
NS-AL002
CJ1W-CIF11

Specifications
RS-232C: 9-pin connector
RS-422A: 8-pin terminal block
RS-232C: 9-pin connector
RS-422A: 8-pin terminal block
RS-232C: 9-pin connector
RS-422A: 5-pin terminal block

Reference When a CJ1W-CIF11 Conversion Adapter is used, the total transmission length is
50 m.
If NT-001/NS-002 Link Adapters are used together with CJ1W-CIF11 Conversion
Adapters on the same transmission path, the total transmission length is also
50 m.

A-50

Appendix 8 Standard Models

Software Related to NS-series PTs

Name
CX-Designer

Model
NS-CXDC1-V@

Details
For Windows 98SE, NT (version 4.0, Service Pack 6a),
2000 (Service Pack 3 or later), XP, or Vista
The CX-Designer contains a transfer program and standard system program for NS-series PTs.

Reference NEC PC98-series computers are not supported.

Use the NEC PC98NX Series, however, in the same way as IBM PC/AT compatible computers.

Support Tools
Name
Optional products

Model
NS12-KBA04
NS7-KBA04
NT30-KBA04
NS12-KBA05
NS7-KBA05
NT31C-KBA05
NS12-KBA05 N
NS7-KBA05N
NT31C-KBA05N
NT30-KBA01
CJ1W-BAT01
HMC-EF372
HMC-EF672

Details
(Anti-reflection Sheets for NS12/NS10)
Anti-reflection Sheets for NS8
Anti-reflection Sheets for NS5
Protective Cover for NS12 and NS10 (anti-reflection coating)
Protective Cover for NS8 (anti-reflection coating)
Protective Cover for NS5 (anti-reflection coating)
Transparent Protective Cover for NS12 and NS10
Transparent Protective Cover for NS8
Transparent Protective Cover for NS5
Chemical-resistant Cover for NS5
Replacement Battery for NS12/NS10/NS8/NS5
Memory Card (30 Mbytes)
Memory Card (64 Mbytes)

HMC-AP001

Memory Card Adapter (for connecting Personal Computer PC Card Reader/Writer)

Note: The CX-Designer includes a transfer program and standard PT system program.

Connecting Cables and Connectors

Cable with Connector (PT-to-PLC)

XW2Z-200T

Cable
length
2m

XW2Z-500T

5m

XW2Z-200T-2

2m

XW2Z-500T-2

5m

Model

Applicable Units
Units with 9-pin connector and built-in 1:1 NT
Link function.
CPM2C peripheral port

Communications
method
NT Link
(RS-232C only)
NT Link
(RS-232C only)

Specifications
9-pin-to-9-pin

9-pin-to-CPM2C
peripheral port

Cable with Connector (PT-to-Personal Computer)

Model
XW2Z-S002

Cable
length
2m

Applicable computer

Specifications

DOS and 98NX computers

Female 9-pin-to-male 9-pin

A-51

Appendix 8 Standard Models

Ethernet Cable (PT-to-Personal Computer)

Particular models are not specified, but use a cable that meets the following specifications.
Item
Conformance standards
Transmission medium
Transmission distance
Connector

Specifications
Conforms to IEEE 802.3 / Ethernet (10/100Base-T).
2 pair Cat 3 UTP 22-26AWG, Cat 5, Cat 5e, Cat 6
100 m (node-to-hub and hub-to-hub)
8-pin modular connector

RS-232C Connecting Cable

Model
AWG28 5P IFVV-SB

Specifications
Multiconductor shielded cable
Manufactured by Fujikura Densen.
Multiconductor shielded cable
Manufactured by Hitachi Densen.

CO-MA-VV-SB 5P 28AWG

Controller Link Communications Cable

Use one of the twisted-pair cables listed below as the communications cable.
Model
Li2Y-FCY2x0.56qmm
1x2xAWG-20PE+Tr.
CUSN+PVC
#9207
ESVC0.5x2C

Manufacturer
Remarks
KROMBERG & SHUBERT, Department German company
KOMTEC
DRAKA CABLES INDUSTRIAL
Spanish company
BELDEN
Bando Densen Co.

American company
Japanese company

Applicable Connectors for RS-232C

Name
Connector

Model
XM2A-2501
XM2D-2501
XM2A-0901
XM2D-0901

Connector hood

DB-25P
XM2S-2511
XM2S-2513
XM2S-0911
XM2S-0911-E
XM2S-0913
DB-C2-J9

Specifications
25-pin type (male), Manufactured by OMRON.
25-pin type (female), Manufactured by OMRON.
(for DOS computers)
9-pin type (male), Manufactured by OMRON.
9-pin type (female), Manufactured by OMRON.
(for DOS computers)
25-pin type (male), Manufactured by JAE.
25-pin type, mm screws, Manufactured by OMRON.
25-pin type, inch screws, Manufactured by OMRON.
9-pin type, mm screws, Manufactured by OMRON.
9-pin type, mm screws, Manufactured by OMRON.
9-pin type, inch screws, Manufactured by OMRON.
25-pin type, Manufactured by JAE.

Cables for CS1-series PLC Peripheral Port

Model
CS1W-CN118

A-52

Specifications
Manufactured by OMRON
(CS1-series peripheral port-to-D-Sub female 9-pin connector)

Appendix 9 List of Optional Products

Appendix 9
A-9-1

List of Optional Products

Anti-reflection Sheets: NS12-KBA04, NS7-KBA04, NT30-KBA04

Attached to the display to prevent random reflection and dirt. The sheets are all colorless
and transparent. One set contains five sheets.

Dimensions
N
RU

Material
Polyester film
Model

Specifications

NS12-KBA04
NS7-KBA04
NT30-KBA04

A-9-2

Mounting method
Double-sided tape

Anti-reflection Sheets for NS12/NS10

Anti-reflection Sheets for NS8
Anti-reflection Sheets for NS5

Dimensions (Unit: mm)

X
269.5
188.6
155.0

Y
205.5
147.2
115.0

Protective Covers: NS12-KBA05(N), NS7-KBA05(N),

NT31C-KBA05(N)
This cover protects the display surface from oil, dust, and finger marks. One set contains
five covers.

PO

N
RU
W
ER

N
RU

A-53

Appendix 9 List of Optional Products

Dimensions

With Cover Mounted

Y
B

Z
X

A
Note: Do not lift the product by grasping the shaded areas.

Material
Polyester film

Mounting method
Double-sided tape

Model

NS12-KBA05

NS7-KBA05

NT31C-KBA05

NS12-KBA05N
NS7-KBA05N
NT31C-KBA05N

A-9-3

Specifications

Opaque White Protective

Cover for NS12 and NS10
(anti-reflection coating)
Opaque White Protective
Cover for NS8
(anti-reflection coating)
Opaque White Protective
Cover for NS5
(anti-reflection coating)
Transparent Protective Cover
for NS12 and NS10
Transparent Protective Cover
for NS8
Transparent Protective Cover
for NS5

Dimensions (Unit: mm)

X
339

Y
265

Z
8.8

A
349

B
275

255

200

6.3

265

210

218

165

7.0

228

175

339

265

8.8

349

275

255

200

6.3

265

210

213

160

6.5

223

170

NT30-KBA01 Chemical-resistant Cover

This Cover on the front panel protects the Unit from chemicals. The whole sheet is opaque
white and made from silicon rubber.
Dimensions

Y
Z
X
Model

NT30-KBA01

A-54

Specifications

Chemical-resistant Cover for the -V1/-V2

Dimensions (Unit: mm)

X
196.4

Y
143.4

Z
5.2

Appendix 9 List of Optional Products

The Units resistance to chemicals is as shown below.

Resistant
Non-resistant
Boric acid
Hexane
Sulfuric acid
Lubricating oil
Nitrogen
Benzine
Ammonia gas
Butane
Carbon dioxide
Carbonic acid
Phenol
Chloric acid
Glycerin
Naphthaline
Aqua ammonia
Soybean oil
Calcium chloride
Toluene
Developing solution (Sodium thiosulfate)
Acetaldehyde
Lard
Contact an OMRON representative for information on resistance to any chemicals not
included in the table above. (The product can be used with chemicals to which silicon
rubber is resistant, even if those chemicals are not included in the Resistant column in
the table.)

A-9-4

Replacement Battery: CJ1W-BAT01

This is a lithium battery for backing up the contents of the memory.

CJ1W-BAT01

Model
CJ1W-BAT01

A-9-5

Specifications
Replacement Battery for NS12-V1/V2, NS10-V1/-V2, NS8-V1/-V2, NS5-V1/-V2

Recommended Memory Cards

The Memory Card is an external memory that can save and read screen data, log data,
and system programs between the PT and computer. By using the HMC-AP001, this data
can be exchanged with computers that are connected to PC Cards.
The memory capacity depends on the model of the Memory Card used.
Model
HMC-EF183

Capacity
128 Mbytes

A-55

Appendix 9 List of Optional Products

A-9-6

NS-CLK21 Controller Link Interface Unit

This Expansion Unit enables Controller Link communications with PLCs and FA
computers.
Applicable PTs: NS12-TS0@ or NS10-TV0@
Inapplicable PTs: NS8-TV@@ or NS5-SQ0@/TQ0@/MQ0@

A-9-7

NS-CA001/CA002 Video Input Unit

This Expansion Unit enables displaying video images from video cameras or Vision Sensors on the PT.
An external analog RGB image can be input with the NS-CA002 and displayed on the PT.
Refer to the NS Series RGB/Video Input Unit Operation Manual (Cat. No. V086) for details
on the NS-CA002.
Applicable PTs: NS12-TS0@, NS10-TV0@ or NS8-TV@@

A-9-8

Attachments: NS12-ATT01(B)/ NS12-ATT02/NS8-ATT01/

NS8-ATT02
NS-series PTs and NT-series PTs are different sizes and have different panel cutout dimensions. To replace an NT-series PT with an NS-series PT, install an attachment to the
control panel in which the NT-series PT was mounted before mounting the NS-series PT.
Model
NS12-ATT01
NS12-ATT01B
NS12-ATT02
NS8-ATT01
NS8-ATT02

A-56

Specifications
NT625C/631/631C Series to NS12/10 Series
NT625C/631/631C Series to NS12/10 Series (black)
NT610C Series to NS12/10 Series
NT620S/620C/600S Series to NS8 Series
NT600M/600G/610G/612G Series to NS8 Series

Appendix 10 System Memory List

Appendix 10 System Memory List

System memory is used for exchanging information between the host and the PT, such as
controlling the PT and notifying the host of PT status.
The system memory is divided into bit and word sections.
System Bit Memory ($SB)
System bit memory ($SB) is used for exchanging information between the host and the PT
in bit units, such as controlling the PT and notifying the host of PT status.
The system bit memory contains 64 bits with predefined functions.
The system bit memory is listed in the following table.
Address
$SB0
$SB1
$SB2
$SB3
$SB4
$SB5
$SB6
$SB7
$SB8
$SB9
$SB10
$SB11
$SB12
$SB13
$SB14
$SB15
$SB16
$SB17
$SB18
$SB19
$SB20
$SB21
$SB22
$SB23
$SB24
$SB25

Classification
Notification
Notification
Notification
Control
Notification
Notification
Control
Control
Control
Control
Control
Notification
Control
Control
Control
Notification/control
Control
Control
Control
Control
Control
Control
Control
Control
Notification/control
Control

Function
RUN signal (Pulse)
RUN signal (Always ON)
Screen switch strobe
Prohibit Shifting to System Menu
Battery Low
Data Input Detector
Brightness adjust, high
Brightness adjust, medium
Brightness adjust, low
Backlight Control (screen saver Control)
Control Backlight Flashing
Backlight status
Continuous buzzer
Short intermittent buzzer
Long intermittent buzzer
Notification/Control of Video Input
Processing Priority Registration for Port A (NT Link 1:N)
Processing Priority Registration Port B (NT Link 1:N)
Display keypad with temporary input
Prohibit input
Contrast Adjustment (+10 levels) (NS5-SQ/MQ only)
Contrast Adjustment (+1 level) (NS5-SQ/MQ only)
Contrast Adjustment (1 level) (NS5-SQ/MQ only)
Contrast Adjustment (10 levels) (NS5-SQ/MQ only)
Video Capture
Starts Printing/Capture Screen (NS12/NS10/NS8 only)

$SB26

Control

Stops Printing

$SB27

Control

Test Pattern Printing

$SB28

Control

Printer Head Cleaning

$SB29

Control

Update Printer Status

$SB30

Notification

Printer Busy Status

$SB31
$SB32
$SB33
$SB34
$SB35
$SB36
$SB37
$SB38
$SB39
$SB40

Notification
Notification/control
Notification/control
Notification/control
Notification/control
Notification/control
Notification/control
Notification/control
Control
Control

Notification of Printer Error

Initialize Alarm/Event History
Save Alarm/Event History
Internal Holding Memory ($HB/$HW) Initialization
Initialize Data Log
Save Data Log
Initialize Operation Log
Save Operation Log
Log Functional Object Operation
Log Switch Screen Operation

A-57

Appendix 10 System Memory List

Address
Classification
Function
$SB41
Control
Log Macro Operation
$SB42
Notification/control
Initialize Error Log
$SB43
Notification/control
Save Error Log
$SB44

Reserved
$SB45
Control
Macro error dialog control
$SB46
Notification
Notification of Macro Error
$SB47
Notification
Logging Process or Video Capture Error Flag
$SB48
Notification
Memory Card Free Space Check Flag
$SB49
Notification/control
Stop Memory Card
$SB50
Notification
Memory Card Removing Status
$SB51
Notification
Periodical Data Log Save in Process Flag
$SB52
Notification
Data Block Operation Complete Flag
$SB53
Notification/control
Prohibit Starting of the Screen Saver
$SB54
Notification
Password level 1 operable status
$SB55
Notification
Password level 2 operable status
$SB56
Notification
Password level 3 operable status
$SB57
Notification
Password level 4 operable status
$SB58
Notification
Password level 5 operable status
$SB59

Reserved
$SB60

Reserved
$SB61

Reserved
$SB62

Reserved
$SB63

Reserved
The notification words are not write prohibited. In addition, the system will not restore values,
except when the status has changed.

System memory is allocated to PLC areas as shown below.

Allocated Addresses for System Memory can be displayed by selecting PT System Settings in the CX-Designer and clicking the Initial Tab.
$SB + m
15

0
Word m: $SB0 to $SB15

31

16
Word m+1: $SB16 to $SB31
32
Word m+2: $SB32 to $SB47
48
Word m+3: $SB48 to $SB63

47
63

System Word Memory ($SW)

System word memory ($SW) is used for exchanging information between the host and the
PT in word units, such as controlling the PT and notifying the host of PT status.
The system word memory contains 41 items with predefined functions.
The system word memory is listed in the following table.
Address
$SW0
$SW1
$SW2
$SW3
$SW4
$SW5
$SW6
$SW7
$SW8

A-58

Classification
Notification/control
Notification/control
Notification/control
Notification/control
Notification/control
Notification/control
Notification/control
Notification/control
Notification/control

Function
Current screen number
Display pop-up screen 1 number
Pop-up screen 1 display position (X coordinate)
Pop-up screen 1 display position (Y coordinate)
Display pop-up screen 2 number
Pop-up screen 2 display position (X coordinate)
Pop-up screen 2 display position (Y coordinate)
Display pop-up screen 3 number
Pop-up screen 3 display position (X coordinate)

Appendix 10 System Memory List

Address
Classification
Function
$SW9
Notification/control
Pop-up screen 3 display position (Y coordinate)
$SW10
Notification/control
Display label number
$SW11
Control
Destination (0: Printer/1: Memory Card)
$SW12

Reserved
$SW13
Control
Password number for input prohibit clear
$SW14
Notification
Current time (min, s)
$SW15
Notification
Current date and time (day, hour)
$SW16
Notification
Current date (year, month)
$SW17
Notification
Current day (day of the week)
$SW18
Notification
No. of generated alarms and events
$SW19
Notification
ID number for generated alarms and events
$SW20
Notification
ID number for cleared alarms and events
$SW21
Notification
Alarm/event ID when alarm/event object macro executed
$SW22

Reserved
$SW23
Notification
Macro execution error number
$SW24
Notification
Macro error screen number
$SW25
Notification
Macro error object ID number
$SW26
Notification
Error macro execution timing
$SW27
Control
Offset value for index I0
$SW28
Control
Offset value for index I1
$SW29
Control
Offset value for index I2
$SW30
Control
Offset value for index I3
$SW31
Control
Offset value for index I4
$SW32
Control
Offset value for index I5
$SW33
Control
Offset value for index I6
$SW34
Control
Offset value for index I7
$SW35
Control
Offset value for index I8
$SW36
Control
Offset value for index I9
$SW37
Notification/control
Data Log Group Number
$SW38
Notification
Data Block Error Number
$SW39
Notification
Authentication level
$SW40
Notification/control
Range of initialize Alarm/Event History
The notification words are not write prohibited. In addition, the system will not restore values,
except when the status has changed.

System word memory is allocated to PLC memory as shown below.

Allocated Addresses for System Memory can be displayed by selecting PT System Settings in the CX-Designer and clicking the Initial Tab.
$SW = n
Word n: $SW0
Word n+1: $SW1

Word n+40: SW40

Reference System memory can be allocated to PLC memory using the same procedure as
for NT-series PTs. For details, refer to 2-4-3 System Memory NT Compatibility in
the NS Series Programming Manual.

A-59

Appendix 11 Differences between "-V1"/"-V2" Models and Other Models

Appendix 11 Differences between "-V1"/"-V2" Models

and Other Models
In the NS Series, there are hardware items both with and without "-V1" and "-V2" at the
end of the model number.

Hardware items
without "-V1"

Hardware items
with "-V1"

Hardware items
with "-V2"

A-60

Model
NS12-TS00
NS12-TS01
NS10-TV00
NS10-TV-01
NS7-SV00
NS7-SV01
NS12-TS00-V1
NS12-TS01-V1
NS10-TV00-V1
NS10-TV01-V1
NS8-TV@0-V1
NS8-TV@1-V1
NS5-SQ00-V1
NS5-SQ01-V1
NS12-TS00-V2
NS12-TS01-V2
NS10-TS00-V2
NS10-TS01-V2
NS8-TV00-V2
NS8-TV01-V2
NS5-SQ00-V2
NS5-SQ01-V2
NS5-TQ00-V2
NS5-TQ01-V2
NS5-MQ00-V2
NS5-MQ01-V2

Notes
12.1 inches, no Ethernet connection
12.1 inches, Ethernet connection
10.4 inches, no Ethernet connection
10.4 inches, Ethernet connection
7.7 inches, no Ethernet connection
7.7 inches, Ethernet connection
12.1 inches, no Ethernet connection
12.1 inches, Ethernet connection
10.4 inches, no Ethernet connection
10.4 inches, Ethernet connection
8.0 inches, no Ethernet connection
8.0 inches, Ethernet connection
5.7 inches, no Ethernet connection
5.7 inches, Ethernet connection
12.1 inches, no Ethernet connection
12.1 inches, Ethernet connection
10.4 inches, no Ethernet connection
10.4 inches, Ethernet connection
8.4 inches, no Ethernet connection
8.4 inches, Ethernet connection
5.7 inches, no Ethernet connection
5.7 inches, Ethernet connection
5.7 inches, no Ethernet connection
5.7 inches, Ethernet connection
5.7 inches, no Ethernet connection
5.7 inches, Ethernet connection

Appendix 11 Differences between "-V1"/"-V2" Models and Other Models

The differences between "-V1" and "-V2" models and other models are shown below. For
details on the differences in software functions, refer to the Programming Manual.

Display
device
Display color
Display area
View angle

Expansion
memory
interface
USB HOST
USB Slave
Ethernet
conformance
standard
Replacement
Battery

Display
device
Display color

Display area
View angle

Expansion
memory
interface
USB HOST
USB Slave
Ethernet
conformance
standard
Replacement
Battery

Without "-V1" or "-V2"

NS12NS10NS8TS0@
TV0@
SV0@
High-definition TFT color
STN color
LCD
LCD
256 colors

12.1 inches
Left/right
60,
Top 45,
Bottom 55
With

10.4 inches
Left/right,
60,
Top 35,
Bottom 65

7.7 inches
Left/right
60,
Top 35,
Bottom 65
Without

Without
Without
10Base-T
(Ethernet models only)
C500-BAT08

With "-V1"
NS12NS10NS8TS0@-V1
TV0@-V1
TV@@-V1
High-definition TFT color LCD

NS5SQ0@-V1
STN color
LCD
256 colors (32,768 colors for BMP/JPEG images, NS5:
4,096 colors for BMP/JPEG images)
12.1 inches 10.4 inches 8.0 inches
5.7 inches
Left/right
Left/right
Left/right
Left/right
60,
60,
65,
50,
Top 45,
Top 35,
Top 55,
Top 30,
Bottom 55 Bottom 65 Bottom 65 Bottom 50
Without

With
With
10Base-T/100Base-T
(Ethernet models only)
CPM2ABAT01

NS12-TS0@NS10-TV0@V2
V2
High-definition TFT color LCD

CJ1W-BAT01

With "-V2"
NS8-TV0@-V2 NS5-SQ0@-V2

256 colors (32,768 colors for BMP/JPEG

images)

12.1 inches
Left/right
60,
Top 45,
Bottom 75
Without

10.4 inches
Left/right 60,
Top 35,
Bottom 65

Without

8.4 inches
Left/right
65,
Top 50,
Bottom 60

With
With
10Base-T/100Base-T (Ethernet models only)

STN color
LCD
256 colors
(4,096 colors
for BMP/JPEG
images)
5.7 inches
Left/right 50,
Top 45,
Bottom 50

NS5-TQ0@-V2

High-definition
TFT color LCD
256 colors
(32,768 colors
for BMP/JPEG
images)
Left/right 70,
Top 70,
Bottom 50

NS5-MQ0@V2
Monochrome
STN LCD
Monochrome/
16 grayscale
levels

Left/right 45,
Top 20,
Bottom 40

Without

CJ1W-BAT01

A-61

Appendix 12 NS5 System Menu

Appendix 12 NS5 System Menu

This section describes the NS5 System Menu screen. Some items are slightly different for
the NS8, NS10, and NS12. Check all items in the table below before setting or monitoring.

(9)

(1)

(5)
(2)
(6)
(3)
(7)
(4)
(8)

No.

(1)

Setting/
display
Setting/
display
Setting

6-2-7

Setting

6-2-1

Alarm/Event History

Setting

6-2-2

Data Log

Setting

6-2-3

Operation Log

Setting

6-2-4

Error Log

Setting

6-2-5

Start-up Waiting Time

Setting

6-3-1

Screen Saver

Setting

6-3-2

Key Press Sound

Setting

6-3-3

Buzzer Sound

Setting

6-3-4

Backlight

Setting

6-3-5

Contrast

Setting

6-3-11

Calendar Check

Setting

6-3-6

Changing Value in Device Monitor Setting

Setting

6-3-10

Menu

Initialize

Item/settings

Memory Card (remove)

Initializing Internal Holding Memories
($HB/$HW)
Screen Data Area Format

Reference

6-2-8

History File Initialize or Save

(2)

A-62

PT Settings

Appendix 12 NS5 System Menu

No.

(3)

Project Title

Setting/
display
Display

6-4-1

Number of Labels

Display

6-4-2

Initial Screen

Setting

6-4-3

Initial Label

Setting

6-4-4

Alarm/Event History

Display

6-4-5

Data Log

Display

6-4-6

Operation Log

Display

6-4-7

Error Log

Display

6-4-8

Display

6-4-9

Setting

6-5

Level

Setting

6-5-2

Time Out

Setting

6-5-2

Timeout (min)

Setting

6-5-2

Switch Screen when canceling

authentication
Switch Screen No.

Setting

6-5-2

Setting

6-5-2

Menu

Project

Item/settings

Reference

History Recording Method

(4)

Password

Addresses Allocated to System Memory

($SB,$SW)
Password Change
Password mode

(5)

(6)

Comm.

Data Check

Automatic Communications Recovery

(Comms. Auto-return)
Timeout Interval

Setting

6-6-1

Setting

6-6-1

Retry Count

Setting

6-6-1

Serial Port A or B Communications Settings

Setting

6-6-1

Ethernet Communications Settings

Setting

6-6-4

Screen Number

Setting

6-7

Show Address

Setting

6-7

A-63

Appendix 12 NS5 System Menu

(7)

Special Screen

Error Occurrence/Frequency for All History Files

Alarm History

Display

6-8-1

Operations Log

Display

6-8-2

Error Log

Display

6-8-3

Display

6-8-11

6-8-4

Communication Test

Setting/
display
Setting

6-8-5

Display Capture Data

Display

6-8-8

Memory Card Transfer

Setting

6-8-9

External Application
Start-up

Setting

6-8-10

System Version
Special Functions
Device Monitor

(8)

(9)

A-64

Hardware
Check

LCD Check

Display

6-9-1

Touch Switch Check

Display

6-9-2

Language Selection

Language Selection

Display

6-2-6

Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the cover of the manual.

Cat. No. V083-E1-07

Revision code

The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page
numbers refer to the previous version.
Revision code
01
02

Date
April 2003
October 2003

03
04

July 2004
February 2005

05

October 2005

06
07

July 2006
July 2007

Revised content
Original production
Added a new section on starting external applications.
Added information throughout the manual to include the NS5-V1.
Changes and corrections for version upgrade.
Changes and corrections related to the addition of the NS5-V2
Series.
Changes and corrections related to the addition of the NS12-V2,
NS10-V2, and NS8-V2 Series.
Changes related to release of the CX-Designer.
Changes and corrections for version upgrade.